Autodesk Algor Simulation - 2011

Autodesk Algor
Simulation 2011
Seminar Notes
II
Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Seminar Notes
3/15/2010
2010 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved.

Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may
not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose.
Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the
copyright holder.
Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other
countries: 3DEC (design/ logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl
design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/ logo), Algor, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD
Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL
Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor,
Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch,
AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine,
Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper,
Combustion,
Communication
Specification,
Constructware,
Content
Explorer,
Create>whats>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor,
Designers Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio
(design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG
TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot,
FBX, FEMPRO, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax,
Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler,
iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse,
Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop,
Moldflow, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX,
Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PIPEPLUS, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with
Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor,
RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer, Reveal, Revit,
Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo),
SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual,
Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual
LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/ logo).
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA
and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks.
Disclaimer
THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY
AUTODESK, INC. AS IS. AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE
MATERIALS.
Published by:
Autodesk, Inc.
111 Mclnnis Parkway
San Rafael, CA 94903, USA
3/15/2010
III
IV
3/15/2010
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction.................................................. 1
Overview........................................................................................................................................1
Software Installation, Services, and Support ...............................................................................1
Installing and Running Autodesk Algor Simulation...........................................................1

System Requirements...........................................................................................................2
Autodesk Algor Simulation Help ...........................................................................................3
Subscription Center ...............................................................................................................4
Web Links ..............................................................................................................................4
Tutorials .................................................................................................................................4
Webcasts and Web Courses ................................................................................................4
How to Receive Technical Support ......................................................................................5
Updates..................................................................................................................................5
Background of FEA.......................................................................................................................6
What is Finite Element Analysis? .........................................................................................6
Basic FEA Concepts .............................................................................................................7
How Does Autodesk Algor Simulation Work? ......................................................................9
The General Flow of an Analysis in Autodesk Algor Simulation .........................................9
Stress and Strain Review .......................................................................................................... 10
Equations Used in the Solution .......................................................................................... 10
Limits of Static Stress with Linear Material Models ........................................................... 11
Mechanical Event Simulation (MES) Overcomes Limitations .......................................... 11
Hand-Calculated Example ................................................................................................. 12
Heat Transfer Review ................................................................................................................ 13
Equations Used in the Solution .......................................................................................... 13
Linear Dynamics Review ........................................................................................................... 14
Chapter 1: Using Autodesk Algor Simulation ................ 15

Chapter Objectives .................................................................................................................... 15
Navigating the User Interface .................................................................................................... 15
Toolbars .............................................................................................................................. 17
Using the Keyboard and Mouse ........................................................................................ 18
Introduction to the ViewCube ............................................................................................. 19
Additional View Controls .................................................................................................... 20
Legacy View Controls in Autodesk Algor Simulation ........................................................ 21
Steel Yoke Example .................................................................................................................. 22
Opening and Meshing the Model....................................................................................... 22
Setting up the Model .......................................................................................................... 23
Analyzing the Model ........................................................................................................... 27
Reviewing the Results........................................................................................................ 27
Creating an Animation........................................................................................................ 28
Generating a Report ........................................................................................................... 28
Chapter 2: Static Stress Analysis Using CAD Solid Models ... 33

Archiving a Model ...................................................................................................................... 33
Types of Brick Elements ............................................................................................................ 34
Generating Meshes for CAD Models ........................................................................................ 35
Creating a Mesh ................................................................................................................. 36
Model Mesh Settings Options ......................................................................................... 37
3/15/2010
Table of Contents
Tips for Modeling with CAD Solid Model Software for FEA .................................................... 39
Working with Various Unit Systems .......................................................................................... 40
Loading Options ......................................................................................................................... 42
Load Cases......................................................................................................................... 43
Constraint Options ..................................................................................................................... 45
Modeling Symmetry and Antisymmetry............................................................................. 45
Design Scenarios ....................................................................................................................... 46
FEA Object Groups.................................................................................................................... 47
Local Coordinate Systems ........................................................................................................ 48
Defining Materials and Using the Material Library Manager ................................................... 49
Adding Material Libraries and Material Properties ............................................................ 51
Examples of Loads and Constraints ......................................................................................... 54
When to Use Displacement Boundary Elements.............................................................. 54
Using Local Coordinate Systems....................................................................................... 54
Using Surface Variable Loads ........................................................................................... 58
Exercise A: Frame Full to Quarter-Symmetry Model Comparison ......................... 63
Chapter 3: Results Evaluation and Presentation ............. 65

Background on How Results are Calculated............................................................................ 65
How to Evaluate Results ........................................................................................................... 66
Displacement Results ........................................................................................................ 66
Stress Results..................................................................................................................... 68
Reaction Force Results ...................................................................................................... 70
Inquiring on the Results at a Node..................................................................................... 70
Graphing the Results.......................................................................................................... 71
Presentation Options ................................................................................................................. 73
Contour Plots ...................................................................................................................... 73
Image File Creation ............................................................................................................ 77
Animating FEA Results ...................................................................................................... 78
Using the Configure Report Utility...................................................................................... 79
Exercise B: Yoke Evaluation of Results and Generation of a Report .................... 81
Chapter 4: Midplane Meshing and Plate Elements ............. 83

Meshing Options ........................................................................................................................ 83
Element Options......................................................................................................................... 88
Plate Theory and Assumptions .......................................................................................... 88
Loading Options ......................................................................................................................... 89
Example of Defining the Element Normal Point ................................................................ 89
Result Options ............................................................................................................................ 93
Exercise C: Midplane Meshing and Plate Element Orientation.................................. 95
Chapter 5: Meshing ......................................... 97

Refinement Options ................................................................................................................... 97
Automatic Refinement Points............................................................................................. 97
Global Refinement Options ................................................................................................ 99
Creating Joints ......................................................................................................................... 101
Creating Bolts ........................................................................................................................... 103
VI
3/15/2010
Table of Contents
Mesh Convergence Testing .................................................................................................... 105
Performing a Mesh Study ................................................................................................ 106
Exercise D: Yoke and Clevis Assembly ..................................................................... 107
Chapter 6: Introduction to Contact ........................ 109

Chapter Objectives .................................................................................................................. 109
Uses for Contact ...................................................................................................................... 109
Contact Options ....................................................................................................................... 109
Setting up Contact Pairs................................................................................................... 109
Types of Contact .............................................................................................................. 110
Friction .............................................................................................................................. 111
Surface Contact Direction ................................................................................................ 112
Contact Example...................................................................................................................... 113
How to Model Shrink Fits: ................................................................................................ 113
Shrink Fit Example ................................................................................................................... 114
Case 1............................................................................................................................... 116
Case 2............................................................................................................................... 119
Result Options .......................................................................................................................... 120
Exercise E: Yoke Model with Contact ........................................................................ 123
Chapter 7: Introduction to Linear Dynamics ................ 125

Modal Analysis ......................................................................................................................... 125
Lumped Masses....................................................................................................................... 126
Load Stiffening ......................................................................................................................... 127
Example of Natural Frequency (Modal) Analysis ................................................................... 128
Meshing the Model ........................................................................................................... 129
Adding Constraints ........................................................................................................... 130
Defining the Materials....................................................................................................... 130
Analyzing the Model ......................................................................................................... 130
Reviewing the Results...................................................................................................... 131
Critical Buckling Analysis ......................................................................................................... 132
Setting Up a Critical Buckling Analysis ............................................................................ 133
Result Options .......................................................................................................................... 134
Other Linear Dynamics Analyses............................................................................................ 134
Exercise F: Concrete Platform .................................................................................... 135
Chapter 8: Steady-State Heat Transfer ..................... 137

3-D Radiator Example ............................................................................................................. 137
Meshing the Model ........................................................................................................... 138
Setting up the Model ........................................................................................................ 139
Analyzing the Model ......................................................................................................... 140
Reviewing the Results...................................................................................................... 141
Meshing Options ...................................................................................................................... 142
Thermal Contact ............................................................................................................... 142
Element Options....................................................................................................................... 143
Rod Elements ................................................................................................................... 143
2-D Elements .................................................................................................................... 143
Plate Elements ................................................................................................................. 144
Brick and Tetrahedral Elements ...................................................................................... 145
3/15/2010
VII
Table of Contents
Loading Options ....................................................................................................................... 147
Nodal Loads...................................................................................................................... 147
Surface Loads .................................................................................................................. 149
Element Loads.................................................................................................................. 153
Body-to-Body Radiation ................................................................................................... 155
Controlling Nonlinear Iterations ........................................................................................ 159
Result Options .......................................................................................................................... 160
Exercise G: Infrared Detector Model .......................................................................... 163
Chapter 9: Transient Heat Transfer ........................ 165

When to Use Transient Heat Transfer .................................................................................... 165
Element Options....................................................................................................................... 165
Loading Options ....................................................................................................................... 165
Load Curves ..................................................................................................................... 166
Nodal Heat Source ........................................................................................................... 167
Controlling Nodal and Surface Applied Temperatures ................................................... 168
Result Options .......................................................................................................................... 168
Exercise H: Transistor Case Model ............................................................................ 169
Chapter 10: Thermal Stress ................................ 171

Multiphysics Overview ............................................................................................................. 171
Performing a Thermal Stress Analysis ................................................................................... 172
Exercise I: Disk Brake Rotor Heat-up and Stress ..................................................... 175
Self Study: Linear Dynamics Supplement .................... 177

Overview................................................................................................................................... 177
Response Spectrum Analysis ................................................................................................. 177
Example of a Response Spectrum Analysis .......................................................................... 179
Exercise SS-1: Tower Model Response Spectrum Analysis ................................. 185
Random Vibration Analysis ..................................................................................................... 187
Example of Random Vibration Analysis ................................................................................. 188
Exercise SS-2: Tower Model Random Vibration Analysis ..................................... 193
Frequency Response .............................................................................................................. 195
Exercise SS-3: Tower Model Frequency Response ............................................... 199
Transient Stress (Modal Superposition) Analysis .................................................................. 201
Transient Stress (Direct Integration) ....................................................................................... 204
Exercise SS-4: Pressure Vessel Model Transient Stress (Direct Integration) ..... 205
Appendix A Finite Element Method Using Hand Calculations . 207

Appendix B Analysis Types in Autodesk Algor Simulation .. 215
Appendix C Linear Loads and Constraints .................. 229
Appendix D Material Model Options ........................ 249
VIII
3/15/2010
Introduction
Overview
This course will introduce you to the analysis products available within Autodesk Algor
Simulation. These capabilities include static stress with linear material models, heat transfer,
and linear dynamics analyses. The course will focus exclusively on models originating from
CAD solid modeling programs. You will learn the various meshing options available for
creating solid and plate elements. The available load and constraint options for each of the
covered analysis types will also be presented. You will learn how to evaluate the results of
the analyses and how to create presentations of the results, including images, animations and
HTML reports. This course is a prerequisite to the more advanced topics of Mechanic Event
Simulation (MES) and Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD).
Software Installation, Services, and Support

Installing and Running Autodesk Algor Simulation
The simulation software is distributed on DVDs with the exception of software for the Linux
platform, which is distributed on CDs. In addition, the software may be downloaded from the
Autodesk website. When you place the software DVD into a DVD-ROM drive, a launch
dialog having four options will appear. If you want to set up the software on a client
workstation, whether you will be using a license locked to a single computer or a network
license, press the "Install Products" button. If using a network license, you must already
have the license server software installed to a computer on the network. If you wish to create
pre-configured deployments for installing the product on multiple client workstations, choose
the "Create Deployments" command. If you want to set up the computer as a license server
to control the number of concurrent users through a network, or, if you wish to install optional
reporting tools, press the "Install Tools and Utilities" command. Finally, a fourth command
on the launch screen, "Read the Documentation," leads to a screen from which you can
access a ReadMe file and other installation and licensing guides.
During the product installation process, you will need to specify your name, the name of your
organization. You will also need to enter the product serial number and the product key.
Otherwise, you will be limited to a 30-day trial period. To customize the installation location
on your computer, the components to be installed, and/or to specify a network license server,
you will have to press the "Configuration" button that appears on one of the screens during
the installation process. Then, follow the prompts, provide the required information, and click
the "Configuration Complete" button to continue the installation process.
Any time after the installation, you will be able to start the software by using the available
shortcut found in the "Start" menu folder, "All Programs: Autodesk: Autodesk Algor
Simulation." The version number is included in the start menu folder name and shortcut.
The name of the shortcut will depend upon which package has been purchased ("Simulation,"
"Simulation MES," "Simulation CFD," or "Simulation Professional"). In the dialog
that appears when the program is launched, you will be able to open an existing model or
begin a new model. The simulation software will be used to create, analyze, and review the
results of an analysis within a single user interface, regardless of the analysis type.
3/15/2010
Introduction
System Requirements
We recommend the following system specifications for a Microsoft Windows platform
running Autodesk Algor Simulation. These specifications will allow you to achieve the best
performance for large models and advanced analysis types.
32-Bit
64-Bit *
Dual Core or Dual Processor Intel 64

or AMD 64, 3 GHz or higher
Dual Core or Dual Processor Intel 64

or AMD 64, 3 GHz or higher
2 GB RAM or higher (3 GB for MES

and CFD applications)
8 GB RAM or higher
100 GB of free disk space or higher
30 GB of free disk space or higher
256 MB or higher OpenGL

accelerated graphics card
512 MB or higher OpenGL

accelerated graphics card
DVD-ROM drive
DVD-ROM drive
Supported Operating Systems:
Microsoft Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit editions)

Microsoft Vista (32-bit and 64-bit editions)
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 and Windows Server 2008
Microsoft Windows XP (32-bit and 64-bit editions)
Linux **
Other Requirements (All Platforms):
Mouse or pointing device

Sound card and speakers ***
Internet connection ***
Web browser with Adobe Flash Player 10 (or higher) plug-in ***
* We recommend usage of a 64-bit version of the operating system to run large models of any
analysis type and for Mechanical Event Simulation, CFD, and Multiphysics analyses.
While a 32-bit machine can be configured for larger system memory sizes, architectural
issues of the operating system limit the benefit of the additional memory.
** Linux may be used as a platform for running the solution phase of the analysis only. It
may be used for a distributed processing (or clustering) platform. However, pre- and
post-processing is done in the graphical user interface, which must be installed and run
on a Microsoft Windows platform.
*** These requirements are due to the use of multimedia in our product line and the
availability of distance learning webcasts, software demos, and related media.
Minimum system requirements and additional recommendations for Linux platforms may be
found on the Autodesk website. To navigate to the Autodesk Algor Simulation web page,
access the HELP pull-down menu within the user interface, select the "Web Links" pull-out
menu, and choose the "Autodesk Algor Simulation" link.
3/15/2010
Introduction
Autodesk Algor Simulation Help

Autodesk Algor Simulation Help, often referred to as the Help files or users guide, contains
the following information:
Documentation for all of the model creation options within the user interface
Documentation for all of the Autodesk Algor Simulation analysis types
Documentation for all of the result options available within the user interface
Step-by-step examples that illustrate many modeling and analysis options
How to Access the Help Files
From the user interface, access the HELP pull-down menu and select the "Contents"
command. The Autodesk Algor Simulation Help title page of will appear.
You can navigate through the user's guide via the table of contents to the left or by using
the "Search" or "Index" tabs.
Features of the Help Files
Autodesk Algor Simulation Help is a set of compiled help files that are installed with the
software but are also accessible from the Autodesk website.
Hyperlinks and a table of contents make it easy to move quickly from topic to topic.
The Help window contains a standard Internet browser toolbar, so you can move forward
and backward and print with ease.
Figure I.1: Autodesk Algor Simulation Users Guide
3/15/2010
Introduction
Search the Help Files using Keywords
All of the pages in the Help files can be searched based on keywords.
The keywords are entered at the top of the "Search" tab on the left side of the Users
Guide screen. Topics that match the search criteria are listed below.
Keywords are used to search the Help files. You may use single or multiple keywords.
Boolean operators (AND, OR, NEAR, and NOT) are available to enhance the search utility.
Also, phrases may be enclosed in quotes to search only for a specific series of words.
Subscription Center
Along with your Autodesk Algor Simulation software purchase, you have the option of
purchasing various levels of Subscription Center access and support. The Subscription Center is
accessible via the "key" icon near the right end of the program title bar and also via the
"Help: Web Links" menu.
Through the Subscription Center, you can download software updates, service packs, and addon applications. You can access training media, such as topical webcasts. Finally, you can also
submit technical support requests via the Subscription Center.
Web Links
Within the HELP pull-down menu of the Autodesk Algor Simulation user interface, there is a
"Web Links" pull-out menu. The following content can be accessed via the web links within
this menu:
Autodesk Algor Simulation product page

Subscription Center
Services and Support information
Discussion Group
Training course information
Autodesk Labs where you may obtain free tools and explore developing technologies
Manufacturing Community
Tutorials
Tutorials are available that demonstrate many of the capabilities of the Autodesk Algor
Simulation software. Each analysis is presented through step-by-step instructions with
illustrations to assist the user. The tutorials are accessed from the "Help: Tutorials"
command and the associated model files are in the "\Tutorials\Models" subdirectory within
the program installation folder. The tutorials will appear next to the user interface. You will
be able to follow the steps using the software without switching between the two windows.
Webcasts and Web Courses

Webcasts focus on the capabilities and features of the software, on new functionality, on
accuracy verification examples, and on interoperability with various CAD solid modeling
packages. These streaming media presentations are available for on-demand viewing from
the Subscription Center via your web browser. Similarly, web courses are also available for
on-demand viewing. Web courses are typically longer in duration than webcasts and focus on
more in-depth training regarding the effective usage of your simulation software. The topics
cover a wide variety of application scenarios.
4
3/15/2010
Introduction
For a list of available webcasts and web courses, follow the "Training" link from the home
page of the Subscription Center. Choose the "Autodesk Algor Simulation" product in the
"Browse the Catalog" list. This leads to the Autodesk Algor Simulation e-Learning page, in
which the available webcasts and web courses are listed according to topic.
How to Receive Technical Support

Technical support is reachable through several contact methods. The means you can use may
depend upon the level of support that was purchased. For example, customers with "Silver"
support must obtain their technical support from the reseller that sold them the software. "Gold"
subscription customers may obtain support directly from Autodesk.
Five ways to contact Technical Support:
Reseller:
Subscription Center: Access the Subscription Center from the link provided in the program
interface. Click the Tech Support link on the left side of the page
and then click on the "Request Support" link.
Autodesk Phone:
(412) 967-2700 [or in USA/Canada: (800) 482-5467]
Autodesk Fax:
(412) 967-2781
Autodesk E-mail:
service.algor@autodesk.com
Obtain phone, fax, and/or e-mail information from your reseller.
When contacting Technical Support:
Have your contract number ready before contacting Technical Support.
Know the current version number of your software.
Have specific questions ready.
Remember, Technical Support personnel cannot perform, comment on, or make

judgments regarding the validity of engineering work.
Updates
The software is updated with new functionality on a continual basis. The following three
types of releases are provided:
1.
A major version: Indicated by the four-digit year of the software release (based upon
the Autodesk fiscal year, not the calendar year)
2.
A "subscription" version: Customers with a current maintenance subscription are

eligible for additional releases that may be made available between major product version
releases. These are designated by the addition of the word "Subscription" after the major
version number.
3.
A service pack: Incorporates minor improvements to a major or subscription release and

is indicated by the letters "SP" and a service pack number after the major or subscription
version number.
3/15/2010
Introduction
How to Determine the Software Version
Access the HELP pull-down menu in the user interface and select the "About" command.
This dialog will display the version that you are using. In addition, the program title bar and
the splash screen that appears at each program launch will indicate the major version number
of the software. However, as with the start menu group name and program shortcut, it will
not indicate the subscription and service pack variants.
How to Obtain an Update
Update notifications are provided via the "Communication Center" within the user interface.
The Communication Center icon is located at the right end of the program window title bar.
Whenever new information is available, the state of the Communication Center icon changes.
The Communication Center provides up-to-date product support information, software
patches, subscription announcements, articles, and other product information through a
connection to the Internet. Users may specify how frequently the Live Update information
will be polledon-demand, daily, weekly, or monthly. When a program update notification
is received, the user will be given the option of downloading and installing it.
Background of FEA
What is Finite Element Analysis?
Finite element analysis (FEA) is a computerized method for predicting how a real-world
object will react to forces, heat, vibration, etc. in terms of whether it will break, wear out or
function according to design. It is called "analysis", but in the product design cycle it is used
to predict what will happen when the product is used.
The finite element method works by breaking a real object down into a large number (1,000s
or 100,000s) of elements (imagine little cubes). The behavior of each element, which is
regular in shape, is readily predicted by a set of mathematical equations. The computer then
adds up all the individual behaviors to predict the behavior of the actual object.
The "finite" in finite element analysis comes from the idea that there are a finite number of
elements in the model. The structure is discretized and is not based on a continuous solution.
As in any discrete method, the finer the increments or elements, the more precise the solution.
Previously, engineers employed integral and differential calculus, which broke objects down
into an infinite number of elements.
The finite element method is employed to predict the behavior of objects with respect to
virtually all physical phenomena:
Mechanical stress (stress analysis)

Mechanical vibration (dynamics)
Heat transfer - conduction, convection, radiation
Fluid flow - both liquid and gaseous fluids
Electrostatic or MEMS (Micro Electro Mechanical Systems)
3/15/2010
Introduction
Basic FEA Concepts

Nodes and Elements
A node is a coordinate location in space where the degrees of freedom (DOFs) are defined.
The DOFs of a node represent the possible movements of this point due to the loading of the
structure. The DOFs also represent which forces and moments are transferred from one
element to the next. Also, deflection and stress results are usually given at the nodes.
An element is a mathematical relation that defines how the DOFs of one node relate to the next.
Elements can be lines (beams or trusses), 2-D areas, 3-D areas (plates) or solids (bricks and
tetrahedra). The mathematical relation also defines how the deflections create strains and stresses.
Degrees of Freedom
The degrees of freedom at a node characterize the response and represent the relative
possible motion of a node.
The type of element being used will characterize which DOFs a node will require.
Some analysis types have only one DOF at a node. An example of this is temperature in
a thermal analysis.
A structural beam element, on the other hand, would have all of the DOFs shown in
Figure I.2. "T" represents translational movement and "R" represents rotational movement
about the X, Y and Z axis directions, resulting in a maximum of six degrees of freedom.
Figure I.2: Degrees of Freedom of a Node

Element Connectivity Conventional Bonding
Elements can only communicate to one another via common nodes. In the left half of
Figure I.3, forces will not be transferred between the elements. Elements must have common
nodes to transfer loads from one to the next, such as in the right half of Figure I.3.
No Communication
Between the Elements
Communication
Between the Elements
Figure I.3: Communication through Common Nodes
3/15/2010
Introduction
Element Connectivity "Smart Bonding"
With the introduction of "Smart Bonding" it is now possible to connect adjacent parts to each
other without having to match the meshes (i.e., common nodes at part boundaries are no
longer mandatory). This feature is available for both CAD and hand-built models and is
applicable to the following analysis types:
Static Stress with Linear Material Models

Natural Frequency (Modal)
Transient Stress (Direct Integration)
Figure I.4, is a pictorial example of two adjacent parts that may be connected via smart
bonding. Smart bonding is disabled by default for both new and legacy models (that is, those
created prior to implementation of the smart bonding feature). The option may be changed
within the "Contact" tab of the Analysis Parameters dialog. Note that where nodal
coordinates fall within the default or user-specified tolerance of each other, they will be
matched in the conventional manner. Other nodes along the bonded surfaces or edges those
at a relative distance greater than the tolerance will be connected by means of multipoint
constraint equations (MPCs). Also note that the "Use virtual imprinting" option within the
"Model" dialog of the mesh settings options will minimize the likelihood that smart bonding
will be needed or will occur for CAD-based assemblies. This option attempts to imprint
smaller parts on larger parts where they meet, forcing them to have identical meshes.
Figure I.4: Connection via "Smart Bonding"

Types of Elements
The actual supported and calculated DOFs are dependent upon the type of element being
used. A node with translational DOFs can move in the corresponding directions and can
transmit/resist the corresponding forces. A node with rotational DOFs can rotate about the
corresponding axes and can transmit/resist the corresponding moments.
Briefly, the general element types are as follows (more details will be given in later chapters and
in the Advanced Modeling Supplement):
Line elements: A line connecting 2 nodes (such as beams, trusses, springs, thermal
rods, and others).
2-D elements: YZ-planar elements that are triangular or quadrilateral (3 or 4 lines

enclosing an area).
3-D plates or shells: Planar or nearly planar elements in 3-D space. Each must be
triangular or quadrilateral and they represent a thin part with a specified thickness.
Brick (solid) elements: Must be enclosed volumes with 4, 5, or 6 faces (triangular

and/or quadrilateral) and with 4, 5, 6 or 8 corner nodes.
3/15/2010
Introduction
DOFs for element types:
Truss: Translation in X, Y and Z.

Beam: Both translation and rotation in X, Y and Z.
2-D: Translation in Y and Z.
Plate: Five degrees of freedom out-of-plane rotation is not considered.
Brick: Translation in X, Y and Z.
How Does Autodesk Algor Simulation Work?
The software transforms an engineering model with an infinite number of unknowns into
a finite model.
This is an idealized mathematical model.
The model is defined by nodes, elements, loads and constraints.
The user interface can be effectively used for the design, analysis and evaluation phases of a
typical design process.
The simulation software can be extremely useful during the initial concept and design phase to
identify areas that can be improved.
The simulation software can also be used to quickly evaluate a concept, saving time and
engineering resources.
This does not necessarily replace the testing needed to evaluate a final design; however
the goal is to minimize the prototype and testing stages of design.
The General Flow of an Analysis in Autodesk Algor Simulation

Create a Mesh
Start the simulation program

Open your model in the FEA Editor environment
Select the analysis type
Create your mesh
Define the FEA Data
Assign the loads and constraints

Define the material
Define the analysis parameters
Run the Analysis

Review and Present Results
Review the desired result types

Save images and animations
Create presentations and HTML reports
3/15/2010
Introduction
Stress and Strain Review

Equations Used in the Solution
A complex system can be broken into a finite number of regions (elements), each of which
follows the equations below:
=
=
F
A
= dx
0
F=
where,
= stress,
= strain,
= displacement,
AE
F = force,
E = modulus of elasticity
L = length
A = area
When the interaction of each region with its neighbor (through the nodes) is considered, a
system of equations is developed:
{f} = [K] {x}

Known
where,
Unknown
{f} is the vector that represents all of the applied loads. [K] is the assemblage
of all of the individual element stiffnesses (AE/L) and {x} is the vector that
represents the displacements.
Since the applied load vector and element stiffnesses are known from the user input, the
equation can be solved using matrix algebra by rearranging the equation as follows for the
displacement vector:
{x} = [K ]1{ f }
Strains are computed based on the classical differential equations previously discussed. Stress can
then be obtained from the strains using Hookes Law. These basic equations do not require the use
of a computer to solve. However, a computer is needed when complexity is added, such as:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
10
Geometric complexity (makes the elasticity equation impossible to solve).

Variation in material properties throughout the body.
Multiple load cases and complex or combined loading.
Dynamics.
Large systems (require many equations to solve).
3/15/2010
Introduction
In practice, the direct inversion is extremely difficult and sometimes unstable. In FEA,
matrices can be 50,000 x 50,000 or larger. As a result, other solution methods for this linear
equation have been developed. All of these methods use the basic principles of a
mathematical method called Gaussian Elimination. The details of this method will not be
discussed here, but may be obtained from any numerical programming text.
Since differentiation cannot be performed directly on the computer, approximation techniques
are used to determine the strain in the model. Since an approximation technique is used for
the strains, the finer the mesh, the better the approximation of the strain. For a linear static
analysis, stress has a linear relation to strain. Therefore, the stresses will have the same
accuracy as the strains.
For more complex analyses, more terms are needed. The equation below is needed to
represent a true dynamic analysis:
{f } = [m] {x}+ [c] {x }+ [K ] {x}

where the additional matrices and vectors are,
m = mass,
c = damping,
x = acceleration (second derivative of displacement versus time)

x = velocity (first derivative of displacement versus time)
Limits of Static Stress with Linear Material Models
Deformations are small
Strains and rotations are small
Changes in stiffness through the model are small
Changes in boundary conditions are small
Changes in loading direction with deformations are small
Material remains in the linear elastic range
Mechanical Event Simulation (MES) Overcomes Limitations

MES supports:
Large deformations
Changing boundary conditions
Loads moving as the model moves or deforms
Nonlinear material behavior
Time-dependent loading
Large-scale motion
Event visualization capabilities:
Viewing results with respect to time using the Results environment
Animation tools
3/15/2010
11
Introduction
MES simulates:
Motion
Impact
Real-time observation of deformations, stresses and strains
Failure due to the following: material yielding, local and structural buckling, permanent
deformations - residual stress
In order to perform MES, one of the following Autodesk Algor products is requiredAutodesk
Algor Simulation MES or Autodesk Algor Simulation Professional. This analysis type is not
available within the standard Simulation or Simulation CFD software packages.
For information and training regarding MES, refer to the Autodesk Algor Simulation MES
training course.
Hand-Calculated Example
Refer to Appendix A for an example of displacement and stress results for a simple truss
structure. A theoretical solution using fundamental equations is presented. In addition, a
hand-calculated solution based on the finite element method is presented and its results
compared with those obtained by the FEA software.
12
3/15/2010
Introduction
Heat Transfer Review

Equations Used in the Solution
Heat transfer, as applied to FEA, is actually a conduction problem. The heat loads are
boundary conditions. The primary results are a temperature profile and the heat flux through
the body of the structure.
Conduction is the flow of heat in the body of the structure. This is what is being solved in an
FEA problem. The properties of conduction are controlled by the part definition. Only the
thermal conductivity (k) is needed for a steady-state analysis. For a transient analysis, the
mass density and specific heat will also be required. The governing equation is:
T
q = kA
L
where: k = Thermal conductivity
A = Area
T = Change in temperature
L = Length
The two most common loads for a thermal analysis are convection and radiation loads. These
loads are applied to a surface. The equation for the heat flow due to convection is:
q = hA (Ts T )
where: h = Convection coefficient
A = Area
Ts = Temperature of the surface
T = Ambient temperature
The equation for the heat flow due to radiation is:
q = A(V .F .) T4 Tb4
where: = Emissivity which describes the surface finish for gray bodies. (If = 1.0, it
is a true blackbody.)
= Stefan-Boltzmann constant for radiation
A = Area
V.F. = View factor from the surface to the infinite source
T = Ambient temperature (in units of absolute temperature)
Tb = Temperature of the node (in units of absolute temperature)
3/15/2010
13
Introduction
Linear Dynamics Review

Equation for Dynamic Analyses
The basic equation of dynamics is:
[m]{a}+[c]{v}+[k]{x}=0
where:
[m] = the mass matrix
{a} = the acceleration vector
[c] = the damping constant matrix
{v} = the velocity vector
[k] = the stiffness matrix
{x} = the displacement vector
A natural frequency analysis provides the natural vibration frequencies of a part or assembly
based on a linear eigenvalue solution. Because the above equation is solved in this linear
solution, only mass and stiffness are taken into account. No damping is used. In addition,
loads are ignored. As a result, actual displacement output is meaningless except to define the
shape of the natural frequency mode. Note that loads are taken into account for a natural
frequency with load stiffening analysis, assuming the loads produce membrane stresses that
affect the stiffness of the structure.
Constraints have a very significant effect on the solution. When no boundary conditions or
insufficient boundary conditions are used, rigid-body movement or modes will be found.
Unlike a static solution, this is acceptable in a modal analysis.
14
3/15/2010
Chapter
Using Autodesk Algor Simulation

Chapter Objectives
Introduction to the user interface

o
o
o
o
Toolbars
Keyboard
Mouse
ViewCube and other view controls
Complete an example of using Autodesk Algor Simulation

o
o
o
o
o
o
Overview of how to open a CAD solid model and creating a mesh

Overview of adding loads and constraints to a model
Overview of defining material properties
Overview of performing an analysis
Overview of reviewing results
Overview of generating a report
Navigating the User Interface

In this section, we will introduce you to the Autodesk Algor Simulation user interface. This
interface is the same for each of the available packages, including the foundational Algor
Simulation product and the Algor Simulation CFD, MES, and Professional products. The
only difference will be with regard to which advanced features or capabilities are enabled.
We will begin with an overview of the major components of the graphical user interface.
Then we will discuss the toolbars, keyboard, mouse, ViewCube, and additional view controls.
Please note that the behavior of the keyboard, mouse and ViewCube as discussed within this
manual are based on the default program settings for a clean installation of the product.
Many of the features to be discussed are customizable via tabs and settings within the
"Options" dialog, reachable via the "Tools: Options" pull-down menu command.
Figure 1.1 on the next page, along with the legend that follows it, introduce the major
components of the user interface. This manual is based on Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011.
Users of other versions may encounter differences between their version and the interface
described herein.
3/15/2010
15
Chapter 1: Example Using Autodesk Algor Simulation
Figure 1.1: Autodesk Algor Simulation User Interface

Interface Legend:
A. Title Bar: The title bar displays the program name and version as well as providing links to the
Autodesk Subscription Center and Communication Center.
B. Menu Bar: The menu bar is located just below the title bar and contains the pull-down menus.
C. Toolbars: The toolbars provide the user with quick access to many commands.
D. Tree View: The tree view has unique contents for each environment of the user interface. For the
FEA Editor, it shows the parts list and the units, various properties, and loads that will be used for
the analysis. In the Results environment, you will see a list of results presentations and other postprocessing-specific content. The components of the analysis report will be listed in the tree view
within the Report environment.
E. ViewCube and Additional View Controls: These tools are used to manipulate the model display
position, rotation, zoom, display pivot point, and so on. There is also an optional Compass feature
that can be activated, providing a compass heading ring around the base of the ViewCube.
F. Display Area: The display area is where the modeling activity takes place. The title bar of the
window displays the current environment and the model name. The FEA Editor environment is used to
create the model, add the loads and constraints and perform the analysis. The Results environment is
used to view results and to create images, graphs, and animations. The Report environment will be
used to produce a formal report of the analysis, including desired results presentations.
G. Miniaxis and Scale Ruler: The miniaxis shows your viewpoint with respect to the threedimensional working area. The scale ruler gives you a sense of the model size,
H. Status Bar: The status bar displays important messages.
16
3/15/2010
Toolbars
Autodesk Algor Simulation accesses program functions through pull-down menus, context
menus, and toolbars. The available toolbars and menus vary for each program environment
(FEA Editor, Results, and Report). By default, the toolbars are positioned at the top of the
screen, just under the pull-down menus. As is true for the menus, commands are logically
grouped into a number of different toolbars. For example, one toolbar includes predefined
view orientations, another includes various selection tools, still another includes structured
meshing tools, and so on. These may be displayed, hidden, or repositioned as desired.
Most of the toolbars and pull-down menus will not appear until an existing model is opened
or a new model is created. To see the toolbars of the FEA Editor at this time, start the
program. Dismiss the "What's New" screen if it appears, select the "New" icon in the initial
dialog ("Open" / "New"), and click the "New" button. Navigate to a working folder, type in
the name of your choice in the "File name:" field, and click the "Save" button.
Displaying or Hiding Specific Toolbars
To display or hide toolbars or to adjust the icon size or style, access the TOOLS pull-down
menu and select the "View Toolbars..." command. To display another toolbar activate the
checkbox for that toolbar. Deactivate the checkbox for each toolbar that you prefer to hide.
Additional checkboxes are provided for the toolbar size and style options. Press the "Close"
button to exit the "Toolbars" screen.
Docking Toolbars
Toolbars can be docked on the top, bottom and/or sides of the display area. To dock a
toolbar, first click on the title bar and drag it toward one of the edges of the display area.
Once you reach the edge, the shape will change to signify that you are at a location where the
toolbar may be docked. Release the mouse and the toolbar will dock at the location of the
mouse. That is, it will snap to the docked position and the title bar will disappear. This is
illustrated in the following images.
Figure 1.2: Steps to Dock a Toolbar
3/15/2010
17
Using the Keyboard and Mouse

The keyboard and mouse will both be used to operate within the user interface. The keyboard
will be used to enter the required data for loads, constraints, material properties, and so on. It
will also be used to modify the behavior of particular mouse operations. That is, certain
keyboard keys, when held down, will change the behavior of the mouse.
The software supports a number of different mouse configurations. This document assumes that
the default template for a new installation is in effect. However, user settings, or those retained
from a prior Autodesk Algor Simulation installation, may cause the behavior to differ from that
described herein. To ensure that your mouse actions follow the descriptions in this book, access
the "Tools: Options: Mouse Options" dialog and choose the "Algor Simulation" template.
The left mouse button will be used to select items. How items are selected will depend upon
the selection mode chosen in the "Selection: Shape" pull-out menu or toolbar. The type of
objects that are selected (such as lines, vertices, surfaces, parts, edges, or elements) will
depend upon the selection mode chosen in the "Selection: Select" pull-out menu or toolbar.
Holding down the <Ctrl> key while left-clicking an object will toggle the selection state of
the clicked object. That is, unselected objects will be added to the selection set and
previously selected items will be removed from the selection set. Holding down the <Shift>
key while left-clicking will only add clicked objects to the selection set (this will have no
effect on already selected items). Finally, holding both <Ctrl> and <Shift> while leftclicking will only remove clicked objects from the selection set (this will have no effect on
items that are not already part of the current selection set).
Pressing the right mouse button with the cursor hovering over items in the tree view will
access a context menu with commands relevant to the item under the cursor. When items are
currently selected, either within the tree view or display area, the right-click context menu
will display commands and options that are specifically relevant to the selected items. For
example, if a surface is selected, only surface-based commands will appear in the context
menu. You may right-click anywhere in the display area when items are selected to access
the context menu. However, to access the context menu within the tree view area, you must
right-click with the cursor positioned on one of the selected headings.
If a mouse has a wheel, rolling the wheel will zoom in or out on the model. Holding down the
middle mouse button or wheel and dragging the mouse will rotate the model. Pressing the
<Ctrl> key while holding the middle button and dragging the mouse will pan the model,
moving it within the display area. Pressing the <Shift> key while dragging the mouse with
the middle button down will zoom in and out, making the model larger as the mouse is moved
upward and smaller as it is moved downward. You will likely find the use of the middle
mouse button and wheel to be more convenient than choosing a command like "Rotate" or
"Pan," clicking and dragging the mouse, and then pressing <Esc> to exit the command.
Finally, the X, Y, or Z key on the keyboard may be held down while dragging the mouse with
the middle button held down. Doing so will rotate the model, as before, but constraining the
rotation to be only about the corresponding X, Y, or Z global axis direction. You may also
use the left and right cursor keys on the keyboard while holding down X, Y, or Z to rotate
about these axes in fixed increments (15 degrees by default). The rotation increment is
customizable via the "Tools: Options: Graphics: Miscellaneous" dialog.
18
3/15/2010
Introduction to the ViewCube

As is true for the mouse, the software also supports a number of different view configurations.
This document assumes that the default view options template and view navigation settings
for a new installation are in effect. However, user settings, or settings retained from a prior
Autodesk Algor Simulation installation, may cause the view orientations and behavior to
differ from those described throughout this document. To ensure that your view commands
follow the descriptions in this book, access the "Tools: Options: Views Options" dialog and
choose the "Algor Simulation" template.
Next, access the "Graphics" tab of the same "Options" dialog, select "Navigation Tools" from
the items listed on the left side of the dialog, and click on the "View Cube" button. Click the
"Restore Defaults" button followed by "OK" to exit the "ViewCube Properties" dialog.
Finally, click the "Steering Wheel" button. Click the "Restore Defaults" button followed by
"OK" to exit the "SteeringWheels Properties" dialog. Click "OK" to exit the "Options" dialog.
Users of other Autodesk products, such as AutoCAD or Autodesk Inventor will likely
already be familiar with the ViewCube and associated additional view controls. If so, feel
free to skip to the Steel Yoke Example that begins on page 22.
The ViewCube will be located in the upper right corner of the display by default but may be
relocated. The appearance will change depending upon whether the view is aligned with a
global plane and whether the cursor is near the cube or not. The ViewCube, in its various
appearances, is shown in Figure 1.3.
(a) Cursor not near the

ViewCube
(b) Cursor on ViewCube
(view not aligned to a
standard face)
(c) Cursor on ViewCube
(standard face view)
Figure 1.3: ViewCube Appearance
The six standard view names, as labeled on the cube faces, are the Top, Bottom, Front, Back,
Left, and Right. These may be selected by clicking near visible face names on the cube, as
shown in Figure 1.3 (b) or by clicking the triangular arrows pointing towards the adjacent faces,
as shown in Figure 1.3 (c), which shows the cursor pointing to the arrow for the Bottom view.
In addition, there are clickable zones at each corner and along each edge of the ViewCube.
Clicking on a corner will produce an isometric view in which that particular corner is
positioned near the center and towards you. Clicking an edge will produce an oblique view,
rotated 45 degrees, half-way between the views represented by the two adjacent faces.
When the cursor is near the ViewCube, a "Home" icon will appear above it and to the left,
providing easy access to the home view. This is an isometric view having the corner between
the Front, Right, and Top Faces centrally positioned and towards you by default. The home
view may be redefined by right-clicking the Home icon and choosing the "Set Current View
as Home" command while viewing the model positioned as desired.
When one of the six standard views is active and the cursor is near the ViewCube, two curved
arrows will appear above and to the right of the cube, as seen in Figure 1.3 (c). These are
3/15/2010
19

used to rotate the model to one of the four possible variants of the particular standard view.
Each click of an arrow will rotate the model 90 degrees in the selected direction.
When the face being viewed is changed via the ViewCube, the model may move to the
selected view in the manner that requires the least amount of motion. For example, say we
are first looking at the Right view, with the word "Right" positioned upright (that is in the
normal reading position). Now, if we click the downward arrow above the cube, the model
will rotate 90 degrees to reveal the top face. The Top view will be rotated 90 degrees
clockwise from the upright orientation (that is, the word "Top" will read in the vertically
downward direction). Activating the "Keep scene upright" option will cause the Front,
Back, Left, and Right views to automatically be oriented in the upright position (Top above,
Bottom below) when changing to any of these views. You may, however, rotate the view
after initial selection, if desired. Go to "Tools: Options: Graphics: Navigation Tools:
View Cube" to locate the "Keep scene upright" setting. It is activated by default.
The point of this discussion is that whenever a new face is selected using the ViewCube, the
resultant view rotation may differ, depending upon the prior position of the model. If the resultant
orientation is not what is desired, simply click one of the curved arrows to rotate the view.
Immediately below the ViewCube is a pallet of additional view controls. This

consists of seven tools, each of which may be individually enabled or disabled.
All are on by default. Figure 1.4 shows the view control pallet.
From top to bottom, the seven tools are as follows:
SteeringWheels
Pan
Zoom
Orbit
Center
Previous View
Next View
Each of these icons, except for the Previous and Next commands, function as a
toggleclicking it once to activate a command and again to deactivate it.
Several of these tools, such as Pan, Previous, and Next are self-explanatory.
Figure 1.4: Additional View Controls Pallet
Additional View Controls
The "Zoom" tool includes a fly-out menu allowing the choice of one of four different
zooming modesZoom, Zoom (Fit All), Zoom (Selected), and Zoom (Window). The first of
these cause the model to become larger as the cursor is moved upward in the display area and
smaller when it is moved downward. The Fit (All) mode encloses the extents of the whole
model. After selecting objects in the display area, the Zoom (Selected) tool fits the selected
items into the display area. Finally, after selecting the Zoom (Window) tool, you click and
drag the mouse to draw a window define the area you wish to expand to fill the display area.
The "Orbit" tool has two variants, selectable via a fly-out menuOrbit, and Orbit
(Constrained). The former allows the model to be rotated freely in any direction. The
Constrained option causes the model to rotate only about the global Z-axis, similar to pressing
the Z key while dragging the mouse with the middle button depressed.
The "Center" tool is used to center a point on the model within the display area. Click with
the mouse to specify the desired center point after selecting the Center command. This point
also becomes the display pivot point, about which the model pivots when being rotated.
20
3/15/2010
The "SteeringWheels" tool is customizable and, in its default setting, produces the Full
Navigation Wheel shown in Figure 1.5. The full navigation wheel floats above the model
view, following the cursor position. It provides an additional access method for several
functions found elsewhere on the view tools pallet as well as a few additional functions.
Figure 1.5: Full Navigation Wheel

The "Rewind" button on the navigation wheel presents a timeline of thumbnails representing
various views that have been used during the modeling session. Simply release the mouse
button with the cursor positioned at the thumbnail representing the view to which you wish to
jump. This is more convenient than pressing the previous or next view buttons multiple times.
For additional information concerning these view controls, consult the User's Guide.
Legacy View Controls in Autodesk Algor Simulation

Traditional view controls and options are also provided via the pull-down menus and toolbars
at the top of the user interface window. Options for displaying or hiding the mesh or model
shading may be found here as well as eight pre-defined, standard view orientations. The
orientations will depend upon the currently active views options template (previously
discussed in the "Introduction to the ViewCube" section of this chapter).
There is also a "User-defined Views" dialog that may be used to save, modify, or restore
custom views. Additional capabilities include a local zoom feature and display toggles for the
scale ruler, miniaxis, and perspective mode.
The "Local Zoom" feature displays a small rectangle that represents the area to be
magnified. A larger rectangle shows an overlay of the magnified region. You may click on
and drag the local zoom window to position it anywhere on the model within the display area.
The size of the local zoom area and magnified overlay and also the zoom level can be
customized via the "Tools: Options: Graphics: Local Zoom" dialog.
For additional information concerning the legacy view controls, consult the User's Guide.
3/15/2010
21
Steel Yoke Example

This example is an introduction to static stress analysis with linear material models. The
example will give step-by-step instructions to create a mesh and analyze a three-dimensional
(3-D) model of a steel yoke under an applied force. There are three sections:
Setting up the model Open the model in the FEA Editor environment and create the mesh
on the model. Add the necessary forces and boundary conditions and define the model
parameters. Visually check the model for errors with the Results environment.
Analyzing the model Analyze the model using the static stress with linear material models
processor.
Reviewing the results View the displacements and stresses graphically using the Results
environment.
Use the CAD solid model, yoke.step, located in the "Chapter 1 Example Model\Input File"
folder in the class directory (or extracted to your computer from the solutions archive) to
create a simple model of the steel yoke shown in Figure 1.6. The right half of the small hole
will be fixed. A force of 800 pounds will be applied to the left half of the large hole and
acting towards the left, as shown in the figure. The yoke is made of Steel (ASTM-A36).
Analyze the model to determine the displacements and stresses.
Figure 1.6: Steel Yoke Model
Opening and Meshing the Model

The FEA Editor environment is used to create a mesh for all solid models. You can open
CAD solid models from any of the CAD solid modelers that Autodesk Algor Simulation
supports. You can also open models of any of the universal CAD formats that are supported.
"Start: All Programs:
Autodesk: Autodesk Algor
Simulation: Autodesk Algor
Simulation"
Press the Windows "Start" button and access the "All

Programs" pull-out menu. Select the "Autodesk" folder
and then the "Autodesk Algor Simulation" pull-out menu.
Choose the "Autodesk Algor Simulation" command.
"Open"
Click on the "Open" icon at the left side of the dialog.
"STEP (*.stp, *.ste, *.step)"

"Yoke.step"
"Open"
22
Select the "STEP (*.stp, *.ste, *.step)" option in the CAD

Files section of the "Files of type:" drop-down box.
Select the file "Yoke.step" in the "Chapter 1 Example
Model \Input File" directory.
Press the "Open" button.
3/15/2010

"Use STEP file units"
"OK"
"Linear: Static Stress with
Linear Material Models"
"OK"
A "Select Length Units" dialog will appear. Choose "Use

STEP file units" from the pull-down menu and click the
"OK" button.
A dialog will appear asking you to choose the analysis type
for the model. From the pull-out menu, choose "Linear:
Static Stress with Linear Material Models" and press the
"OK" button.
The model will appear in the FEA Editor environment.

"Mesh: Model Mesh
Settings"
"Mesh model"
"No"
"View: Rotate"
Mouse
Access the MESH pull-down menu and select the "Model

Mesh Settings" command.
Press the "Mesh model" button to create a mesh with the
default options.
Press the "No" button when asked if you want to review the
meshing results.
Access the VIEW pull-down menu and choose the "Rotate"
command.
Click and drag the mouse to rotate the model and inspect the
mesh all around it. This mesh appears to be acceptable.
When done inspecting the mesh, position the model so that
you can see the inside of the small hole as shown in
Figure 1.7. These surfaces will be constrained.
Press <Esc> to exit the rotate command.
<Esc>
Figure 1.7: Yoke Rotated to Select Constrained Surfaces
Setting up the Model

The FEA Editor environment is also used to specify all of the element and analysis parameters
for your model and to apply the loads and constraints. When you initially come into the FEA
Editor environment with the yoke model, you will notice a red X on certain headings in the
tree view. This signifies that this data has not yet been specified. You will need to eliminate
all of the red Xs before analyzing the model. Since you have created a solid mesh, the
"Element Type" heading in the tree view is already set to "Brick" and the default "Element
Definition" parameters have been accepted.
Adding Constraints
Constraints describe how a finite element model is tied down in space. If an object is welded
down so that it can neither translate nor rotate, the object is fully constrained.
3/15/2010
23
"Selection: Shape: Point"
"Selection: Select: Surfaces"

Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
Access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the

"Shape" pull-out menu. Select the "Point" command. This
will allow you to select objects by clicking directly on them.
Access the SELECTION pull-down menu and choose the
"Select" pull-out menu. Select the "Surfaces" command.
This will allow you to select surfaces.
Click one of the surfaces on the right side of the small hole
as oriented in Figure 1.7.
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click on the other surface on
the right side of the small hole.
Mouse
Right-click in the display area.
"Add: Surface Boundary

Conditions"
Select the "Add" pull-out menu and select the "Surface

Boundary Conditions" command. The dialog shown in
Figure 1.8 will appear.
Figure 1.8: Surface Boundary Condition Dialog

Press the "Fixed" button. Note that all 6 of the checkboxes
in the "Constrained DOFs" section to the left are
activated. This means that the nodes on this surface will be
totally constrained.
Press the "OK" button to apply these boundary conditions.
Now there will be green triangles on the nodes of the
surface that was selected. This signifies a fully constrained
boundary condition.
"Fixed"
"OK"
Adding Forces to the Model

In this section, you will add the 800 lb force in the X direction to the large hole.
Mouse
Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
24
Click and drag using the middle mouse button to rotate the
model. Position it so that you can see the surfaces of the
large hole where the load is to be applied (that is, the two
quarter surfaces at the left side of the hole).
Click on one of the surfaces on the left interior of the large
hole to select it.
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click on the other surface on
the left side of the large hole.
3/15/2010

Mouse
"Add: Surface Forces"

Forces" command. The dialog shown in Figure 1.9 will
appear.
Figure 1.9: Surface Forces Dialog
-400
"X"
"OK"
"View: Orientation: Top
View"
Type "-400" in the "Magnitude" field to add two forces of

400 pounds each in the negative X direction to the surfaces.
This force will be evenly distributed across each surface.
They will combine to produce the desired 800 pound load.
Select the "X" radio button in the "Direction" section to
add surface forces in the X direction.
Press the "OK" button to apply these surface forces. Now
there will be green arrows on the surfaces that were
selected. They are pointed in the negative X direction.
Access the VIEW pull-down menu and select the
"Orientation" pull-out menu. Select the "Top View"
command. The model should now look like Figure 1.10.
Figure 1.10: Yoke after Boundary Conditions and Loads are Applied
3/15/2010
25

Assigning the Parameters
Once the model has been constructed and the loads and constraints have been applied, use the
FEA Editor environment to specify material properties.
Right-click on the "Material" heading for Part 1.
Mouse
"Modify Material"
"Steel (ASTM-A36)"
Select the "Modify Material" command. The

"Element Material Selection" dialog will appear.
Highlight the "Steel (ASTM-A36)" item from the list of
available materials as shown in Figure 1.11.
Figure 1.11: Element Material Selection Dialog

"Edit Properties"
"OK"
"OK"
"Analysis: Check Model"
"Tools: FEA Editor"

"View: Orientation: Isometric
View"
26
Press the "Edit Properties" button to view the material

properties associated with this steel.
Press the "OK" button to exit the "Element Material
Specification" dialog.
Press the "OK" button to accept the information entered in
the "Element Material Selection" dialog for Part 1.
Access the ANALYSIS pull-down menu and select the
"Check Model" command to review elements, geometry
and loads in the Results environment before running the
analysis.
Once you approve the model, access the TOOLS pull-down
menu and select the "FEA Editor" command to move back
to the FEA Editor environment to run the analysis.
"Orientation" pull-out menu. Select the "Isometric
View" command.
3/15/2010
Analyzing the Model
"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"

"Perform Analysis" command to run the analysis. When
completed, the model will be displayed in the Results
environment and the von Mises stress will be displayed, as
shown in Figure 1.12 below. Note the maximum stress value.
Figure 1.12: Yoke Model as Displayed in the Results Environment
Reviewing the Results

"Results: Displacement:
Magnitude"
"Results: Stress:
von Mises"
Access the RESULTS pull-down menu, then the

"Displacement" pull-out menu, and select the "Magnitude"
command. Note the maximum displacement magnitude.
Access the RESULTS pull-down menu, then the "Stress"
pull-out menu, and select the "von Mises" command to
return to the displaying of stress results.
The maximum von Mises stress and maximum deflection should closely match the values in
the table below.
Maximum von Mises Stress
(psi)
Maximum Displacement
(in)
~1,954
~0.0004
3/15/2010
27

Viewing the Displaced Shape
Viewing the displaced shape is always the best way to get an overall understanding of how the
model reacted to the applied load. A displaced model alone or a displaced model overlaid with
an undisplaced model can be displayed.
"Results Options: Displaced
Model Options"
"Transparent"
Access the RESULTS OPTIONS pull-down menu and

select the "Displaced Model Options" command to
access the "Displaced Model Options" dialog.
Select the "Transparent" radio button in the "Show
Undisplaced Model As" section.
button in the upper right corner of the
Press the
"Displaced Model Options" dialog.
Mouse
Creating an Animation
"Animation: Start Animation"
"Animation: Stop Animation"
Access the ANIMATION pull-down menu and select the

"Start Animation" command. An animation will begin in
the display area showing the model deforming due to the
loading.
"Stop Animation" command.
The preceding steps animated the results within the display area but did not create an
animation file that we can place in our report. In the following steps, we will export an
animation file that can be included in the report or copied to and played on any computer.
"Animation: Save As AVI"
"von Mises Stress Animation"
"Save"
"No"

"Save As AVI" command.
Rather than using the default file name, type "von Mises
Stress Animation" into the "File name:" field.
Press the "Save" button to save the animation to an AVI
file format.
Press the "No" button when asked if you want to view the
animation.
Generating a Report
In this section, you will automatically create an HTML report using the Report Configuration
Utility.
"Tools: Report"
Mouse
"Configure Report"
28
Access the TOOLS pull-down menu and select the

"Report" command to change to the Report environment.
Right-click on the "HTML Report" heading near the top
of the tree view.
Select the "Configure Report" command. This will open
the dialog shown in Figure 1.13.
3/15/2010
Figure 1.13: Report Configuration Utility

NOTE: Clicking on any of the checkboxes will toggle the inclusion state of the item (i.e. whether it is
to be included or excluded from the HTML report). When selecting included portions of the
report to modify them, click on the item name and not on the checkbox. This will select the
item without toggling the checkbox state.
Activate the checkbox next to the "Logo" heading. This
will include the default Autodesk logo at the top of the
report.
Mouse
Note that you may also customize the logo by browsing to and selecting your own image file.
Several different image file formats are supported. The logo size and alignment may also be
adjusted by right-clicking on it and choosing the "Format Image" command. You may also
select the image and then click and drag the handles that appear around the image border
while it is selected to resize it.
Mouse
Select the "Project Name" heading.
Mouse:
Yoke Design
Mouse:
Analysis of Yoke under
800 lbf Loading
Click and drag the mouse to select the text, "Design

Analysis" and type "Yoke Design" to replace it.
Click and drag the mouse to select the text, "Project Title
Here" and replace this text by typing "Analysis of Yoke
under 800 lbf Loading".
Mouse
Select the "Title and Author" heading.
Your Name
Type your name into the "Author" field.
Your Department
Type your department name into the "Department" field.
Mouse
Person who checked
model
Department of person
who checked the model
Select the "Reviewer" heading.

Type the name of the person who checked the model into
the "Reviewer" field.
Enter the name of the department of the person who
checked the model into the "Department" field.
3/15/2010
29

Passed all FEA tests
Type "Passed all FEA tests" into the "Comments" field.
Mouse
Deselect the "Executive Summary" item by clicking on

the associated checkbox. This item will be excluded from
the report.
NOTES: Text can be added as desired within the "Executive Summary" section using the built-in word
processor features. A variety of font and paragraph styles are included, such as bullet or
numbered lists, tables, tabs, and various text justification settings.
The following sections are automatically generated and cannot be modified. The analyst may
only include or exclude these items or alter their order of appearance within the report:
Summary
Analysis Parameters
Parts
Element
Material
Loads
Constraints
Probes
Rotating Frames (applicable to fluid flow analysis)
Results Presentations
Processor Log Files Group
Code Checking General
Code Checking Detailed
Mouse
"Tree: Add AVI

File(s)..."
"von Mises Stress
Animation.avi"
"Open"
Deselect the "Results Presentations" checkbox. Rather

than including the default image of the results window, we
will include the previously generated animation.
Access the TREE pull-down menu and select the "Add
AVI File(s)..." command. This will allow you to include
an animation file within the report. Alternately, you can
right-click in the report tree area and choose the "Add AVI
File" command.
Browse to and select the previously created animation file
"von Mises Stress Animation.avi".
Press the "Open" button. A "von Mises Stress Animation"
heading will appear at the bottom of the report tree and it will
be selected.
The default text within the "Header Text:" field will match the filename. We will leave it as
is. Optional text may be placed in the report below the animation, if desired, by entering the
desired text into the "Caption" field. We do not need to include a caption for this example.
Mouse
"Generate Report"
30
Click and drag the "von Mises Stress Animation" heading in

the report tree and release it over the "Processor Log Files"
heading. This will reorder the report, placing the animation
immediately before the processor log files.
Press the "Generate Report" button. This will automatically
bring up the report, which will appear as shown in Figure 1.14
below. You can scroll through and review the full report.
3/15/2010
Figure 1.14: Completed Report

NOTE: The default title image is the model as it currently appears within the FEA Editor environment. A
different image may be substituted for this one and/or the image may be resized using the report
configuration utility. To adjust the image size or alignment, right-click on it and choose the
"Format Image" command. You may also select the image and then click and drag the handles
that appear around the image border while it is selected to resize it.
A completed archive of this model (yoke.ach), including results, is located in the "Chapter 1 Example
Model\Results Archive" folder in the class directory or in the copy of the solutions folders on your
computer.
3/15/2010
31
32
3/15/2010
Chapter
Static Stress Analysis Using CAD Solid

Models
Chapter Objectives
Learn about working with model archives

Learn how to open and mesh CAD solid models
Learn how to work with multiple unit systems
Learn the types of loads available for static stress analysis
Learn how to use load cases
Learn the types of constraints available for static stress analysis
Learn about design scenarios
Learn how to use symmetry and antisymmetry
Learn how to define local coordinate systems
Learn how to use the Material Library Manager
Archiving a Model
Before getting into the specifics of working with CAD solid models and setting up static
stress analyses, let us take a moment to discuss model archives. These will be referenced
throughout this manual.
In the FILE pull-down menu, there is a pull-out menu called "Archive". This menu has five
choices: "Create", "Retrieve", "Manage Existing", "Repair", and "Delete"
The "Create" command will allow you to create a file with an .ach extension. This file is
similar to a zip file format. When you select the "Create" command the following dialog
will appear:
Figure 2.1: Archive: Create Dialog

3/15/2010
33
Chapter 2: Working with CAD Solid Models and Static Stress
Select either the "Model Only" or "Model and Results" radio button to save into the
archive (.ach) file. Selecting the "Model and Results" radio button allows you to
conveniently store the model and its results in one compressed file. There is a "Comment"
field noting the location and name of the file to be saved.
If you select the "Retrieve" command, then you can retrieve and uncompress an existing
archive file for viewing or applying changes. You will be prompted to specify the location
where the files are to be placed when extracted. You can also retrieve an archive using the
"File: Open" command by selecting "Algor Simulation Archive (*.ach)" as the file type to
open.
The "Manage Existing" command allows you to see and manage an existing archive file. The
dialog lists all of the files in the archive file and allows the user to remove or update any file.
If an archive file has become corrupt use the "Repair" command to fix it. You can also
use the "Delete" command to delete archive files.
Types of Brick Elements

There are four possible geometrical configurations that can be used to create a brick element.
These are displayed in Table 2.1
Table 2.1: Brick Element Geometry Configurations
34
8-noded Brick
6-noded Wedge
5-noded Pyramid
4-noded Tetrahedral
3/15/2010
Generating Meshes for CAD Models

In this chapter we will cover the basics of creating meshes for CAD models. This will be
sufficient for completing the exercises in the first few chapters. The topic will be covered in
more detail in Chapter 5, "Meshing."
Autodesk Algor Simulation is compatible with most FEA software products and most
major CAD products. It works from native CAD files as well as STL, IGES, ACIS, and
STEP files. For native CAD formats not directly supported, the models can typically be
exported using one of the supported universal formats.
Meshing operations are performed on solid models and 3-D plate/shell models using
quadrilateral or triangular elements representing the surface of the model.
The interface also offers enhanced user control over the geometric properties of the generated
solid brick mesh. Users can control internal angles of quadrilaterals and quadrilateral
warpage, adapting to requirements of some FEA systems.
At the lowest interface level, the simulation program retrieves an existing solid model for
FEA processing from another source such as a CAD solid modeler or from another finite
element program. The engineer can automatically improve the mesh for more accurate and
faster FEA results. At the highest level, the engineer can intervene to enhance the model,
including adding local mesh refinement, adding manually constructed elements, or merging in
additional parts or assemblies.
CAD Solid Models Supported:
ACIS files (*.sat)

Alibre Design files (*.ad_prt, *.ad_asm, *.ad_smp)
Autodesk Inventor files (*.ipt, *.iam)
Autodesk Inventor Fusion (*.dwg)
Autodesk Mechanical Desktop (*.dwg)
CoCreate OneSpace Modeling (*.pkg)
IGES files (*.igs, *.iges)
IronCAD (*.ics)
KeyCreator files (*.ckd)
Pro/ENGINEER files (*.prt, *.asm)
Rhinoceros 3D files (*.3dm)
Solid Edge files (*.asm, *par, *.psm)
SolidWorks (*..sldprt, *.sldasm)
SpaceClaim files (*.scdoc)
STEP files (*.stp, *.step)
Stereolithography files (*.stl)
To open these models, access the FILE pull-down menu, select the "Open" command, and
select the file type you need in the CAD Files section of the "Files of type:" drop-down box.
The model will be opened in the FEA Editor environment. You can also use the "Merge"
command to create assembly files from multiple part or subassembly files. The models will
be combined using the same position and orientation as the CAD solid models.
When you first open a CAD solid model in the user interface, you may be asked if you want
to use a process called "surface-knitting." Whether or not you see a surface-knitting prompt
depends upon the settings under "Tools: Options: CAD Import." The options for the "Knit
surface on import" setting are, "Yes," "No," and "Ask each time." This process is required if
3/15/2010
35

an internal or external fluid part is to be automatically derived within Autodesk Algor
Simulation from the imported CAD geometry. It also enhances mesh matching between parts
by splitting the surfaces where two parts meet so that the two intersecting surfaces and their
feature lines are identical for each part. If surface-knitting is performed, it also lets the user
apply a load such as pressure or convection to a surface that partially intersects an
adjacent part without having it act on the portion of the surface where the two parts meet. In
other words, the load will act everywhere on the surface except where it is coincident with
another part, since this portion will actually be identified by a new surface number after
knitting has been completed. After the model has been imported, you will need to re-import
the original model if you want to change whether to knit the surfaces or not.
It is not necessary to perform surface-knitting on assemblies if the only purpose is to enhance
mesh matching. Meshing features called "virtual imprinting" and "smart bonding" are sufficient
to enhance connectivity between adjacent parts. Smart bonding was discussed in the
"Introduction" chapter. Virtual imprinting identifies coincident surfaces between adjacent parts
and meshes these intersecting regions one time, producing an identical mesh on both parts where
they meet. It does not actually divide the larger surface into two subsurfaces as the surfaceknitting operation does. So, if this behavior is desired or if fluid part derivation is to be
performed, you must still do surface-knitting.
NOTE: By default, the surface-knitting operation is disabled for a new or clean installation
of the current software version. For the purpose of this manual's exercises and
examples, it will be assumed that the surface-knitting option is set to "No." If this is
not the case for a given PC, either change the setting under "Tools: Options: CAD
Import" or simply answer "No" whenever prompted unless instructed otherwise. The
setting may also be changed by clicking on the "Options" button within the File:
Open dialog when a CAD file type is selected.
Creating a Mesh
When a CAD solid model is opened in the FEA Editor environment and the "Mesh: Model
Mesh Settings" command is chosen; the "Model Mesh Settings" dialog pictured in
Figure 2.2: Model Mesh Settings Dialog

The "Solid" radio button in the "Mesh type" section will be selected. By default, the program
will automatically create a surface mesh on all parts and verify that they each enclose a
watertight volume. The solid mesh will be generated during the analysis phase. The options
specified in the "Model Mesh Settings" dialog will be applied, by default, to all of the parts in
the model. If you want to apply certain mesh settings to a specific part(s), right-click on the
part(s) in the display area or on the heading(s) for the part(s) in the tree view. Select the
"CAD Mesh Options" pull-out menu and then choose the "Part" command. A dialog
36
3/15/2010

identical to the "Model Mesh Settings" dialog will appear. The mesh settings specified in this
dialog will only be applied to the selected part(s). This functionality will allow you to mesh
certain parts as brick elements and other parts as plate elements, for example.
Click on the slider bar in the "Mesh size" section and drag it to the desired mesh coarseness
or fineness. Press the "Mesh model" button to create the mesh. When the mesh is
complete, you will have the option to view the mesh results. Pressing the "Yes" button will
access the "Meshing Results" dialog shown in Figure 2.3.
Figure 2.3: Meshing Results Dialog

If the "Model" button is depressed, the mesh results for the entire model will be displayed. If the
"Part" button is depressed, you will be able to toggle through the results for each part in the
assembly. After you are finished reviewing the mesh results, press the "Close" button.
Model Mesh Settings Options

By pressing the "Options" button within the "Model Mesh Settings" dialog, a different
"Model Mesh Settings" dialog will appear. There are three icons on the left side of this
dialog that will each access different options.
The "Surface" icon will access options that are used to control the surface mesh.
The "Solid" icon will access options that are used to control the solid mesh.
The "Model" icon will access options that will affect all parts of the model.
The dialog accessed by the "Surface" icon is shown in Figure 2.4.
3/15/2010
37
Figure 2.4: Model Mesh Settings Dialog with the Surface Icon Active
Mesh Settings "Surface" Section: The options within the "Surface" section of the mesh
settings dialog control the size of the mesh, how to proceed when automatic mesh size
reduction is necessary, and whether second order elements are to be generated.
Mesh size section:
Size: The value in this field controls the size of the mesh that will be applied. The type
of value shown depends on the selected option in the "Type" drop-down box. If the
"Percent of automatic" option is selected, this value will be a ratio of the default mesh
size that was determined when the model was opened in the FEA Editor environment. If
the "Absolute mesh size" option is selected, this value will be the length of one side of
an element in the current units system. The actual element length will typically vary
slightly from the requested size because the number of elements along an edge or across a
surface must be a whole number.
Type: In this drop-down box, you can choose to have the size defined as a percent of the
default value calculated when the model was opened ("Percent of automatic") or an
absolute size ("Absolute mesh size").
Retries section:
If a successful mesh cannot be formed with the currently specified mesh size, the mesh
engine will try again after reducing the size by the value in the "Retry reduction factor"
field. It will repeat this process, if necessary, until the number of retries specified in the
"Number of retries" field is reached. If all of the retries fail, the original mesh size will
be used and any problem surfaces will not be meshed.
Generate 2nd order elements:
There is an option in the element definition screen to include midside nodes in the finite
element solution for brick, shell, tetrahedron and certain other element types. When
midside nodes are included, they are by default placed at the midpoint of straight
lines connecting the vertices of each element. This is true even when a surface mesh lies
38
3/15/2010

on a curved surface of a CAD-based model. Activating the "Generate 2nd order elements"
option causes midside node placement to be based on the surface of the CAD model so
that they follow the curvature of the part(s). In other words, they don't have to lie along a
straight line between two element corner vertices.
Mesh Settings "Model" Section: Please refer to Chapter 5 for information regarding
options within this section of the mesh settings dialog.
Mesh Settings "Solid" Section: The options within the "Solid" section of the mesh
settings dialog are beyond the scope of this introductory level course. Please consult the
program Help files for further information. The appropriate help file section may be accessed
by pressing the "Help" button within the model mesh setting dialog or via the "Contents,"
"Index" or "Search" command in the HELP pull-down menu.
Tips for Modeling with CAD Solid Model Software for FEA
Often, some FEA issues can be avoided by employing certain modeling techniques within the
CAD software used to create the solid models. For example, large assemblies can result in
large numbers of elements being created and will increase setup and analysis time, making it
desirable to simplify the models. There are several guidelines to consider during CAD model
creation that can simplify the FEA procedures and control the size of the FEA models.
Combine parts with the same material properties: Since each part has a single
material, it is convenient to combine parts of the same material into a single part. This
can be done in the CAD solid modeler. This will require you to only enter the material
properties for one part instead of several.
Remove parts that are not relevant to the stress calculations: Some complicated
assemblies can actually be legitimately simplified by eliminating some parts. The only
reason some parts are in an assembly is to prevent other parts from moving in a particular
direction. The effect of these parts can be replaced by properly constraining the model.
Other parts are simply there to connect two parts together. This connection can be
simulated by connecting the nodes of these parts.
Remove unnecessary details: Many assemblies have relatively small features such as
fillets or holes that will not affect the stress results. These features will require a finer
mesh size in their areas, which could result in significantly more elements. Removing or
suppressing these features will reduce the analysis time. In the Autodesk Algor
Simulation menu, toolbar, and/or command ribbon for some of the CAD systems for
which a direct transfer exists, there is a command entitled "Feature Control.". This
command will allow you to quickly suppress features in your CAD model that are not
necessary for the FEA model. Features that are suppressed will not be transferred to the
simulation software.
Split surfaces: Many loads are applied to the surfaces of a model. If a load will only be
applied to a portion of a CAD surface, it may be useful to split the surface in the CAD
software so that the desired portion bears a unique surface identification. Another use of
this would be to control how the surfaces are created along a cylindrical hole. The
simulation software divides incoming cylindrical surfaces into two semicircular surfaces.
These may be rotated 90 degrees from how you would need them in order to properly
apply a load to 180 degrees of the cylinder, for example. Splitting the surface in the
CAD software would allow you to control this and to create load application areas
wherever desired.
3/15/2010
39
Working with Various Unit Systems

It is possible to define element data, material data, geometry, and loads based on multiple unit
systems. The analyst need not convert all input data to the same unit system as the one used
to initially construct the model. Beneath the active design scenario heading in the tree view,
there is a "Unit Systems" branch. Here, the "Model Units" and various pre-defined
"Display Units" are listed. Figure 2.5 shows a typical model's tree view with the Unit
Systems branch pointed-out.
Figure 2.5: Tree View Showing Unit Systems Branch

To choose alternate display and input units, simply double-click the heading showing the
desired units, or right-click and choose the "Activate" command. Pre-defined unit systems can
be altered by right-clicking on the heading and choosing the "Modify" command. A unit
system may be renamed either by clicking on a heading that is already selected, thus entering a
name editing mode, or by right-clicking the heading and choosing the "Rename" command.
The user may also create his or her own display unit systems, which will be added to the list
in the Unit Systems branch of the tree view. To do so, right-click on the top-level Unit
System heading in the tree view and choose the "New" command. A Unit System dialog
will appear, as shown in Figure 2.6.
40
3/15/2010
Figure 2.6: Unit System Dialog

All data input fields have pull-down menu boxes associated with them that list the available
units for each item (force, length, time, temperature, and so forth). Begin by selecting the
existing unit system that is closest to the desired system. To do this, first select the "Unit
System" input field at the top of the dialog. A down-arrow button will appear at the right end
of the field once it has been selected. Use this button to access the pull-down list of available
systems and choose the one that is most similar to the system you wish to create. Then,
access the list once more and choose the "Custom" option. This action will unlock all of the
individual items in the "Corresponding Units" section below, so that they can be altered.
By first choosing the most similar existing system, several of the fields may already bear the
desired units designations for the new system, minimizing the number that you need to
change. Choose the desired display and input units for the items that you wish to alter using
the pull-down lists at each input field. Enter a unique name in the "Description" field for
identification of the custom unit system in the model tree.
To make the new unit system available for all future FEA models to be created on the subject
computer workstation, activate the "Add to tree for new models" checkbox. If you only
want this unit system to be available for the current model, leave this box unchecked.
When an alternate unit system is activated, all data input screens will reflect the associated
current input units. These will remain in effect until the unit system is changed once again.
This facilitates inputting available model data that may be in differing unit systems. For
example, you may have load data in English (in) units but your available material data may be
in Metric mks (SI) or cgs units. Simply change to the appropriate unit system before
accessing the input screens for the quantities or properties being defined. You will not have
to manually perform the units conversions.
Alternate unit systems are also available within the Results environment. For example, a
model can be constructed using mm for length with loads applied based on Newtons,
degrees C, and Joules. By choosing the English (in BTU) system in the Results environment,
analysis results will be presented using pounds per square inch (psi) for stresses and thermal
results will be shown in units of BTUs (British Thermal Units) and degrees F.
3/15/2010
41
Loading Options
In static stress analysis with linear material models, there are four different categories of
loading: nodal, edge, surface and element. The loading options are listed below. Loading
options for thermal analysis will be covered in Chapter 8, "Steady-State Heat Transfer" and in
Chapter 9, "Transient Heat Transfer."
Nodal loading:
Forces: Will apply a force along any vector to the selected nodes.
Lumped Masses: Will apply the effects of a mass concentrated at the point of
attachment. For the mass moment of inertia (rotational inertia) about a given axis to have
effect, the element type must support rotational DOFs.
Moments: Will apply a moment about any vector to the selected nodes. The nodes must
be on an element type that supports rotational DOFs.
Displacement Boundary: Applies a displacement along any vector to the node.
Temperatures: Applies a temperature to the selected node for use in a thermal stress
analysis. Temperature data can also be mapped from a thermal analysis.
Voltages: Applies a voltage to the selected nodes for use in a piezoelectric analysis.
Voltage data can also be mapped from an electrostatic analysis.
Edge loading:
Edge forces: Applies nodal forces to the nodes on an edge so that the magnitude is
evenly distributed over the length.
Edge displacement boundaries: Applies nodal displacement boundaries to each node

on the edge.
Surface loading:
42
Surface forces: Evenly distributes a force over the surface.
Surface variable loads: Applies a pressure that will vary with position according to a
mathematical function. Refer to the example at the end of this chapter.
Surface pressure/tractions: Applies pressures either normal to a surface or along a

specified direction.
Surface hydrostatic pressure: For brick elements, this applies a hydrostatic pressure
which is zero at a specified Y-elevation and increases linearly in the -Y direction. The
model must be oriented with the +Y direction being vertically upward. For plate elements,
the model and hydrostatic pressure may have any orientation (see the "Hydrostatic Pressure
Loads" heading under the "Loading Options" section of Chapter 4).
Surface displacement boundary: Applies nodal displacement boundaries to each node

on the surface.
Surface temperatures: Applies nodal temperatures to each node on the surface.
Surface voltages: Applies nodal voltages to each node on the surface.
3/15/2010

Element loading:
Accelerations/gravity: Will apply an acceleration load to the entire model. The parts
must have a mass density defined.
Centrifugal loads: Will apply a centrifugal load perpendicular to a global axis to the
entire model. The parts must have a mass density defined.
For additional details about the application and definitions of any of these preceding loads,
refer to Appendix C.
NOTE: Nodal loads may be defined at a remote point not on the model geometry and attached
to a set of model nodes, edges, or surfaces using automatically generated line elements.
Refer to the help files for additional information regarding the application of remote loads
and constraints.
Loads applied to nodes, edges or surfaces can be copied and duplicated on other nodes, edges,
or surfaces. This can be done by clicking on the load and right-clicking in the display area.
Select the "Copy" command. Right-click on the node, edge or surface where you want to
duplicate the load and select the "Paste" command.
Load Cases
When applying most loads, there is a "Load Case / Load Curve" field. This field will
control which load case the load is applied in. Each load case will be analyzed separately.
For example, if you want to see the effect of a 100 pound force applied in the X direction and
a separate 500 pound force applied in the Y direction, you can place these forces in load case
1 and load case 2. If you also want to see the combined effect, you can copy these forces and
apply them both in load case 3. When the analysis is performed, there will be three sets of
results in the Results environment. You can toggle through the load cases using the "Load
Case" pull-out menu in the RESULTS OPTIONS pull-down menu.
Certain loads need load case multipliers in order to be applied. For instance, if you apply a
pressure or a surface force, you need to assign a value in the "Pressure" column of the
"Load Case Multipliers" table in the "Multipliers" tab of the "Analysis Parameters"
dialog. This dialog is accessed either by accessing the ANALYSIS pull-down menu and
selecting the "Parameters" command or by right-clicking on "Analysis Parameters"
heading in the tree view and selecting the "Modify Analysis Parameters " command.
This multiplier is a global multiplier for all of your pressures and surface forces in your
model. If you entered 1,000 psi for the pressure and put a load case multiplier for pressure of
2.0, your actual pressure in the model for that load case will be 2000 psi. The value in the
"Index" column refers to the load case number
There are seven multipliers in the "Analysis Parameters" dialog for a static stress analysis:
Pressure:
This multiplier will multiply all pressures, tractions, surface forces,

surface variable loads and beam distributed loads.
Accel/Gravity: This multiplier will multiply the acceleration loads defined under the
"Accel/Gravity" tab.
Rotation:
This multiplier will multiply the rotation rate specified under the
"Centrifugal" tab.
Angular Accel: This multiplier will multiply the angular acceleration specified under
the "Centrifugal" tab.
3/15/2010
43
Boundary:
This multiplier will multiply the magnitude of all displacement

boundary elements.
Thermal:
This multiplier does NOT directly multiply the magnitude of the

temperature applied to each of the nodes in a model. Rather, it
multiplies the thermal load as defined by the equation:
Thermal Load = (Coefficient of Thermal Expansion) *
(Nodal Temperature Stress Free Reference Temperature)
So, the difference between the nodal temperature and the stress-free
reference temperature (defined in the "Element Definition" dialog) is
being multiplied. Therefore, a thermal multiplier of 2 will result in
exactly double the stress relative to a thermal multiplier of 1, even for
parts with non-zero stress free reference temperatures.
Voltage:
This multiplier will multiply the magnitude of the voltage applied to

each of the nodes in a model.
You can combine these multipliers in any order and can turn off loads for different load cases
by entering a zero for that column. Refer to Figure 2.7 for an example.
Figure 2.7: Analysis Parameters Dialog

The load case multipliers shown in Figure 2.7 would be used to model the following situations:
44
1.
Only surface applied forces, pressures, and/or traction loads applied.
2.
No load except for gravity.
3/15/2010

3.
No load except for thermal loads.
4.
All loads listed in preceding items 1 through 3.
5.
1.5 times the surface applied forces, pressures, and/or traction loads combined with
gravity and 1.25 times the thermal load.
Constraint Options
In static stress analysis with linear material models, constraints can be applied to the model in
three ways: to nodes, edges or surfaces. If a constraint is applied to a surface or edge,
constraints will be applied to each node on the surface or edge.
Boundary conditions: Boundary conditions will completely constrain the node to which
they are applied against translation or rotation along the specified direction.
Rigid boundary elements: Rigid boundary elements will apply a stiffness against translation
or rotation along a global direction.
Elastic boundary elements: Elastic boundary elements will apply a stiffness against
translation or rotation along any vector.
Modeling Symmetry and Antisymmetry

One way to simplify models is to use symmetry or antisymmetry. If the loading, geometry
and results of a model are symmetric about a plane, only the part of the model on one side of
that plane needs to be analyzed. However, in order to get correct results, the proper
constraints must be applied at the symmetry plane. When modeling symmetry, the out-ofplane translation and the two in-plane rotations must be constrained. This is described in
Figure 2.8. If the geometry is symmetric, but the loading and results are antisymmetric, you
can apply antisymmetric constraints along the symmetry plane.
When modeling
antisymmetry, the two in-plane translations and the out-of-plane rotation must be constrained.
This is described in Figure 2.9.
Figure 2.8: Symmetrical Model
Figure 2.9: Antisymmetrical Model
For additional details about the application and definitions of any of these constraints, refer to
Appendix C.
3/15/2010
45
Design Scenarios
A design scenario is a set of parameters for a model. Multiple design scenarios can be present
for a single model file. Any parameter can be changed between design scenarios. The only
limitation is that a single file cannot have different CAD models between design scenarios.
The mesh parameters can change, but not the actual CAD geometry. For hand built models,
each design scenario can contain unique geometry. The results for each design scenario will
be kept separate. Therefore different analysis types can be performed on a single model in
separate design scenarios and the results can be easily loaded for each analysis type.
Figure 2.10 shows a tree view with three design scenarios.
Figure 2.10: Tree View with Three Design Scenarios

In this case, three design scenarios were used because pressure loads follow a global
multiplier. Therefore a model cannot have pressure in one location in load case 1 and another
location in load case 2. For a static stress analysis, design scenarios are not a complete
substitute for multiple load cases. Since design scenarios are actually separate models, the
entire analysis will be performed twice for two design scenarios. Multiple load cases can be
solved in the same analysis.
It is recommended that multiple load cases be used if:
46
Geometry, mesh and element parameters are the same. This includes plate thickness
and beam or truss cross-sectional properties.
The loading consists of loads which can be placed in individual load cases such as
nodal forces or moments.
The loading consists of loads which can be scaled by a single value in different load
cases. For example, all pressure loads can be scaled by a different pressure
multiplier in each load case.
3/15/2010
It is recommended the multiple design scenarios be used if:
Geometry, mesh or element input is different for each situation.
The loading consists of loads that cannot be adequately controlled by load cases. For
example gravity can only be applied in one direction. This direction can be changed
in a new design scenario. Also pressures and distributed loads can be turned on or
off in different areas of the model using design scenarios.
Different analysis types will be performed.
Only one design scenario can be active at a time. The heading for the active design scenario
will be bold in the tree view. Design Scenario 3 is active in the model shown in Figure 2.10
on the proceeding page. A new design scenario can be created by right-clicking on the
heading for the active design scenario and selecting the "New" or "Copy" command.
If the "New" command is selected, you will be asked to specify an analysis type for the new
design scenario. If the model has an associated CAD model, only the CAD geometry will be
present in the new design scenario. If the model is a hand built model, nothing will be present
in the new design scenario.
If the "Copy" command is selected, all of the current parameters including geometry will be
present in the new design scenario. Any changes that are made will only affect the new
design scenario. The original design scenario will not be changed.
You can activate an inactive design scenario by right-clicking on the heading for the design
scenario in the tree view and selecting the "Load" command, or by double-clicking the heading.
FEA Object Groups

It can be seen in Figure 2.10, that there is an "FEA Object Groups" heading for each design
scenario. Whenever a single load or multiple loads are applied to a model in a single
command, a new FEA object group will be created. A new heading will appear under the
"FEA Object Groups" heading in the tree view. The name of the heading will be the type
of load that is applied. For example, if you apply fixed nodal boundary conditions to one
part of a model, a "Nodal Boundary Conditions" heading will appear in the tree view.
Under this heading will be an individual heading for each individual boundary condition. If
you then apply nodal boundary conditions to another area of the model, a new heading will
be created. If the loads and boundary conditions are applied in a logical manner, this
organization will make it easy to make changes in the future because they will all remain
grouped together.
Loads and constraints can be moved between FEA object groups after they are created by
either dragging the heading in the tree view or by right-clicking on the load or constraint and
selecting the "Move to Group" command. If the "Move to Group" command is
selected, a dialog will appear that will allow you to select the target FEA object group or
create a new FEA object group.
If all of the loads or constraints in an FEA object group are identical, you can change the
parameters of them at the same time by right-clicking on the heading for the FEA object
group and selecting the "Modify" command. The changes will be applied to each load
or constraint in the FEA object group. If there are multiple types of loads and constraints in
an FEA object group or they have different values, you will not be able to modify the FEA
object group.
3/15/2010
47

Only loads and constraints that are valid for the current analysis type can exist in a design
scenario. For example, a convection load cannot exist in a design scenario with a static stress
analysis type. Therefore it is strongly recommended that you use separate design scenarios
when performing multiple analysis types on a model. For example, if you are performing a
steady-state heat transfer analysis and will use the temperature profile in a subsequent thermal
stress analysis, these should be set up in separate design scenarios. If you change the analysis
type from steady-state heat transfer to static stress, the thermal specific loads will be deleted.
For this reason, if you try to change the analysis type, a prompt will appear asking you if you
want to copy the current parameters into a new design scenario for the new analysis type or
delete any parameters not relevant to the new analysis type.
Local Coordinate Systems

By default, any load or constraint that is applied along a direction is applied with respect to
the global coordinate system (X, Y, Z). Sometimes this is not adequate to properly model a
situation. In these cases a local coordinate system can be applied. You can create a local
coordinate system by right-clicking on the "Coordinate Systems" heading in the tree view
and selecting the "New" command. The dialog shown in Figure 2.11 will appear.
Figure 2.11: Creating Coordinate System Definition Dialog
48
3/15/2010

Three types of local coordinate systems are available in the "Coordinate System Type"
drop-down box: "Cylindrical", "Rectangular" and "Spherical". Once the type of local
coordinate system is selected, you must specify three points. These will correspond to the
points A, B and C in the image. You can either enter the coordinates for these points or you
can select them in the display area by pressing the "Select A," Select B," or "Select C"
button. You can select all three in quick succession by pressing the "Interactive" button.
The axes will appear as you select the three points in interactive mode. The last thing to do is
type a name in the "Description" field.
Once a local coordinate system is defined, you can apply it to any nodes, edges, or surfaces in
the model by selecting the desired geometry and right-clicking in the display area. Select the
desired coordinate system in the "Coordinate Systems" pull-out menu. Any directional
loads applied to items to which a local coordinate system has been assigned will be applied
according to the local directions. If the local coordinate system is cylindrical, the X, Y and Z
values will refer to the R, , and Z directions, respectively. If the local coordinate system is
spherical, the X, Y and Z values will refer to the R, , and directions, respectively.
You may define multiple local coordinate systems and have them applied concurrently to
differing portions of the model. If a coordinate system is defined but not applied to any
specific nodes, edges, or surfaces, then it will have no effect on the model except within the
Results environment, where all displacements, stresses, forces, or moments may be displayed
according to any one of the local coordinate systems.
Defining Materials and Using the Material Library Manager

Material properties must be defined for each part in the model. This is done by right-clicking
on the "Material" heading for that part in the tree view and selecting the "Modify
Material" command. A dialog will appear allowing you to define the relevant properties.
Not all of the properties are necessary for every model. For example, you only need to define
the modulus of elasticity, the Poisson's ratio, and a coefficient of thermal expansion if you are
performing a thermal stress analysis optionally include the density if an acceleration or
gravity load is to be specified. For a stress analysis without thermal effects, the coefficient of
thermal expansion is not needed.
Some element types support multiple material models. The material model is defined in the
"Material model" drop-down box in the "Element Definition" dialog which is accessed by
right-clicking on the "Element Definition" heading for that part in the tree view and
selecting the "Modify Element Definition..." command. A table with all of the material
models available for each element is available in Appendix D.
The material library manager allows tracking of predefined or user defined materials by use of
a database format. Material data can be imported or exported to and from XML files. Many
of the material properties have been provided by MatWeb. To access the library manager
from the FEA Editor environment, select the "Tools: Manage Material Library"
command. The dialog shown in Figure 2.12 will appear:
3/15/2010
49
Figure 2.12: Material Library Manager Dialog

A pre-defined database called the Autodesk Algor Material Library already exists. This
database cannot be altered. To view the different material properties select a material
(Aluminum 6061-T6; 6061-T651 for example). The material properties will appear in the
table to the right. This table contains the information for the defined material. In the
"Material Identification" section, the material library and the material model are identified.
The material model is selected when the entry for the material is added. This will be
discussed later. Also in this section are the material name and material description. The rest
of the table contains the material properties associated with the material model selected. For
Aluminum 6061-T6; 6061-T651 the material model selected was "Standard". As seen in
Figure 2.12, properties for the "Standard" material model include general properties (mass
density and damping), elastic, thermal, electrical and plastic properties. Not all information is
needed for every analysis. For example, if a new material for a static stress analysis is
needed, then you should only need to enter data for the elastic properties.
Since this is a material from the Autodesk Algor Material Library, editing properties is not
allowed. The next section will describe how to enter properties for user materials. The
database format for the libraries is a FoxPro (.dbf) file format. These files can be changed
with the Material Library Manager, FoxPro or Visual Basic.
50
3/15/2010
Adding Material Libraries and Material Properties

To create a library, press the "New " button at the top of the dialog. The dialog shown if
Figure 2.13: Create Library Dialog

This dialog allows the user to create the name of the new library. In the "File name" field
enter a library name and then press the "Save" button. The next dialog will appear.
Figure 2.14: Create Library Dialog

This dialog is a prompt to enter a description for the library. For example, in the predefined
library, the description is "Autodesk Algor Material Library". After typing in a description
press the "OK" button to return to the "Material Library Manager" dialog. Notice that a
new tab exists for the new library. This is set as the active library.
To add a material, right-click on the heading for the library in the tree view and select the
"Add New Material" command. The dialog shown in Figure 2.15 will appear.
3/15/2010
51
Figure 2.15: New Material Dialog

Type the name of the material in the "Material name" field. Choose the type of material
model in the "Material model" drop-down box and select a unit system in the "Unit System"
drop-down box. If the material is entered in one unit system and the model is in a different unit
system, the software will automatically make the appropriate conversions. This means that the
material information can be in "English (in)" and the model can be in "Metric mks (SI)". In
the "Material Description" field, enter a description of the material that is being added. It is
suggested that a reference to the source of information for the material should be entered in the
"Material source description" field. Once this information is specified, press the "OK"
button. The screen shown in Figure 2.16 will appear.
52
3/15/2010
Figure 2.16: Material Property Entry Dialog for a Standard Material Model
The next step is to enter the material properties needed. You can then repeat the process to
add more materials to the library. Once you are finished, close the Material Library Manager.
NOTE: It is also possible to create new libraries or to save materials to a user library directly
from the material applicator screen (that is, without having to use the material library
manager).
3/15/2010
53
Examples of Loads and Constraints

When to Use Displacement Boundary Elements
Figure 2.17 shows an example of where displacement boundary elements may be used. When
the foundation collapses, the bottom of the structure will move. However, the structure will
not move the entire 0.5" because of the stiffness of the bolts. Therefore a stiffness must be
applied to the displacement boundary element to properly model this situation.
Figure 2.17: Sample Displacement Boundary Element Application

Another example is any situation where you know the deformation or displacement to be
imparted to a given design but do not know the force required to achieve it. For example, say
you are shouldering a roller bearing against a dished or conic washer. The washer acts like a
spring to keep the assembly tight and free of clearance. You know that you are to compress
the washer axially by 0.05 inches. Enter this movement as a displacement boundary condition
and the program will tell you the resultant forces and stresses.
Using Local Coordinate Systems

To illustrate the use of a local coordinate system, we will use a simple model of a cube with a
hole running through it. A meshed archive of this model (Cube.ach) is located in the
"Chapter 2 Example Models\Input File" folder in the class directory or in the copy of the
solutions folders on your computer. We want to apply nodal forces to the interior of the hole
so that they are normal to the surface. We could calculate the normal vector at every location
along the circumference and apply the nodal forces individually. A better way would be to
create a cylindrical coordinate system with the origin at the center of the hole. We can then
apply the forces in the radial, R, direction.
54

Simulation"

"Open"
"Algor Simulation Archive

(*.ach)"
Select the "Algor Simulation Archive (*.ach)" option in

the Autodesk Algor Files section of the "Files of type:"
drop-down box.
3/15/2010

Select the file "Cube.ach" in the "Chapter 2 Example
Models\Input File" directory.
"Cube.ach"
"Open"
"OK"
View"
Select the location where you want the model to be

extracted and press the "OK" button.
command. The model will appear as shown in Figure 2.18.
Figure 2.18: Model in FEA Editor Environment

We must first determine the location of the center of the hole.
"Selection: Select: Vertices"

"Shape" pull-out menu. Select the "Point" command.
"Select" pull-out menu. Select the "Vertices" command.
Mouse
Click on the bottom left corner of the cube in the XY view.
Mouse
"Inquire"
Select the "Inquire" command. A tool tip will appear with

the coordinates of the selected vertex. It is (0, 0, 2).
Mouse
Click on the upper right corner of the cube in the XY view.
Mouse
"Inquire"
Select the "Inquire" command. A tool tip will appear with

the coordinates of the selected vertex. It is (2, 2, 2).
3/15/2010
55

Since the hole is at the center of the cube, we can determine that the centerline of the hole is at
X=1 and Y=1.
Mouse
Right-click on the "Coordinate Systems" heading in the

tree view.
"New"
Select the "New" command.
"Cylindrical"
Select the "Cylindrical" option in the "Coordinate

System Type" drop-down box.
Referring to the image in the dialog, Points A and B can be any two points along the centerline
of the hole. We will use (1, 1, 0) for point A and (1, 1, 1) for point B. Point C must be in the
plane perpendicular to the vector from point A to point B. We will use (2, 2, 0).
1 <Tab> 1 <Tab> 0
1 <Tab> 1 <Tab> 1
2 <Tab> 2 <Tab> 0
Type "1" in the first field for "Point A", press <Tab>, type
"1", press <Tab> and type"0".
Type "1" in the first field for "Point B", press <Tab>, type
Type "2" in the first field for "Point C", press <Tab>, type
Center of Hole
Type "Center of Hole" in the "Description" field.
"OK"
Press the "OK" button.
Next, we must select the vertices of the model that will use the cylindrical coordinate system
and assign this coordinate system to them.
"Selection: Shape: Circle"

"Shape" pull-out menu. Select the "Circle" command.
Mouse
Click near the center of the hole.
Mouse
Click the mouse to create a circle enclosing the vertices on

the interior of the hole.
Mouse
"Coordinate Systems: Id 1:
Center of Hole"
Select the "Coordinate Systems" pull-out menu and select

the "Id 1: Center of Hole" command.
If small miniaxes are not already visible at the selected
nodes; access the VIEW pull-down menu, select the
"Options" pull-out menu, and activate the "Coordinate
Systems Axes" option.
"View: Options: Coordinate

System Axes"
Small miniaxes will be visible on each selected vertex. The red axis (indicating the local
xdirection) should point away from the center of the circle, as shown by the radial miniaxis
lines in Figure 2.19. Next, we can add the nodal forces.
56
3/15/2010
Figure 2.19: Model with Local Coordinate System Defined

Mouse
"Add: Nodal Forces"
With the vertices at the hole's surface still selected, rightclick in the display area.
Select the "Add" pull-out menu and select the "Nodal
Forces" command.
10
Type "10" in the "Magnitude" field.
"X"
Select the "X" radio button in the "Direction" section.

This corresponds to the radial direction.
"OK"
The forces will appear normal to the surface as shown in Figure 2.20.
Figure 2.20: Model with Forces Applied

A completed archive of this model (Local coord.ach) is available in the "Chapter 2 Example
Models\Results Archives" folder in the class directory or in the copy of the solutions folders
on your computer.
3/15/2010
57

An alternate method of defining cylindrical coordinate systems is to draw construction lines
across the center of the hole or similar round feature, one at each end of the feature, and to
divide these two lines into two increments each. To draw construction lines, access the
GEOMETRY pull-down menu, select the "Add" pull-out menu, and choose the "Line..."
command. Be sure that the "Use as Construction" option is enabled so that you're not
adding actual FEA entities but merely reference geometry. To divide the lines, you must be
in "Select Construction Objects" mode, select the lines, right-click, and choose the
"Divide..." command. Next, place construction vertices at the midpoints of the construction
lines using the "GEOMETRY: Add: Construction Vertex..." command. This method
provides two vertices along the centerline of the hole that can easily be selected when
defining the coordinate system.
When using this method it is best to specify an existing part number for the construction lines.
This will prevent the addition to the model tree of a part with no actual FEA entities. Such an
"empty" part would need to be deactivated prior to performing the analysis.
Using Surface Variable Loads

Surface variable loads can be used when a load follows a known function across a surface. A
classic example would be a bearing load where the force profile is parabolic. This will be
practiced in a future exercise. For now we will attempt to apply a load to a side of the cube
model that we used previously to demonstrate the creation of local coordinate systems. We
want this load to have a magnitude of 55 psi at the top of the block (Z=2) and decrease
linearly along the Z axis to 8 psi at the bottom (Z=0). A diagram of this load is shown in
Figure 2.21.
Figure 2.21: Diagram of the Surface Variable Force

We will continue using the "Cube" model from the prior example. If this model is not still
open, reopen it.
"View: Orientation: Right
View"
58

"Orientation" pull-out menu. Select the "Right View"
command.
3/15/2010

Mouse
Click on the surface facing the screen.
Mouse
"Add: Surface Variable

Load"

Variable Load" command. The dialog shown in Figure
2.22 will appear.
Figure 2.22: Surface Variable Load Dialog

From the given minimum and maximum loads and positions we can derive the equation for
the pressure as a function of z. The equation is P=23.5z+8. When defining the equation, the
x, y and z coordinates will be represented by the variables r, s and t, respectively. You can
use basic operators such as +,-,*,/, () and ^. Pressing the "Available Primitives >>" button
will allow you to access several common functions.
"Normal to Surface"
Select the "Normal to Surface" radio button.
Linear Pressure
Type "Linear Pressure" in the "Active function" field.
23.5*t+8
Type "23.5*t+8" in the "Expression (Use 'r', 's', and 't'

as variables)" field.
"View"
Press the "View" button.
"T Z"
Select the "T Z" radio button. A graph will appear as

shown in Figure 2.23. This shows a force increasing from 8
to 55 from z=0 to z=2.
3/15/2010
59
Figure 2.23: Variable Load Graph

"Close"
Press the "Close" button.
"OK"
Mouse
Right-click on the "Material" heading in the tree view.
"Modify Material"
Select the "Modify Material" command.
"Steel (ASTM-A36)"

available materials.
"OK"

"View: Orientation: Front
View"

and loads in the Results environment.
"Orientation" pull-out menu. Select the "Front View"
command.
The model will now appear as shown in Figure 2.24. You can see the force vectors increasing
in the positive Z direction.
60
3/15/2010
Figure 2.24: Surface Variable Load in the Results Environment

You will notice that the arrow at the very top of the surface is shorter than the arrows
immediately below it. This is because when two elements share a node, the nodal forces
receive a partial contribution from each of the adjacent element faces. These are combined
into one force at the shared node and displayed as such in the Results environment. Nodes
along surface edges and at corners represent fewer element faces. For a uniform pressure on a
perfectly uniform mesh, corner nodes will see half of the force that the other nodes along the
edge will see and one-fourth of the force that the interior nodes will see. Similarly, noncorner edge nodes will see half the force that the interior nodes will see.
A completed archive of this model (Surf var load.ach) is available in the "Chapter 2 Example
Models\Results Archives" directory in the class directory or in the copy of the solutions
folders on your computer.
3/15/2010
61
62
3/15/2010
Exercise A
Frame Full to Quarter-Symmetry Model Comparison
Brick Elements
Concepts that will be illustrated:
Merging two CAD solid models into a single FEA model

Applying pressure loads
Applying symmetry constraints
Comparing full model results to symmetry model results
Objective:
Mesh and analyze the frame shown below. Analyze the whole model and a quartersymmetry version of the model, side-by-side, and verify that the results are the same.
Geometry:
Start with the file Exercise A (Full).step and then merge in the second file
Exercise A (Quarter).step. Both files are in the "Exercise A\Input Files" folder of the
class directory or in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer. By merging the
two together, they can be solved simultaneously and compared more easily.
Mesh:
For a precise comparison, use a relatively small, absolute mesh size of 0.15 inch.
Constraints:
Fully fix the holes at the top of each part (half-holes in the case of the symmetry version).
Apply proper symmetry boundary conditions for the quarter-symmetry model.
3/15/2010
63
Loads:
Apply a 10,000 psi pressure normal to one surface of each part, as indicated in the
preceding diagram.
Element:
Brick
Material:
Steel (ASTM-A36)
Results:
Assembly Description
Maximum
von Mises Stress
(psi) *
Maximum
Displacement
Magnitude
(in)
Full Model
30,744
0.00759
Quarter-Symmetry Model
30,765
0.00759
* Note that the stress variation between the two parts is less than onetenth of 1% (0.07%, in fact). This small variation can easily be
explained by the differences in the surface and/or interior meshes of
the two solids.
A completed archive of the combined full and quarter models, Exercise A (Complete).ach, is available in
the "Exercise A\Results Archives" folder in the class directory or in the copy of the solutions folders on
your computer.
64
3/15/2010
Chapter
Results Evaluation and Presentation

Chapter Objectives
Learn how the results of the analysis are calculated

Learn how to evaluate the displacement, stress and reaction force results
Learn how to inquire on results at specific locations
Learn how to create graphs of results
Learn how to customize presentations of the results
Learn how to generate image and animations of the results
Learn how to generate an HTML report of the results
Background on How Results are Calculated

As was explained in the Introduction, the equation that is solved during the analysis is
{x} = [K ]1{ f }
where the stiffness matrix, [K], and the force vector {f} are known from the geometry and the
loads. Once the displacement vector {x} has been determined, the distribution of the
displacements and then the strains are determined.
Once the strain values are known, the stress can be calculated from the relationship:
= E
This displacement-based finite element solution process whereby a distribution is derived
from nodal displacements, the strains are derived from the distribution, and the stresses are
finally calculated from the strains is generally referred to as "stress recovery."
In summary, the displacements are the first result to be solved. Once the displacements are
known, the strains and then the stresses can be calculated. Typically, a rather coarse mesh can
provide fairly accurate structural displacement results. However, the strains and stresses
calculated from these coarse mesh displacement values may not be accurate enough. A finer
mesh will improve the accuracy of the stress results, even though the displacement results are
relatively insensitive to the change in mesh size.
3/15/2010
65
Chapter 3: Results Evaluation and Presentation
How to Evaluate Results

Evaluation of results is done in the Results environment. Once the analysis is performed, the
model will be automatically transferred to the Results environment. To enter the Results
environment at any other time, access the TOOLS pull-down menu and select the "Results"
command.
Upon attempting to enter the Results environment for a previously run model, you may receive a
pop-up warning stating that the existing results do not match the current model. This can occur if
you visited an element or material data screen or the analysis parameters dialog and clicked "OK,"
rather than canceling out of the dialog, even if you changed no input. If you are sure that the
results still correctly reflect the current model setup, click the "Yes" button in the pop-up message
box to proceed to the results environment.
If the Results environment is not available (that is, it is grayed-out) but you are certain that the
results have been output and that they are consistent with the current model setup; you can use the
"Analysis: Check Model" command to view the model in the Results environment.
Alternate Display Unit Systems
As discussed in the previous chapter, several pre-defined unit systems are available in both the
FEA Editor and Results environments. In addition, custom unit systems may be defined and,
optionally, made available for all future models. Regardless of the model units, the results can be
presented in any other pre-defined or user-defined unit system by simply activating the desired
Display Units listed within the tree view. For more information regarding the creation of custom
unit systems or modifying existing unit systems, refer to "Working with Various Unit Systems" in
Chapter 2 (page 40).
Displacement Results
As mentioned previously, the first result to review is the displacements. If the displacements
look incorrect, there is most likely an error in the setup of the model. If the displacements
look correct, the stresses can then be reviewed.
To review the displacement contours, access the RESULTS pull-down menu and select the
"Displacement" pull-out menu. The "Magnitude" command will display the magnitude of
the displacements at each node. The magnitude, D, is calculated by the equation:
D = D x2 + D y2 + D z2
where Dx, Dy and Dz are the components of the displacement in the global directions. Note
that this will always be a positive value. The contours of the individual components can also
be displayed by selecting the appropriate command in the "Displacement" pull-out menu.
Another way to verify the displacement results is to view the deflected shape. This is useful
to visually verify that the deflections are in the logical direction. To view the deflected shape,
access the RESULTS OPTIONS pull-down menu and select the "Displaced Model
Options" command. The dialog shown in Figure 3.1 will appear.
66
3/15/2010
Figure 3.1: Displaced Model Options Dialog

Displaced Model section
Show Displaced Model: If this checkbox is activated, the displaced shape of the model
will be shown in the display area. If any contour is currently being shown, the displaced
shape will continue to show the contour.
Scale Factor section
As an Absolute Value: If this radio button is selected, the actual displacement
values will be multiplied by the value in the "Scale Factor" field to create the
displaced model display. A value of "1" in the "Scale Factor" field will show the
true displaced shape of the model.
As a Percentage of Model Size: If this radio button is selected, the scale factor used
to multiply the actual displacements will be based on the size of the model. The
slider bar can be used to get a reasonable scale factor.
Show Undisplaced Model As section
Do Not Show: If this radio button is selected, the undisplaced model will not appear in
the display area.
Mesh: If this radio button is selected, a wireframe mesh representing the undisplaced
model will appear to be used as a reference.
Mesh on Top of Displaced Model: If this radio button is selected, a mesh representing
the undisplaced model will be drawn on top of the shaded model representing the
displaced model.
Transparent: If this radio button is selected, a transparent shaded representation of the
undisplaced model will appear to be used as a reference. The level of the transparency
can be controlled using the "Display Options: Transparency Level" command.
3/15/2010
67
Stress Results
Once the displacement results have been checked, the stresses should be reviewed. In the
RESULTS pull-down menu, select the "Stress" pull-out menu. The first six commands in
this pull-out menu are relevant to brick elements.
von Mises: This command will set the results display to be the equivalent von Mises stress.
The von Mises stress can be displayed for element types with area (2-D, plate and membrane)
and volume (bricks).
The equation used to calculate the von Mises stress is:
] (
2
0.5 (S x S y ) + (S y S z ) + (S z S x ) + 3 S xy
+ S yz2 + S zx2
2
where Sx, Sy and Sz are the normal stresses in the global directions and Sxy, Syz and Sxz are the
shear stresses. In terms of the principal stresses S1, S2 and S3:
0.5 ( S1 S 2 ) + ( S 2 S 3 ) + ( S 3 S1 )
2
Note from the equations that the von Mises value is always positive.
Tresca*2: The Tresca*2 stress can be displayed for solid element types. This method
extracts the maximum shear stress from a given stress tensor.
The Tresca equation is:
0.5 * MAX [ S1 S 2 , S 2 S 3 , S 3 S1 ]
where S1, S2 and S3 are the principal stresses. The value reported is twice the maximum shear
stress. Thus, yielding would occur when the reported Tresca*2 value reaches the yield stress.
Note that by definition, the Tresca stress is always positive. Refer to the Mohr's circle in
Figure 3.2 for a graphical representation.
Minimum Principal: This command will set the results display to calculate the minimum
principal stress (S3). The principal stress can be displayed for element types with area and
volume. Positive (+) indicates tension and negative (-) indicates compression. Refer to the
Mohr's circle in Figure 3.2 for a graphical representation.
Intermediate Principal: This command will set the results display to calculate the
intermediate principal stress (S2). This is the stress in the direction normal to the minimum
and maximum principal stresses. The principal stress can be displayed for element types with
area and volume. Positive (+) indicates tension and negative (-) indicates compression. Refer
to the Mohr's circle in Figure 3.2 for a graphical representation.
Maximum Principal: This command will set the results display to calculate the maximum
principal stress (S1). The principal stress can be displayed for element types with area and
volume. Positive (+) indicates tension and negative (-) indicates compression. Refer to the
Mohr's circle in Figure 3.2 for a graphical representation.
68
3/15/2010
Figure 3.2: Mohr's Circle

Stress Tensor: The commands in this pull-out menu display the component of the stress in
the chosen direction. Technically, it uses the double dot product with the stress tensor or local
stress components. The stress tensor can be displayed for element types with area and
volume.
If the "Show Element-Local Results" command in the RESULTS OPTIONS menu is not
active, you will be able to select between the following global stresses. If this option is
active, the following choices will display the local stress tensors mentioned in the individual
descriptions.
1.) XX: Stress tensor component showing the normal stress in the global X direction.
Positive (+) indicates tension; negative (-) indicates compression
2.) YY: Stress tensor component showing the normal stress in the global Y direction.
Positive (+) indicates tension; negative (-) indicates compression.
3.) ZZ: Stress tensor component showing the normal stress in the global Z direction.
Positive (+) indicates tension; negative (-) indicates compression.
4.) XY: Stress tensor component showing the shear stress in the global XY direction. (X
indicates the direction normal to the face, and Y indicates the direction of the
shear stress.)
5.) YZ: Stress tensor component showing the shear stress in the global YZ direction. (Y
indicates the direction normal to the face, and Z indicates the direction of the
shear stress.)
6.) ZX: Stress tensor component showing the shear stress in the global ZX direction. (Z
indicates the direction normal to the face, and X indicates the direction of the
shear stress.)
3/15/2010
69

Factor of Safety: You can display the factor of safety values for any stress result by
accessing the RESULTS OPTIONS pull-down menu and selecting the "Factor of Safety"
command. The ratio of the allowable stress value to the current stress value will be displayed
at each node. By default, the yield stress of the materials will be used as the allowable. You
can modify these values using the "Results Options: Set Allowable Stress Values"
command.
Reaction Force Results

Another useful result type is the reaction force. It is important to verify that the reaction
forces at the boundary conditions are equal to the forces that were applied to the model so that
a force balance exists. Access the RESULTS pull-down menu and select the "Reactions
Vector" pull-out menu. Six reaction types will appear. Each reaction can be plotted as the
magnitude or a component. These results can also be found in the "ds.l" text file within the
numbered design scenario subfolder under the filename.ds_data folder.
Reaction Force: This command will display the internal force reaction at each node. Note
that this is not the support reactions. You can either have the magnitude of the reaction force
displayed or the individual components along the global axes.
Applied Force: This command will display the force applied to each node. You can either
have the magnitude of the applied force displayed or the individual components along the
global axes.
Residual Force: This command will display the residual force at each node (sum of applied
and reaction). This is what most engineers call the support reactions. You can either have the
magnitude of the residual force displayed or the individual components along the global axes.
Reaction Moment: This command will display the internal moment reaction at each node.
Note that this is not what most people consider to be the support reactions. You can either
have the magnitude of the reaction moment displayed or the individual components along the
global axes.
Applied Moment: This command will display the moment applied at each node. You can
either have the magnitude of the applied moment displayed or the individual components
along the global axes.
Residual Moment: Displays the residual moment at each node (sum of applied and reaction).
This is what most people consider to be the support reactions. You can either have the
magnitude of the residual force displayed or the individual components along the global axes.
Inquiring on the Results at a Node

It is often necessary to know the exact value of the result being displayed at a particular node.
In order to do this, first select the necessary result contour on the model. Then, to make the
selection easier, access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Select" pull-out
menu and then the "Nodes" command. Now click on the node where you are interested in
the exact results. Access the INQUIRE pull-down menu and select the "Results" command.
The "Inquire: Results" dialog will appear with the current display results for the selected
node. The data in this dialog can be saved to a text file by pressing the "Save Values"
button. The results for multiple nodes can be displayed by holding down the <Ctrl> key
during selection. The average, sum, and other calculations can be performed on sets of data
by selecting the desired option in the "Summary" drop-down box. Calculating the sum of
the results of several nodes is useful for evaluating the reaction force results.
70
3/15/2010

Another option for determining the exact value of a result at a particular node is to use the
probe feature. Access the INQUIRE pull-down menu and select the "Probe" command.
Now as the mouse moves over nodes, a probe will appear with the currently displayed result
value at that node.
Graphing the Results

For static stress analyses with linear material models, the results at a node can be viewed in a
bar graph format. There are two general uses for this; one is to compare the results at multiple
nodes and the other is to compare the results of a single node in multiple load cases. Note that
for nonlinear analyses (not covered within this course), line graphs showing results as a
function of time can be created.
In order to graph the results, select the node(s) and right-click in the display area. Select the
"Graph Value(s)" command to create a graph of the selected node using default settings. If
you had multiple nodes selected when this command was executed, a bar graph will appear
for each node and for each load case. You may also choose the "Embed Graph" command
if you wish the graph to appear within the current contour plot window instead of within a
new window. This will allow you to view the contour of a model and the results of a
particular node, or nodes, simultaneously. Embedded graphs may be moved or resized by
right-clicking on the graph's heading in the tree view and choosing the "Move/Resize"
command. Then click and drag the graph to reposition it or click and drag its handles to
resize it. Choosing the "Modify" command opens the graph in its own window, where the
various attributes of the plot may be altered (such as the font style and size, plotting method,
grid options, legend style, and so on) or the graph may be exported in a variety of formats.
Whenever a graph is created, whether in a separate window or embedded in a contour plot, it
will be listed as an additional presentation in the tree view. Previously defined "Curve"
presentations (such as graphs) can be embedded into a contour plot presentation window, even
though the option to embed the graph had not been chosen when it was created. To embed an
existing curve, right-click on the presentation heading of the desired curve, select the "Embed
in Presentation" pull-out menu, and select the target presentation. A heading will appear under
the "Embedded Presentation" heading in the tree view for the target presentation. When you
select the target presentation, the original contour plot and its embedded graph will be shown.
The embedded graph can be moved or resized in the same manner as previously described.
In some situations, it may be desired to combine the results of multiple nodes. One situation
would be to sum the reaction forces. If this is desired, select the nodes and right-click in the
display area. Select the "Edit New Graph" command. A graph will appear. Also the
"Edit Curve" dialog will appear. You can select the desired function to graph in the
"Multiple Nodes:" drop-down box:
Maximum: This option will graph the maximum result value from the selected node
set at each time value.
Maximum Magnitude: This option will take the absolute value of the result value
from the selected node set and display the maximum value at each time value. The
sign of the value will be reapplied. For example, if the result values are 1, -3, 5 and
-6, the value reported would be -6.
Mean: This option will graph the average result value of the selected node set at each
time value.
Minimum: This option will graph the minimum result value from the selected node
set at each time value.
3/15/2010
71
Range: This option will graph the difference between the maximum result value and
minimum result value from the selected node set at each time value.
Sum: This option will graph the sum of the result values of the selected node set at
each time value.
If you select a node and right-click in the display area after a graph has been created, the
"Add Curve(s) to Graph" pull-out menu will appear in addition to the previously discussed
command. You can select any existing graphs in this pull-out menu and the select nodes will
be added to the graph.
Path Plots
Results for nodes lying along a path, such as along the edge or centerline of a part or through
the thickness of a part, may be graphed. In this case, the abscissa (that is, the horizontal scale)
may be represented as the distance magnitude along the path of the selected nodes or the X, Y
or Z distance components along the nodal path. After selecting a series of nodes, right-click
in the display area and select either the "Create Path Plot" or the "Embed Path Plot"
command. The dialog shown in Figure 3.3 will appear with the selected nodes listed.
Figure 3.3: Path Plot Definition Dialog

Choose the desired radio button within the "Plot Against" section to specify which values to
use for the abscissa. If you want the scale values to reflect the original, undisplaced
coordinates of the nodes, deactivate the "Use Displaced Coordinates" checkbox. Finally,
right-click on the "Nodes" list and choose the desired sorting method so that the graph's data
points will be properly ordered and meaningful. You may sort the nodes according to the X,
Y or Z coordinates. In addition, you may select individual node numbers within the list and
manually move their position up or down within the list.
As with regular results graphs, you may add nodes to a previously created path plot. Simply
select the desired nodes, right-click in the display area, access the "Add Path Plot to Graph"
pull-out menu, and choose the appropriate graph. Nodes added to a path plot are displayed as
an additional path plot curve on the graph. That is, they are not appended to the prior curve.
If you need to change the order of the nodes or what value to plot against, right-click on the
appropriate heading under "Path Plots" in the tree view and choose the "Edit" command.
This will bring up the dialog shown previously in Figure 3.3, with the newest set of nodes
now listed.
72
3/15/2010
Presentation Options
There are many components that are involved in creating a presentation from an analysis.
The Results environment has tools that will assist in creating images and animations that can
then be assembled into a report. In the tree view, there is a heading called "Presentations".
The saved presentation of "Stress" is loaded by default upon entering the Results
environment. Any of the presentations under the "Saved Presentations" heading can be
applied to the model by right-clicking on the heading for that presentation and selecting the
"Activate" command. Once a presentation is activated, it will appear under the
"Presentations" heading. All factors that contribute to the appearance of the model in the
display area are saved in the presentation.
Each loaded presentation is a separate window. To display the presentation, either click on
the appropriate heading in the tree view or select the appropriate command in the WINDOWS
pull-down menu. The WINDOWS pull-down menu can also be used to arrange the windows
in a tiled or cascade formation. To delete a presentation from the list, close the window using
the "X" button. To save the current window to a presentation, right-click on the heading in
the tree view and select either the "Save with Model" or "Save with System" command. If
the "Save with Model" command is selected, the presentation will be available whenever the
current model is opened. If the "Save with System" command is selected, the presentation
will be available for all models.
Contour Plots
Annotations
Annotations can be used to add text to the display area to provide descriptive comments about
the results that are being presented. There are three annotations that are automatically created
from the analysis. These are placed in the lower left-hand corner of the display area. These
are listed under the "Annotations" heading for each presentation in the tree view. A new
annotation can be created by right-clicking on the "Annotations" heading for the desired
presentation and selecting the "Add" command. The "Annotation" dialog shown in
Figure 3.4 will appear. Text can be typed into the "Annotation text" field. A standard
Windows font selection dialog can be accessed by pressing the "Font" button. After you
press the "OK" button, you will be able to place the annotation anywhere in the display area
by left-clicking. The part of the annotation specified by the radio buttons in the "Preview
and text justification" section will be placed where you click. An existing annotation can be
moved to a new location by right-clicking on the heading for that annotation in the tree view
and selecting the "Move" command.
3/15/2010
73
Figure 3.4: Annotation Dialog

Probes
The ability to probe on the results at the nodes in a model using the "Inquire: Probe"
command was described previously in this chapter. Probes can also be used for presentation
purposes. When a probe appears over a node, you can right-click in the display area and
select the "Add Probe" command. A probe displaying the result value and pointing to the
node will remain on the node. If you want to remove a probe, right-click in the display area
and select the "Delete All Probes" command. Any probes that are added in this manner will
be included in any images or animations generated.
Probes can be automatically added to the nodes with the minimum and maximum result
values for the currently displayed result using the "General Options" toolbar. Pressing the
toolbar button will place a red probe with the text "Max" pointing to the node with the
toolbar button will place a blue probe with the text "Min"
maximum value. Pressing the
pointing toward the node with the minimum value. These probes will be included in any
images or animations generated.
Slice Planes
A slice plane can be added to a model to look at the results on the interior mesh. A slice plane can
be added to a model by right-clicking on the "Slice Planes" heading for the desired presentation
and selecting the "Add Slice Plane" pull-out menu. The three global planes and the isometric
option will be available. Once a plane is selected, the orientation of the plane can be modified
using the commands in the "Slice Planes" pull-out menu in the DISPLAY OPTIONS pull-down
menu. The "Rotate About I", "Rotate About J" and "Rotate About Origin" commands
will allow you to change the angle at which the plane is oriented. The I axis is the red axis on
the slice plane. The J axis is the green axis on the slice plane. The origin is located where the
I and J axes meet on the slice plane. The location of the slice plane along the normal axis can
be controlled using the "Translate Normal" command. The "Flip" command will hide the
elements on the opposite side of the slice plane. Once the slice plane is defined to your
specifications, you can right-click on the heading for the particular slice plane and select the
"Hide" command. This will cause the translucent plane to disappear from the view. The
74
3/15/2010

slice plane will still be in effect. To deactivate the effect of the slice plane, right-click on the
heading for the particular slice plane and select the "Deactivate" command.
Customizing the Legend Box
The legend box is an important component to the presentation. Many aspects of the legend
box can be customized by accessing the DISPLAY OPTIONS pull-down menu and selecting
the "Plot Settings" command. The dialog shown in Figure 3.5 will appear.
Figure 3.5: Plot Settings Dialog

Contour Colors tab: The "Presets" drop-down box provides several color sets that can be
used for the contour colors on the models. You can also select individual colors by activating
the "Custom" checkbox and use the options available in the "Color Settings" section.
Legend Properties tab: The "Position" section will allow you to select where in the
Display area the legend box will be placed. The "Appearance" section will allow you to
customize the font styles, the number of tick marks and the number of significant digits to use
for the legend box.
Range Settings tab: By default, the highest and lowest result values will be used as the
maximum and minimum values for the legend box. The intermediate values will be evenly
spaced between these. By deactivating the "Automatically calculate value range"
checkbox in the "Current Range" section, you can enter specific values for the maximum
and minimum values in the legend box. The "Threshold" section can be used to highlight
only areas of the model above or below a specific value.
Vector Plots tab: The options in this tab are used to control the size of the arrows used when
a result is displayed as a vector plot. This will show the direction of the results at each node.
Probe Settings tab: This tab will allow you to control the font of the text in probes and to
control how the probe appears with respect to the rest of the model.
3/15/2010
75

Customizing the Model in the Display area
The display of the model is also an important component to the presentation. By default, the
model is displayed with the mesh. Sometimes, displaying the model without the mesh will
result in an image that is more easily interpreted. The display of the model can be controlled
by accessing the VIEW pull-down menu and selecting the "Display" pull-out menu. The
"Shaded with Features" command will shade the entire model but will only display the
feature lines. This will result in an outline of the model with the result contour shading. The
"Shaded" command will only shade the model; no lines will be displayed.
Another important feature is the orientation of the model. You can orient the model in any
manner using the commands in the VIEW pull-down menu. Once you have an acceptable
view, you can save this view to be easily accessed in the future. This can be done by
accessing the VIEW pull-down menu and selecting the "User-Defined Views" command.
The dialog shown in Figure 3.6 will appear.
Figure 3.6: User-Defined Views Dialog

To save the current view you must give it a new name. First, click on the "<Current View>"
item in the "Description" field. The "Rename" button will become available. Press the
"Rename" button. Type in a descriptive name, press the <Enter> key, and press the "OK"
button to exit the dialog. The saved views will be available for this model within either the
FEA Editor or the Results environments.
To restore a previously defined view, select the desired view name and click on the "Apply
View" button.
If you want to update a previously defined view to match the current viewpoint, select the
view name in the "Description" field that is to be redefined and then press the "Save View"
button. The current view will overwrite the definition of the selected view name.
76
3/15/2010
Image File Creation

In the Results environment, images of the results from the analysis can be saved in standard
image formats. Once the display area is set to the desired settings, access the FILE pull-down
menu and select the "Export" pull-out menu and then the "Image" command. You can
toolbar button in the "General Options" toolbar. The mouse cursor will
also press the
have the image of a camera. You can use the mouse to select a rectangle enclosing the part of
the display area that you want to be saved to the image file. If you want to save the entire
display area, press the <Enter> key. The dialog shown in Figure 3.7 will appear.
Figure 3.7: Save Image as Dialog

Enter a name for the image file in the "File name:" field. Select the picture format that you
want the image saved as in the "Save as type:" drop-down box. Select the size of the image
in the "Image attributes" section. When the settings are acceptable, press the "Save"
button.
3/15/2010
77
Animating FEA Results

An animation of the displaced shape of a static stress analysis can be created and viewed in
the Results environment using the ANIMATION pull-down menu. The parameters can be set
up using the "Animation: Setup" command. The dialog shown in Figure 3.8 will appear.
Figure 3.8: Animation Settings Dialog

In the "Frame Rate Control" section, you can press the appropriate button to have the
animation created to your specifications. If you press the button next to "Creates an
Animation that runs from no displacement to current displacement", an animation will
be created starting from the undisplaced shape and will progress in even steps to the current
displacement shown in the display area. If you press the button next to "Creates a looping
animation that runs from no displacement to current displacement and back to none
again", an animation will be created starting from the undisplaced shape and will progress in
even steps to the current displacement shown in the display area and then will return to the
undisplaced shape, again in even steps. If you press the button next to "Creates a sinusoidal
animation that cycles between positive and negatively scaled current displacements", an
animation will be created starting from the undisplaced shape and will progress in even steps
to the current displacement shown in the display area. The animation will then proceed to the
same scaled displacement but in the opposite direction of that in the display area.
Specify the number of frames that you want to be used in the animation in the "Number Of
Frames To Generate" field. The deflections will be divided evenly into this many divisions.
If you have a results contour on the model, you can have the values change during the
animation by activating the "Animate Results" checkbox. If this checkbox is activated, the
results will be evenly scaled throughout the animation.
Once the settings are acceptable, press the "OK" button. Use the "Animation: Start
Animation" command to generate the animation. The animation will play in the display
area. You can use any dynamic viewing commands as the animation is playing.
You can save the animation that is currently playing to an AVI file using the "Animation:
Save As AVI" command.
78
3/15/2010
Using the Configure Report Utility

Access the TOOLS pull-down menu and select the "Report" command to move into the Report
environment. The Report environment will allow you to easily create HTML reports that
include all of the input parameters and analysis results as well as user-defined content. A
"Master Report" and a report for each individual FEA design scenario will be created. Any
images or animations that were created may be included in the reports. In addition, an image
from each currently loaded results presentation will automatically be captured and added to the
design scenario reports. These automatic presentation images may be deactivated if desired.
Right-click on either the "Master Report" heading or the "HTML Report" heading in the tree
view and select the "Configure Report" command. The "Configure Report" dialog will
appear. You may also access the utility by choosing the ACTIONS pull-down menu and then
the "Configure Report" command or by clicking on the configure report toolbar button.
The tree on the left side of the dialog lists all of the predefined sections of the report.
Selecting a given heading (by clicking on the heading itself and not the associated checkbox),
accesses the editing screen for that topic. If there are no editable items associated with the
topic, a message in the right frame will indicate that the item "can be re-ordered but not
edited." To re-order the report, simply click and drag one of the headings to a different
vertical position within the tree list. If an item is not checked, no message or editing screen
will appear when the heading is selected and the topic will be excluded from the HTML
report. The inclusion/exclusion state of each item may be toggled by simply clicking on the
appropriate checkboxes.
Some of the editing screens contain self-explanatory fields for entering data, such as the
author's name and department. Other screens, like the one used for entering the "Project
Name" or the "Executive Summary," have a built in word processor that supports a number
or fonts, styles, tabs, numbered or bullet lists, text frames, imbedded images, and tables.
Placeholder text or labels within these dialogs can be selected and overwritten with the
author's desired text.
Page breaks can be added ahead of any section by right-clicking on a heading and choosing
the "Add Page Break" command. Also within the right-click, context menu (and the TREE
pull-down menu) are commands to add sections to the report for including user-defined
images, animations, *.HFS or *.WRL files (virtual reality images that can be rotated, panned,
and zoomed), and/or additional text sections. You may also rename or delete report sections.
Changes to the report may be saved by accessing the DOCUMENT pull-down menu and
choosing the "Save Edits" command. This menu is only visible when an editable section of
the report is currently selected. When finished, choose the Generate Report command from
the same menu or press the "Generate Report" button.
The HTML report will automatically appear within the Report environment. In the directory
on the computer where the FEA model is located there will be a filename.ds_data folder.
Within this folder there will be numbered subfolders, one for each design scenario that exists
within the subject model. There will also be a "Master Report" subfolder that contains all of
the HTML master report files and attachments. Within each numbered design scenario folder
there will be a "ds_rpt" subfolder. This folder contains all of the files and attachments for the
subject design scenario's HTML report. These "ds_rpt" folders can be zipped up and sent to
other persons for review. The recipient need not have the simulation software installed on
their computer to view the report. It will be displayed via the default web browser.
3/15/2010
79
80
3/15/2010
Exercise B
Yoke Evaluation of Results and Generation of a Report
Brick Elements
Concepts that will be Illustrated:
Applying a surface variable load

Creating a local coordinate system
Reviewing reaction forces
Creating a path plot
Objective:
Knowing what we have learned in the last two chapters, we will refine our analysis of the
yoke that was performed in Chapter 1. Review the reaction forces. Generate a report that
includes an image of the von Mises stress contour, an animation of the deflections, and a
path plot of the stresses along one of the straight edges at the top of the slot.
Geometry:
Use the file Exercise B.step in the "Exercise B\Input File" folder of the class directory or
in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer. Use the default mesh settings.
Loading:
Use a surface variable load to apply the 800 lbf to the left half of the hole. The load should
have a magnitude of 0 at the ends of the diameter and should have a parabolic profile.
Constraints:
Only constrain the radial and axial translation at the small hole. The tangential direction
is free. Constrain only the half that is expected to have a reaction.
Element:
Brick
Materials:
Steel (ASTM-A36)
Questions:
Are the specified constraints adequate for a statically stable model? If not, what can be
done to achieve this?
How do these results compare to the results of the Chapter 1 example?
If the loads are developed by pins or shafts passing through the holes, which result is
more realistic?
Do the support reactions sum to 800 lbf?
3/15/2010
81
Results:
(psi)
Maximum deflection
(in)
2,074
0.00044
A completed archive of this model (Exercise B.ach) is available in the "Exercise B\Results
Archive" folder in the class directory or in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer.
Derivation of the Pressure vs. Position Function

In order to calculate the equation, we must first determine the projected area over which the
pressure will be applied. For the yoke, it will be over the diameter of the hole, which is from
y = -1 to y = 1. The product of the area under the pressure curve and the depth of the yoke must
equal the desired 800 lbf. The equation for a parabola with the dimensions shown below is:
A=
4ah
3
For the yoke, a = 1 and h = Pmax. The depth of the yoke where the load is applied is 1.5 in.
Therefore we can solve for Pmax using the equation
4 in * 1 * Pmax
* 1.5 in
3
= 400 psi
800 lbf =
Pmax
The equation of the parabola will take some form of
P = ey 2 + by + c
We know three points on the parabola: P = 400, y = 0; P = 0, y = -1; P = 0, y = 1.
Using these we can calculate that e = -400, b = 0, c = 400.
Therefore the equation is: P = -400y2 + 400
82
3/15/2010
Chapter
Midplane Meshing and Plate Elements

Chapter Objectives
Learn how to create midplane meshes of thin parts

Learn when to use plate elements
Learn how to use element normal points to properly orient pressure loads on plate elements
Learn how to evaluate results that are specific to plate elements
Meshing Options
When importing solid models that have thin parts, it is often better and simpler to analyze
them using plate elements. Autodesk Algor Simulation can be used to convert thin CAD
solid models to plate elements. A plate element is drawn at the midplane of the part. Entire
assemblies or individual parts in assemblies can be converted to plate elements. An assembly
where plate elements can be used for one of the parts is shown in Figure 4.1. This model is a
manifold connected to two flanges. The manifold can be modeled with plate elements and the
flanges with brick elements. This model, Manifold Assembly.step, is located in the
"Chapter 4 Example Model\Input File" folder in the class directory or in the copy of the
solutions folders on your computer. We will use an absolute mesh size of 0.75" for all parts.
Figure 4.1: Assembly to be Modeled Partly with Plate Elements
3/15/2010
83
Chapter 4: Midplane Meshing and Plate Elements

Simulation"

"Open"

"Manifold Assembly.step"
"Open"
"Mesh: Model Mesh

Settings"
A "Select Length Units" dialog will appear. Choose "Use

STEP file units" from the pull-down menu and click the
"OK" button.
"OK" button.
Options
Press the "Options" button.
Mouse
"Absolute mesh size"
0.75
Access the "Type" pull-down menu and select the

"Absolute mesh size" option.
"OK"
Press the "OK" button to exit the options dialog.
"OK"
Press the "OK" button to exit the model mesh settings dialog.

"OK"
"OK"
Enter "0.75" in the "Size" field.
Right-click on the "CAD Mesh Options" heading for

Part 1 in the tree view.
Select the "Part" command. We will now be able to
specify the mesh settings for only the manifold.
Mouse
"Part"
"Midplane"
Select the "Midplane" radio button.
"Options"
Mouse
0.75
Access the "Type" pull-down menu and select the

"Midplane"
84

Select the file "Manifold Assembly.step " in the
"Chapter 4 Example Models\Input File" directory.
Enter "0.75" in the "Size" field.

Select the "Midplane" icon. The dialog shown in Figure 4.2
will appear with the options specific to a midplane mesh. We
do not need to change any of the default options but they are
discussed below the figure.
3/15/2010
Figure 4.2: Part Mesh Settings Dialog with the Midplane Icon Active
Thickness control section
User-specified maximum thickness: By default the midplane mesh process will
search for surface pairs that are within an automatically calculated or a user-specified
distance from each other. We will call this distance the maximum thickness. When
these outer surface pairs are found, the location of the midplane of the region is
determined and the mesh is placed at this location.
The program default is to use the automatically calculated maximum thickness,
which is determined as a function of the initial surface mesh. If this maximum
thickness value is smaller than the part thickness at any region, that region will be
missing from the resultant midplane mesh. In such cases, you can enable the "Userspecified maximum thickness" option and enter a value greater than the maximum
thickness of the part or parts to be midplane meshed. This option may also be used
to intentionally exclude thicker regions of a part from the midplane mesh.
Maximum allowed thickness variation: If this checkbox is activated, the midplane
mesh process will only convert the mesh on a part to a midplane if the difference
between the maximum thickness and the minimum thickness in the part is less than
the value specified in this field.
Use junction method: If this checkbox is activated, a chordal axis transform (CAT) algorithm
will be used to generate the midplane mesh. This may result in a better approximation of the
midplane for models containing complex geometries such as junctions and intersections.
"OK"
"OK"
"Mesh: Generate Mesh"
Press the "OK" button to accept the default settings and to

close the mesh options dialog.
Press the "OK" button to accept these parameters for the
manifold part and to close the mesh settings dialog.
Access the MESH pull-down menu and select the
"Generate Mesh" command.
3/15/2010
85

All three parts will be surface meshed. The midplane mesh engine will convert the surface
mesh into a midplane mesh for the manifold part. The flanges remain as solid objects.
Press the "Yes" button when asked to review the mesh
results. The "Model Statistics" table will show that one
part has been midplane meshed.
Press the "Part" button. This report will display the number
of plate elements and the thickness for the plate element part.
Use the "Part number" field to scroll through the other parts.
"Yes"
"Part"
"Close"
It can be seen that the manifold now has no thickness. You can also see that the nodes where
the manifold meets the flanges have been matched so that the loads will be transferred
between the parts. If mesh sizes between plate and solid parts are significantly different,
smart bonding may at times be used to connect the components without matching the nodal
locations. This is also dependent upon other mesh settings, such as the "Use virtual
imprinting" option that was previously discussed.
It is important to note that not all combinations of midplane and solid models are acceptable.
Figure 4.3 shows an acceptable configuration and an unacceptable configuration.
Figure 4.3: Midplane and Solid Combinations

The configuration on the left is acceptable because the midplane of the gusset will be in
contact with the top of the plate. The configuration on the right will not work because the
midplane of the plate will not be in contact with the bottom of the gusset. Therefore the nodes
on the parts will not be matched. The midplane mesh can be extended in the plane of the
elements at the edges in order to match the parts. The nodes cannot be stretched out of the
plane, nor can the node of the solid mesh be moved in order to match the parts.
Mouse
"Modify Element
Definition"
86
Right-click on the "Element Definition" heading for Part 1

in the tree view.
Select the "Modify Element Definition" command.
The dialog shown in Figure 4.4 will appear.
3/15/2010
Figure 4.4: Element Definition Dialog for Plate Elements

By default, unique thickness values will automatically be assigned to each individual plate
element within a midplane-meshed part. This can be verified by checking the model and
inquiring on the element information for selected plate elements within the Results environment.
If the "Use mid-plane mesh thickness" option is deactivated, the average thickness for the part
will be calculated and displayed in the thickness column. This thickness will then be applied to
all elements within the part. The user may also specify the thickness on a per-surface basis, if
desired. Choosing the "Surface-based" option from the "Properties" pull-down list will
expand the table to list each surface of the midplane-meshed part. The thickness, normal point
coordinates and other data can then be entered for each surface.
Mouse
Deactivate the "Use mid-plane mesh thickness" checkbox.

The average thickness calculated for the part will be
displayed in the "Thickness" column.
Mouse
Activate the "Use mid-plane mesh thickness" checkbox.
"OK"
"File: Save"
Access the FILE pull-down menu and choose the "Save"

command.
We will continue developing this example model later on in this chapter.
3/15/2010
87
Element Options
Plate Theory and Assumptions
Figure 4.5: Plate Theory

Figure 4.5 shows the DOFs associated with plate elements. Please take note that the out-ofplane rotation (Rz) is not taken into account because of the plate theory. Thus, plate elements
have 5 DOFs.
Limits of Plate Theory
No warpage is accounted for in the undeformed element

Stress through the thickness is not truly linear for thicker plates
The theory is based on a square element with 90-degree corners
NOTE: Violation of these limitations does not mean you will get wrong results. It simply
means that you should check your results.
Plate Formulations
1.
Veubeke (Standard)
2.
Reduced Shear
3.
Without the reduced shear integration terms

HTC plate bending theory is used (CLST)
Constant Strain
88
This uses the reduced shear integration

Hsieh, Clough and Tocher (HTC) plate bending theory is used (Constrained Linear
Strain Triangle, CLST)
Linear Strain
4.
This is the most accurate

This is very sensitive to warpage of the elements
HTC plate bending theory is used (CLST)
3/15/2010

Assumptions
The thickness is small relative to the overall length and width of the model
Small displacements and rotations
Plane sections remain planar
Linear stress distribution through the thickness
The plate element is initially flat; that is, all points are in the same plane
The out-of-plane rotations are negligible
Loading Options
The loading options for plate elements are almost identical to those for brick elements, as
discussed in Chapter 2. The only addition is the control for the orientation of normal surface
pressure, hydrostatic pressure, and surface force loads. For plate elements, this is controlled
by an element normal point. This is an arbitrary point in space defined in the "X
Coordinate", "Y Coordinate" and "Z Coordinate" fields in the "Element Normal"
section of the "Orientation" tab of the "Element Definition" dialog. A positive normal or
hydrostatic surface load or surface force will be applied normal to the face of each element
and will push against the side of the element that is facing the element normal point. A
negative normal or hydrostatic surface load or surface force will act in the opposite direction.
See Figure 4.6 for a visual explanation.
Figure 4.6: Element Normal Point

Hydrostatic Pressure Loads: One additional option for plate elements is that hydrostatic
pressure loads can be applied in any orientation. The model does not need to be oriented with
gravity acting in the -Y direction. The plane representing the surface of the fluid will be
defined by a point on the surface and a vector normal to the surface. The normal vector
should point into the fluid, that is, in the direction of increasing depth and gravity.
Example of Defining the Element Normal Point

To illustrate the use of the element normal point, we will continue using the manifold assembly
from the prior midplane meshing example. If this model is not currently loaded, reopen the file,
Manifold Assembly.fem, saved at the end of the midplane meshing example.
By default, the element normal point will be set to the global coordinate origin (0, 0, 0). We will
add a pressure load to all of Part 1 and see how the loads are oriented. We will then make
necessary corrections to the element normal point definitions and recheck the model.
3/15/2010
89

View"

View" command.
Mouse
Right-click on the Part 1 heading in the tree view.
"Select Subentities: Surfaces"
Choose the "Select Subentities" pull-out menu and select

the "Surfaces" command.
Mouse
"Add: Surface
Pressure/Tractions"
20
Select the "Add" pull-out menu and choose the "Surface

Pressure/Tractions" command.
"OK"
Enter "20" in the "Magnitude" field.
Before we can check the model, we will need to define the material for the plate and brick parts.
Mouse
"Steel (ASTM A36)"
Double-click on the "Material" heading under Part 1 in the

tree view.
Highlight "Steel (ASTM A36)" from the list of available
materials.
"OK"
Mouse
Select the "Material" heading under Part 2 in the tree view.
<Ctrl> Mouse
Holding the <Ctrl> key, also select the "Material" heading

under Part 3 in the tree view.
Mouse
Right-click on one of the selected headings.
"Modify Material"
Choose the "Modify Material" command.
"Steel (ASTM A36)"
Highlight "Steel (ASTM A36)" from the list of available

materials.
"OK"

"Check Model" command.
It will initially be difficult to tell whether the orientations are correct or not because some of
the load vectors will be rendered attached to the model at the arrow head end and some will
be attached at the tail end. We will make the vector orientations consistent so that critiquing
the model will be easier.
"Tools: Options"

"Options" command.
Mouse
Go to the "Results" tab within the Options dialog.
"Global FEA Objects

Preferences"
Press the "Global FEA Objects Preferences" button.
"All arrows point at point of

attachment"
"OK"
"OK"
90
Under the "Arrow Pointing" heading, activate the "All

arrows point at point of attachment" option for the
"Current" model (left radio button). You do not need to
change the default setting.
Press the "OK" button to close the Global FEA Objects
Preferences dialog.
Press the "OK" button to exit the Options dialog. The
model should now appear as shown in Figure 4.7.
3/15/2010
Figure 4.7: Pipe Model in FEA Editor Environment

Notice how the pressure is acting against the outside of half of each pipe leading out to the flanges.
Clearly, the origin is not a suitable location for the element normal point for these two surfaces. A
more intuitive location for these normal points would be somewhere along the centerline of each
pipe. This is already true for the middle pipe, since its axis passes through the coordinate origin.
There are two ways to correct the orientation:
1.
2.
Make each outlet pipe a unique part number by modifying the attributes of the lines
comprising them. Then, each outlet pipe can have a unique, part-based element normal point.
Specify surface-based element properties for Part 1. In this way, the surfaces comprising the
two outlet pipes may have unique element normal point definitions.
We will now demonstrate the latter approach. The centerlines of the two outlet pipes are at
Z = +/- 7.5" and lie in the XZ plane. You may identify the surface numbers of the outlet pipes by
selecting one surface at a time, right-clicking, and choosing the "Inquire" command. A pop-up
tool tip will identify the part and surface numbers. The half-surfaces comprising the +Z pipe are 5
and 14. The half-surfaces of the -Z pipe are 4 and 15.
"Tools: FEA Editor"
"Element Definition"
Access the TOOLS pull-down-menu and choose the "FEA

Editor" command.
Double-click the "Element Definition" heading under
Note that the "Properties" setting defaults to "Part-based." Therefore, the data entered into the
table will apply to the entire part. As an alternative, it is possible to change this setting to
"Surface-based," in which case each unique surface can have different properties.
3/15/2010
91

Access the pull-down menu in the "Properties" field and
choose the "Surface-based" option.
Enter "-7.5" in the "Normal Point (Z)" column for
Surface 4 and for Surface 15.
Enter "7.5" in the "Normal Point (Z)" column for
Surface 5 and for Surface 14.
Mouse
"Surface-based"
-7.5
7.5
"OK"
"View: Display: Features"

"Check Model" command. Notice that there are no longer
any inward pressure loads appearing on the outside of the
manifold.
Access the VIEW pull-down menu, select the "Display"
pull-out menu, and choose the "Features" command. This
will remove shading from the model display so that the
internal pressure vectors may be seen. The model will now
appear as shown in Figure 4.8.
Figure 4.8: Model in Results Environment

You can now see that the pressure is properly applied to all surfaces of the manifold.
A completed archive of this model (Manifold Assembly.ach) is available in the "Chapter 4
Example Model\Results Archive" folder in the class directory or in the copy of the solutions
92
3/15/2010
Result Options
When a plate element model is initially loaded into the Results environment, the midplane will be
displayed. The actual thickness of the plate elements can be shown by right-clicking on the
heading for a plate element part in the tree view and selecting the "3-D Visualization" command.
For result options that are specific to plate elements, access the RESULTS OPTIONS pulldown menu and select the "Plate Options" command. The "Plate Display Options"
dialog shown in Figure 4.9 will appear.
Figure 4.9: Plate Display Options Dialog

Bending/Membrane section:
Total Stress/Strain: If this radio button is selected, the total top/bottom stress or strain
will be displayed. The total stress consists of the axial stresses, shear stresses, and
bending stresses. The stresses are displayed on the visible side. The "Reverse Sides in
Plot" checkbox can be activated to view the stresses on the other side.
Bending Stress/Strain: If this radio button is selected, the bending stresses or strains
(SB11, SB22 and SB12) will be used for all stress calculations including von Mises,
Tresca, maximum principal and minimum principal stresses.
Membrane Stress/Strain: If this radio button is selected, the membrane stresses or strains
due to axial stress (SM11, SM22) and shear stress (SM12) are used for all stress calculations
including von Mises, Tresca, maximum principal and minimum principal stresses.
Two-Sided Display section
Both Sides: If this radio button is selected, the results of both the top and bottom sides
of the plates will be displayed. Therefore different contours will be displayed on the
opposite sides of the plate. If the "Reverse Sides in Plot" checkbox is activated, the top
and bottom sides will be reversed. This will allow you to view the results on the opposite
side of the plates without rotating the model.
3/15/2010
93

Top Side Only: If this radio button is selected, the results on the top side of the plate
will be displayed on both sides of the plate elements.
Bottom Side Only: If this radio button is selected, the results on the bottom side of the
plate will be displayed on both sides of the plate elements.
94
3/15/2010
Exercise C
Midplane Meshing and Plate Element Orientation
Plate Elements
Creating a midplane mesh

Modeling with plate elements
Properly defining plate element orientations
Applying pressures to plate elements
Objective:
Generate a plate model of the duct and nozzle assembly shown below, apply an internal
pressure throughout the assembly, and analyze it.
Geometry:
Use the file Exercise C.step from the "Exercise C\Input File" directory in the class
directory or in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer. Perform a midplane
mesh using an absolute mesh size of 0.2 inch for all parts.
Use the automatically calculated midplane mesh thickness for all parts.
3/15/2010
95
Loading:
20 psi internal pressure throughout assembly
Constraints:
Fully constrained at inlet and outlet edges (as shown on diagram)
Element:
Plate
Material:
Stainless Steel (AISI 302) Cold-rolled
Results:
(psi)
Maximum deflection
(in)
~37,210
0.0178
* * *
Hints:
The coordinate origin is in the exact center of the square header

The centerline of the rectangular inlet is at Z = 6.75"
The centerlines of the round outlets are at Y = +/- 4.5" and Z -5"
A completed archive of this model (Exercise C.ach) is available in the "Exercise C\Results Archive" folder
in the class directory or in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer.
96
3/15/2010
Chapter
Meshing
Chapter Objectives
Learn how to refine the mesh in specific areas of a model

Learn how to add joints to a model
Learn how to create bolted connections
Learn how to perform mesh convergence tests
Refinement Options
Automatic Refinement Points
For models that contain small features, it is often necessary to use a relatively fine mesh to adequately
capture the geometry. However, if the entire model is meshed at the fine mesh size, an unnecessarily large
number of elements will be created. Refinement points can be added to the model to create a fine mesh in a
local region and a coarser mesh for the rest of the model. There are two methods that can be used to create
refinement points.
Automatic
Once a surface mesh has been generated on the model, you can have refinement points
automatically applied to the model by accessing the MESH pull-down menu and selecting the
"Refinement Points" pull-out menu. Select the "Automatic" command.
The
"Automatic Refinement Points" dialog will appear.
This dialog will contain a
"Refinement" slider. You can move this slider to the "Coarse" or "Fine" setting to
determine the level of refinement that you want to achieve. When you press the "Generate"
button, the small features of the model will be identified and refinement points will be
created. When the number of refinement points created is reported, press the "Close" button.
You will now notice many black dots on the model. These symbolize the refinement points.
If you mesh the model again, the refinement points will be used. You can repeat this process
as many times as necessary.
Specify
If you want to create a refinement point with specific parameters at a specific point in the
model, you can access the MESH pull-down menu and select the "Refinement Points" pullout menu. Select the "Specify" command. This can be done before or after a mesh has
been generated. The "Refinement Point Browser" dialog shown in Figure 5.1 will appear.
To define a refinement point, press the "Add" button. The model must be meshed again
following the creation of refinement points in order for the refinement to take effect.
3/15/2010
97
Chapter 5: Meshing
Figure 5.1: Refinement Point Browser Dialog

X: Define the X coordinate of the refinement point in this column. If you selected a
vertex on the model, this column will already be defined.
Y: Define the Y coordinate of the refinement point in this column. If you selected a
Z: Define the Z coordinate of the refinement point in this column. If you selected a
Radius: Specify the radius, around the refinement point, within which you want the
refinement to occur. A spherical zone centered at the refinement point and having this
radius will be defined, though only a point will be displayed. The mesh lying within this
spherical zone will be refined.
Mode: This drop-down box has two options. The "Size" option will require you to
specify the mesh size desired within the spherical refinement zone. The "Divide" option
will require you to specify a divisor by which the mesh size within the refinement zone is
to be divided.
Mesh size: If the "Size" option is specified in the "Mode" column, define the mesh size
that will be applied within the specified spherical radius of the refinement point.
Divide factor: If the "Divide" option is specified in the "Mode" column, define the
divide factor that will be applied to the mesh size within the spherical radius of the
refinement point. The divisor may be a whole or a floating point number. For example, a
factor of 2.5 would result in a mesh size of 40% of the original size (L/2.5 = 0.4L).
If a mesh has already been generated, you can select a vertex or vertices on the model and
right-click in the display area and then select the "Add: Refinement Points"
command. This will access the "Create Refinement Point" dialog, which will allow
you to define the radius and either the mesh size or the divide factor. These options
correspond to the columns in the "Refinement Point Browser" dialog. If you rightclick and select the "Add: Refinement Point" command while no vertex is selected;
the X, Y, and Z coordinates may be typed into the provided data fields. This is an
alternative to using the Refinement Point Browser.
98
3/15/2010
Chapter 5: Meshing
Global Refinement Options

By pressing the "Options" button on the "Model Mesh Settings" dialog and selecting the
"Model" icon on the left, the dialog shown in Figure 5.2 will appear.
5.2: Model Mesh Settings Screen with the Model Icon Active
With the exception of the two items discussed below, the options within the "Model" section
of the mesh settings dialog are beyond the scope of this introductory level course. Please
consult the help files for further information. The appropriate help file section may be
accessed by pressing the "Help" button within the model mesh setting dialog.
Default meshing options:
Use automatic geometry-based mesh size function: By default, the mesh size is made
finer around curved features and in areas of localized close proximity of features (such as
where a hole or a corner is closely located to another edge of the same part). Beyond the
areas of geometry-based mesh size adjustment, a relatively larger mesh size is used. If
this option is disabled, the resultant mesh size will typically be smaller on average and
more uniform. The element count will also typically increase, though the mesh size at
curved features will generally be coarser.
Perform solid meshing at time of analysis: By default, solid meshing is postponed
until the first time a model is checked or analyzed. The mesh engine stops after
verification of the surface mesh integrity. This is advantageous since it is a waste of time
to solid mesh a model if you haven't yet approved the surface mesh. In other words, you
may want to make the mesh finer, coarser, or locally refined. By deactivating this option,
you will force the mesh engine to immediately proceed with solid meshing.
In order to see additional options within the dialog to be discussed next, deactivate the "Use
automatic geometry-based mesh size function" checkbox. We can restore the setting later, if desired.
Select the "Surface" icon at the top left corner of the Model Mesh Settings Screen (Options
dialog). This is the icon that will be selected by default when you first press the "Options"
button on the "Model Mesh Settings" dialog. Selecting the "Options" tab within this
screen will bring up the dialog shown in Figure 5.3.
3/15/2010
99
Chapter 5: Meshing
5.3: Options Tab of the Model Mesh Settings Screen with the Surface Icon Active
NOTE: The fields within the Surface settings "Options" tab will not appear unless the Model
option, "Use automatic geometry-based mesh size function" is disabled (see
previous page). Instead, the following message will appear
"Automatic surface mesh refinement is in effect from the model-level setting's
"General" tab on the "Model Mesh Settings" dialog. Surface meshing options are not
available when this is in effect."
Edge curve refinement section:
Mode: The options in this drop-down box allow you to control how elements are created
along the curves of a model. With the exception of the "None" option, which performs
no edge curve refinement, all of the options use the value in the "Angle (1-90 degrees)"
field to place elements along the curves. The default option of "Curvature of edge
curve" will use the Angle value as the average angle between the elements along the
edge only. The restriction is not imposed for the elements along the adjacent curved
surface. This is often adequate. The "Minimum adjacent surface curvature" option
will use the Angle value as the minimum angle between two surface elements (i.e. the
restriction is not limited to the edge curve). This will normally result in a greater number
of elements than the "Curvature of edge curve" option but fewer than the fourth option.
The "Maximum adjacent surface curvature" option will use the Angle value as the
largest allowable angle between two elements. This will usually result in larger numbers
of elements along curved surfaces.
Splitting quadrangles into triangles section:
The options in this section will allow you to control the quality of the elements formed in
your surface mesh. In a quadrilateral element, it is possible for one node to not lie in the
plane defined by the remaining three nodes (let's call this Plane 1). The off-plane node and
the two nearest nodes form another plane (we'll call this one Plane 2) that is not parallel to
Plane 1. If the angle between these two planes is greater than the value specified in the
"Fold angle is greater than" field, the quadrilateral element will be split into two
triangular elements. Triangular elements, by definition, are planar. If the internal angle
between two sides of an element is larger than the value in the "Node angle is greater
than" field, that element will be split into two triangular elements. These options will
result in the creation of better solid elements by the solid mesh engine.
100
3/15/2010
Chapter 5: Meshing
Creating Joints
A convenient method that can be used to create beam or truss geometry to simulate pin joints
is the joint utility. This is only available for models originating from CAD solid models.
First, select all of the surfaces that you want included in the joint. You can either click on the
surfaces on the model (be sure to hold down the <Ctrl> key to select multiple surfaces) or
select the headings for those surfaces in the tree view (again be sure to hold down the <Ctrl>
key to select multiple surfaces). You must have the "Selection: Shape: Point" and
"Selection: Select: Surfaces" options active in order to select surfaces by clicking on them
in the model.
To create a joint, access the MESH pull-down menu and select the "Create Joint"
command. The "Create Joint" dialog shown in Figure 5.4 will appear to allow you to enter
the specifications for this joint.
Figure 5.4: Create Joint Dialog

If surfaces were selected in the display area when the command was selected, they will be
listed in the "Participating surfaces" section. Surfaces can be added to this section by
selecting them in the display area and pressing the "Add" button.
Joint type: Select the type of joint that you want to create in this drop-down box.
Pin joint (lines to axis endpoints): This option will create a classic pin joint where the
nodes at each end of the surfaces included in the joint are connected to the opposite end
of the joint axis. This type of joint will allow the model to rotate around the axis.
Universal joint (lines to axis midpoint): This option will create a classic universal joint.
The nodes at either end of the model will be connected to the midpoint of the axis. This
type of joint will allow the model to rotate about the axis as well as swivel about the
center point of the axis.
Each type of joint is shown in Table 5.1
3/15/2010
101
Chapter 5: Meshing
Table 5.1: Joint Types Pin Joint versus Universal Joint

Pin Joint
Universal Joint
(two points on
axis of rotation)
(single point
at center)
Automatic detection of axis/center-point: If you want the joint creator to decide where the
axis of rotation will be, based on the geometry of the surfaces involved in the joint, select this
radio button.
Manual axis/center-point specification: If you want to specify the axis of rotation, select
this radio button and then enter the X, Y and Z coordinates. If your joint is a pin joint, you
will have to enter the coordinates for the two end points of the axis. If your joint is a
universal joint, you will have to enter the coordinate for the center point.
When you press the "Mesh model" button in the "Model Mesh Settings" dialog, the surface
mesh will be created as usual and then the joint application program will create the lines that
will be the truss or beam elements. These lines will be placed in the next part available in
numerical order. If you defined multiple joints, each joint will be placed in its own part.
102
3/15/2010
Chapter 5: Meshing
Creating Bolts
A convenient method that can be used to model screws, rivets, and bolted connections using beam
and truss elements is the bolt wizard. Like the joint utility, this tool is only available for FEA
models originating from CAD solid models. To create a bolted connection, access the MESH pulldown menu and select the "Create Bolt" command. The "Generate Bolted Connection"
dialog shown in Figure 5.5 will appear to allow you to enter the necessary specifications.
Figure 5.5: Create Bolted Connection Dialog

The "Part Number" field will default to the first available non-CAD number. You may change
the target part number if desired. Bolts with differing parameters should be created using unique
part numbers. Bolts with identical parameters may be defined using a common part number.
A pull-down list is provided for the selection of the "Type of Bolt." Table 5.2 describes the
three available types. For simplicity, the type of fastener will be called a "bolt" although the
approach can represent any similar fastener. The top row of figures shows the physical joint.
The bottom row shows the FEA equivalent construction; where the heavy line segments
represent the beam elements created by the bolt wizard:
3/15/2010
103
Chapter 5: Meshing
Table 5.2: Type of Bolts Created by the Generate Bolted Connection Dialog
"Bolt With Nut"
"Bolt Without Nut"
"Grounded Bolt"
The bolt is threaded (tight fit)

into the bottom part (extra
beam elements connect the
fastener to the hole).
The bolt is threaded into the

foundation or other rigid
item that is not modeled. A
boundary condition is placed
on the end of the bolt.
Enter, within the provided fields, the desired "Bolt Diameter," "Head Diameter," "Nut
Diameter," and the "Number of Spokes" to be used to represent the head and nut. Assign
the appropriate head contact, nut contact and bolt hole surfaces using the "Add" buttons after
having selected each set of surfaces. Surfaces can be removed from any of the three lists by
pressing the "Remove" buttons. For each surface added to the interior hole surface(s) list,
there will be a checkbox labeled "Tight Fit." Check this box for surfaces where the fastener
is to be tightly fit (such as for tapped holes, body-bound bolts, expanded rivets, etc.).
Additional beam elements will be introduced as shown in the middle figure above.
To preload the bolt, select either the "Axial Force" or "Torque" radio button. If a torque is
entered, it will be converted to an axial force based on one of the following equations:
With a nut:
Without a nut:
F=
F=
T
K *D
T
1.2 * K * D
where T is the torque magnitude, K is the friction factor, and D is the bolt diameter.
104
3/15/2010
Chapter 5: Meshing
At the outer end of each spoke that represents a bolt head or nut, a construction vertex will be
created. If the model has been meshed prior to the definition of the bolts, it will have to be
remeshed. During meshing of the adjacent CAD parts, element nodes will be created at these
construction vertices to ensure proper connectivity of the CAD and bolt wizard parts.
Mesh Convergence Testing

As mentioned previously, the stress results will depend on the density of the mesh. It is
therefore recommended that you perform an analysis with a few different mesh sizes to see
the effect on the results. Once you change the mesh size to a smaller value and the results do
not change significantly, the results should be accurate. The Results environment has a tool
that can assist in this process. Access the RESULTS menu and select the "Precision of von
Mises Stress" command. The model will be displayed with the precision contour. The
values in the legend box will vary from a minimum of 0.0 to a maximum of 0.5.
Stress is calculated at each node in each element. Thus, multiple elements that meet at a
common node provide independent stress calculations at that node. The Results environment
normally displays the average of these independent stresses. For example,
Figure 5.6: Precision Example

Element
Number
1
2
3
4
Node
Number
5
5
5
5
von Mises
Stress
20,000
15,000
19,000
10,000
Average (smoothed) Stress = 16,000

Highest von Mises in model = 25,000 (node 9)
Precision =
(max stress @ node min stress @ node)/2

Max stress in model
Precision =
(20,000 - 10,000)/2
= 0.20
25,000
Note that the precision values will range between 0 (best) and 0.5 (worst).
3/15/2010
105
Chapter 5: Meshing
The precision result is a plus or minus fraction of the largest stress in the model. Consider the
preceding example. At the subject node, there is a stress value variation of 10,000 (or +/5,000 relative to the median stress). A range of +/- 5,000 is +/- 20 percent of 25,000 (the
highest stress in the model). Hence, the precision result of 0.2 indicates that the stress
variability at that node is +/- 20 percent of the maximum stress.
It can also be helpful to look at a color contour plot showing the actual range of stress
variation at a node. This can be done by selecting the "Results Options: Smoothing
Options" command. Select the "Range" option in the "Smoothing function:" dropdown. Do this while viewing a stress result (such as von Mises, one of the Principal stresses,
or one of the Stress Tensors), not while viewing the Precision of von Mises Stress result.
Performing a Mesh Study

A mesh study wizard is included with the Autodesk Algor Simulation product. This
wizard automates the process of checking multiple mesh sizes to achieve good convergence of
the stress results. Automated mesh studies may be performed only for CAD-based models
and for the analysis type "Static Stress with Linear Material Models." To access this feature,
go to the command "Mesh Study Wizard," found within the "Tools" subfolder of the Start
menu's Autodesk Algor Simulation program group.
For more information regarding how to set up and run a mesh study, go to the "Contents" section
of the program help files, accessible from HELP pull-down menu. Expand the top-level "Algor
Simulation" branch, if it is not already expanded. Then, expand the "Meshing Overview"
branch and the "Mesh Overview" sub-branch in the tree view. Next, expand the "Meshing CAD
Solid Models" sub-branch. Finally, select the topic "Performing a Mesh Study."
106
3/15/2010
Chapter 5: Meshing
Exercise D
Yoke and Clevis Assembly
Brick Elements
Using refinement points

Adding a joint to a model
Using the Bolt Wizard to create a bolted connection
Objective:
If you review the results of the yoke analysis performed in Chapter 1, you will notice that
the stress results are not perfectly symmetrical, as would be expected. Perform the
analysis again using the refinement options. Also, add a pin joint to the large hole and
specify a bolted connection at the small hole. Apply the load to the center of the joint.
Geometry:
Use the file Exercise D.step in the "Exercise D\Input File" folder of the class directory or
in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer.
Meshing:
After meshing initially using a mesh size setting of 85 percent, apply refinement points
using the "Refinement Points: Automatic" command. Adjust the slider towards the right
until approximately 45 refinement points are created. Then, regenerate the surface mesh.
Create the pin joint and the bolt after the refined mesh has been finalized. Regenerate the
mesh one more time after specifying the bolt so that the head and nut will be properly
connected to the sides of the clevis.
Loading:
800 lbf total (400 lbf per node) in the X direction at the center of the pin joint in the
large hole.
3/15/2010
107
Chapter 5: Meshing
Constraints:
Fully constrain the four edges of the clevis base. This will simulate the behavior of a full
perimeter weld. Do not fix the entire base surface.
Constrain Ty at the center of the large hole's joint. This will prevent rotation of the yoke
about the center of the small hole and ensure symmetrical behavior of the top and bottom
halves of the yoke.
Element:
Brick (Yoke), Beam (Bolt), and Truss (Joint, 0.1 in2 cross-sectional area)
Material:
Steel (ASTM-A36) Yoke and Clevis

Steel (AISI 4130) Joint and Bolt
Bolt
Specifications: Bolt Diameter = 0.75"
Head and Nut Diameter = 1.125"
Number of Spokes = 12
Specify a "Tight Fit" for all bolt hole surfaces
Axial Force (Preload) = 500 lbf
Results:
Description
Maximum
von Mises Stress
(psi)
Maximum
Displacement
(in)
Yoke (Part 1)
~1,624
0.000588
Clevis (Part 2)
~2,306
0.000149
A completed archive with results (Exercise D.ach) is located in the "Exercise D\Results Archive" folder in
the class directory or in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer.
108
3/15/2010
Chapter
Introduction to Contact
Chapter Objectives
Learn the types of contact available

Learn how to use contact in an analysis
Uses for Contact

Often in assemblies, some parts are not in bonded contact with adjacent parts. For example,
the mating surfaces of two parts that are bolted together are not bonded. These surfaces are in
contact and would be free to slide relative to each other or to separate from each other except
as constrained by the bolts. If the meshes on both parts were to be bonded, the analysis might
not represent the correct conditions or behavior of the assembly. Another example would be a
shaft in a hole. When a load is applied to the shaft, it will cause the shaft to bear on only one
side of the hole. As the hole and shaft deform, the surfaces on the unloaded side will typically
slide or separate somewhat. Contact is also necessary to properly model interference fits,
which occur when an inner part undergoes expansion within an outer part or when the outer
part experiences shrinkage.
Contact Options
Setting up Contact Pairs
Autodesk Algor Simulation has the ability to model contact between parts. This can be
set up before or after creating the mesh. First, you must specify the 2 surfaces or parts that
will be involved in each contact pair. Select these surfaces or parts either in the tree view or
in the display area. Once a pair is selected, right-click and select the "Contact" pull-out
menu. Select the command for the type of contact desired, as explained below. A new
heading will appear under the "Contact (Default: Bonded)" heading in the tree view listing
the surfaces involved in this pair. Any number of contact pairs may be added. You may also
change the default contact setting by right-clicking on the "Contact (Default: Bonded)"
heading and selecting the desired type of contact globally. Any individual contact pairs that
are defined will override the global default setting for those particular pairs. The default
setting should represent the most prevalent type of contact that exists within the assembly in
order to minimize the number of overrides that must be defined. When the default setting is
changed, a detailed list of all of the detected contact pairs within the assembly will
automatically be generated and will appear beneath the "Contact (Default: )" heading.
Contact pair definitions can automatically be generated for all contacting surfaces between
two or more parts. To use this feature, select two or more parts, right-click and choose the
"Create Contact Between Parts" command. In addition, there is a global parameter that
3/15/2010
109
Chapter 6: Introduction to Contact

can be found by clicking the "Global CAD Import Options" button within the "Tools:
Options: CAD Import" dialog. To make generation of all contact pairs fully automatic
whenever importing a CAD model, activate the "Yes" radio button to the right of
"Automatically generate contact pairs:" heading.
Types of Contact
There are five types of contact available for a Static Stress with Linear Material Models
analysis. When the nodes lying along two contact surfaces are within the distance specified
via the "Tolerance value" field under the "Mesh matching" heading in the "Model Mesh
Settings: Options: Model" dialog, the meshes will be matched. The contact pair behavior
will depend upon which type of contact is specified. When surfaces do not belong to an
explicitly defined contact pair, the contact will follow the settings in the "Contact (Default:
Bonded)" heading in the tree view.
NOTE: The default may be changed from Bonded to any other type of contact described
below by right-clicking on the heading and selecting the desired command.
All contact pairs that are explicitly defined by the user will appear in the tree view, identified
by a heading showing the type of contact and the part/surface numbers belonging to the pair.
The settings can be changed for each pair by right-clicking on the heading for that pair and
selecting the desired command.
Bonded
If the "Bonded" command is selected, an attempt will be made to match the nodes on the two
surfaces of the contact pair. When matched and bonded, the two surfaces will be in perfect
contact throughout the analysis. When a node on one surface deflects, the node on the
adjoining surface will deflect the same amount and in the same direction. In fact, as far as the
processor is concerned, only one node exists at each point where the mesh vertices meet.
If the two surfaces are coincident but at least one pair of adjacent nodes are not within the
mesh matching tolerance, and, if "Smart bonded/welded contact" is enabled; then, the nodes
will be bonded using multipoint constraint equations (MPCs) rather than via mesh matching.
See Element Connectivity "Smart Bonding" (page 8) for additional information regarding
this feature.
Welded
If the "Welded" command is selected, an attempt will be made to match the nodes along the
edges of the contact surfaces. These nodes will act the same as if the "Bonded" command were
selected. The nodes along the interior of these surfaces will not be bonded. These nodes will be
free to move relative to each other, including the possibility of passing through each other.
In the same manner as for Bonded contact, MPCs will be used to connect the edge nodes of a
Welded contact pair if "Smart bonded/welded contact" is enabled and at least one pair of nodes
falls outside of the mesh matching tolerance.
Free/No Contact
If the "Free/No Contact" command is selected, the nodes on the two surfaces in the contact
pair may or may not be matched, depending on the geometry and other mesh settings.
However, in any case, the nodes belonging to each part will not interact with each other and
will move independently.
110
3/15/2010

Surface Contact
If the "Surface Contact" command is selected, the nodes on the two surfaces in this contact
pair will be matched. The difference between this command and the "Bonded" command is
that these nodes will be free to move away from each other. If the nodes move towards each
other, a stiffness will be applied to resist this movement. Imagine a very small line created
between the nodes on these surfaces. If that line becomes longer during the analysis, it will have
no effect on the model. If that line becomes shorter, it will act as a spring with a stiffness value
that will resist this motion. If the "Surface Contact" command is selected, the analysis will
involve an iterative process. This process will be used to determine if the deflection due to the
loading will cause each pair of nodes on these surfaces to be in contact or not.
Edge Contact
If the "Edge Contact" command is selected, the nodes along the edges of the contact
surfaces will be matched. These nodes will act the same as if the "Surface Contact"
command were selected. The nodes along the interior of these surfaces will not be matched
together. These nodes will be free to move relative to the nodes on the other surface. Even if
the physical locations of the interior surface nodes happen to be coincident, they will still
function independently. If the nodes along the edges move towards each other, a stiffness will
be applied to resist this movement. Imagine a very small line created between the nodes on
these edges. If that line becomes longer during the analysis, it will have no effect on the
model. If that line becomes shorter, it will act as a spring with a stiffness value that will resist
this motion. If the "Edge Contact" command is selected, the analysis will involve an
iterative process. This process will be used to determine if the deflection due to the loading
will cause each pair of nodes on these surfaces to be in contact or not.
Friction
If either the "Surface Contact" or "Edge Contact" option is selected for a contact pair, then
friction may be included if desired. Right-click on a contact pair heading or on the "Contact
(Default)" heading and choose the "Settings" command. A "Contact Options" dialog will
appear. If the contact type is "Surface Contact," then the dialog shown in Figure 6.1 will appear.
Figure 6.1: Contact Options Dialog for Surface Contact Pairs

If the contact type is "Edge Contact," then the dialog shown in Figure 6.2 will appear.
3/15/2010
111
Figure 6.2: Contact Options Dialog for Edge Contact Pairs

Include friction: If this checkbox is active, you will be able to specify a static friction
coefficient in the "Static friction coefficient" field. This value will affect how much force is
necessary to cause the two surfaces to move relative to each other when a contact reaction is
present. Friction occurs for movement perpendicular to the direction of contact and is zero
where the contact force is zero. The larger the coefficient, the larger the necessary force to
cause movement between the surfaces.
Surface Contact Direction

Refer once again to the "Contact Options" dialog for surface contact pairs (preceding
Figure 6.1). For surface contact pairs, the default option for determining the contact direction
is "Calculate by matching directions." This option will calculate the contact direction by
averaging the individual normal directions of the element faces at each node. This is the
recommended method. If a meshed surface is curved, some of the element faces may not be
flat (that is, the fourth node may not be coplanar with the other three, resulting in face
warpage). This is especially true if the mesh is coarse. Also, if the mesh is imperfectly
matched (that is, not all of the nodes are snapped together within the contact region), then the
adjacent element faces will not be coincident. In such cases, the default method may produce
incompatible contact directions. Contact elements will only be created at nodes that are
matched and for which the calculated contact directions are within the specified tolerance
angle, which is 20 degrees by default. In order to achieve compatible directions, you can
increase the value in the "Direction tolerance angle" field.
Another situation that may lead to incompatible contact directions and dropped contact
elements is when two surfaces that are not parallel meet at one edge, such as when the edge of
an inclined cutting tool acts against a flat object. The element faces adjacent to the contact
line are not parallel for the two parts and the angle of the faces may differ considerably. If the
direction tolerance angle is increased sufficiently, the contact elements will be created and
will act along a direction that is the average of the normal vectors for the two surfaces
contacting at the edge. It may, however, be desirable to have the contact force act normal to
one of the parts. In such cases, choose either the "Normal to the first part/surface" or
"Normal to the second part/surface" option in the "Surface contact direction" drop-down
box. For example, if you want the contact reaction to act normal to the cutting tool and this is
the second part listed in the contact pair heading, then you would choose the "Normal to the
second part/surface" option. If gravity (that is, part weight) is the source of the contact force,
then choose the normal direction based on which surface has a normal vector that is closest to
the vertical direction (that is, closest to the direction of gravitational acceleration).
For the contact direction options, an explicitly defined contact pair is required, since there is
no specific order to the parts/surfaces when the contact type is "Default." These direction
options are not implemented for global surface contact.
112
3/15/2010
Contact Example
How to Model Shrink Fits:
The type of connection used between the parts will define whether they are assumed to be
locked together due to friction or to slip in the plane of contact between the two parts. Choose
between the following two cases:
Case 1: If the two parts are assumed to be bonded together, shear forces will be developed at
the interface between the two parts as they cool. This is because cooled parts will contract in
both the radial and axial directions. However, they will not be permitted to freely contract at the
interface with the mating (that is, bonded) part. Bonding two parts together, when each is
experiencing different thermal expansion or contraction rates, may result in the development of
shear forces in excess of those that are physically possible. In reality, the shear force cannot
exceed the maximum available friction force (which is the normal contact force times the
friction coefficient). Use bonded contact when you do not expect axial slippage or are not
concerned about axial slippage nor the effect this has on the resultant stresses.
Case 2: If shear forces between the parts are expected to be great enough to cause axial
slippage, then surface contact should be used. If friction is not included, the shear force will
be zero and the objects will freely slide relative to each other, though normal contact forces
will still be developed due to the interference. To most accurately model the shrink fit,
include friction. The friction force will resist slippage, preventing it from occurring until the
shear force exceeds the available friction force. Even if slippage occurs, the friction force,
which is also the shear force, may affect the stress results.
Directions on how to model a shrink fit:
1.
Model as two different parts.
2.
Define a uniform temperature in the "Analysis Parameters" dialog in the

"Thermal\Electrical" tab.
3.
Apply a load case multiplier for the thermal effects in the "Load Case" tab of the
"Analysis Parameters" dialog.
4.
Define a thermal coefficient of expansion and the stress free reference temperature for
each part. The change in temperature (delta T) is the difference between the stress free
reference temperature and the default nodal temperature defined within the analysis
parameters screen. This delta T causes the part growth or shrinkage that produces the
interference. For a part to shrink, the stress free reference temperature needs to be higher
than the default nodal temperature. Setting the stress free reference temperature to be
lower than the default nodal temperature will cause the part to expand.
NOTE: You may also apply a part-based temperature to a part or apply temperature
results from a prior thermal analysis. Any applied or imported temperature will
override the default nodal temperature setting.
3/15/2010
113
Shrink Fit Example

The model shown in Figure 6.3 is a one-eighth symmetry model of a disk which will be
shrink fit onto a hub.
Figure 6.3: Cold Model Geometry
114
1.
First model the disk in the heated-up configuration using the equations to adjust the
dimensions. Note that at this point the interference can be a perfect zero or can be chosen
to include a "gap" between the parts. A gap should only be included if the contact (gap)
elements will be created manually.
2.
Define a stress free reference temperature for the disk (outer part) so that the assigned
default nodal temperature will cause the disk to contract.
3.
The stress free reference temperature of the hub (inner part) and the default nodal
temperature should be the same. Therefore, the hub will not move due to thermal effects.
3/15/2010
Controlling Equations:
dT = Tref Tdefault = [Radial Interference / (Ri + Radial Interference)] /
Ro' = Ro / (1- *dT)
Ri' = Ri / (1- *dT)
t' = t / (1- *dT)
where:
Tref is the stress free reference temperature
Tdefault is the default temperature assigned to the parts (basis of FEA solution)
is the coefficient of expansion of the disk
Ri, Ro and t are the cold dimensions of the disk
Ri', Ro' and t' are the hot dimensions of the disk
The inner part is drawn with the cold dimensions because it will experience no thermal expansion.
The outer part is drawn with the hot dimensions. Then the thermal expansion will contract the outer
part and create the interference.
Given:
= 6.5e-6
Ri = 2.997"
Ro = 10.000"
t = 2.000"
Radial Interference = 0.003" (= 0.006" Diametral Interference)
Tdefault = 0 F
Hot Disk Geometry:
Case 1
Case 2
Tref (F)
Ro' (inch)
t' (inch)
Ri' (inch)
153.85 F
10.010"
2.002"
3.000"
153.85 F
10.010"
2.002"
3.000"
Model Setup:
Case 1
Case 2
Elements
E (psi)
alpha (1/F)
Tref (F)
Tref (F)
Tdefault (F)
Load case
Friction
Brick
30e6 psi
0.3
10e-6
153.85 F for outer ring
0 F for inner ring
0 F
turn on thermal effect
Bonded surfaces
Brick
30e6 psi
0.3
10e-6
153.85 F for outer ring
0 F for inner ring
0 F
turn on thermal effect
0.3
3/15/2010
115
Figure 6.4: Heated Model Geometry

For this example, we will use the CAD solid model file Shrink.stp located in the "Chapter 6
Example Model\Input File" directory in the class directory or in the copy of the solutions
Case 1
Simulation"

"Open"

"Shrink.stp"
"Open"
"OK"
"OK"
Mouse
"Part"
Mouse
"40%"
Choose the option to "Use STEP file units" if it is not

already selected and click the "OK" button. The original
STEP file length unit is inches.
"OK" button.
Right-click on the "CAD Mesh Options" heading under
Part 2 in the tree view and select the "Part" command.
Move the "Mesh size" slider to the right to decrease the
size to "40%" for this part only.
"OK"
"No"
116
Select the " STEP (*.stp, *.ste, *.step)" option in the CAD
Select the file "Shrink.stp" in the "Chapter 6 Example
Model\Input File" directory.

Press the "No" button when asked if you want to review
the meshing results.
3/15/2010

model viewpoint so that all three symmetry planes can be
clearly seen and selected.
Referring to Figure 6.5, click on one of the surfaces that is
to have X symmetry.
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click on the other surface
that has X symmetry.
Mouse
Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
Mouse

Conditions"

Boundary Conditions" command.
"X Symmetry"
Press the "X Symmetry" button.
"OK"

Referring to Figure 6.5, click on one of the surfaces that has
Y symmetry.
that has Y symmetry.
Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
Mouse

Conditions"

"Y Symmetry"
Press the "Y Symmetry" button.
"OK"

Referring to Figure 6.5, click on one of the surfaces that
have Z symmetry.
that has Z symmetry.
Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
Mouse

Conditions"

"Z Symmetry"
Press the "Z Symmetry" button.
"OK"
Figure 6.5: Symmetry Constraints

3/15/2010
117
Assigning the Parameters

Once the model has been constructed and the loads and constraints have been applied, use the
FEA Editor environment to specify material properties.
Mouse
Right-click on the "Element Definition" heading for

Part 2.
"Modify Element
Definition"
Mouse
Click on the "Thermal" tab.
153.85
Type "153.85" in the "Stress free reference

temperature" field.
"OK"
Mouse
Click on the "Material" heading for Part 1.
<Ctrl> Mouse
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click on the "Material"

heading for Part 2 in the tree view.
Mouse
"Modify Material"
Select the "Modify Material" command. The

"Element Material Selection" dialog will appear.
"Edit Properties"
Press the "Edit Properties" button.
30e6
Type "30e6" in the "Modulus of Elasticity" field.
0.3
Type "0.3" in the "Poisson's Ratio" field.

Type "6.5e-6" in the "Thermal Coefficient of
Expansion" field.
Press the "OK" button to accept the information entered into
the "Element Material Selection" dialog for Parts 1 and 2.
6.5e-6
"OK"
"OK"
Mouse
Right-click on the "Analysis Type" heading.
"Modify Analysis
Parameters"
1
Select the "Modify Analysis Parameters" command.

The "Analysis Parameters" dialog will appear.
"OK"
"Tools: FEA Editor"
Type "1" in the first row of the "Thermal" column.

the "Analysis Parameters" dialog.
analysis.
Once you approve the model, access the TOOLS pull-down
menu and select the "FEA Editor" command to move
back to the FEA Editor environment to run the analysis.
Analyzing the Model

"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
118

"Perform Analysis" command to run the analysis and
then open the model in the Results environment.
3/15/2010

View"
"View: Display: Shaded with
Mesh"

View" command.
Access the VIEW pull-down menu and select the "Display"
pull-out menu. Select the "Shaded with Mesh" command.
If you look closely at the disk/hub interface, you can see that the nodes on each part move together
due to the bonded contact. You may want to increase the displaced model "Scale Factor" to
exaggerate the deformation more ("Results Options: Displaced Model Options"). The disk is trying
to shrink in both diameter and thickness. However, because of the bonded contact, the thickness of
the disk at its ID can only shrink as much as the hub compresses axially.
We will compare this behavior, and the resultant stresses, to a second version of the model. This
time, frictional surface contact will be used between the parts. A second design scenario will be
created so that the results of each version may both be retained.
* * *
Case 2
"Tools: FEA Editor"
Mouse
"Copy"
Access the TOOLS pull-down menu and select the "FEA

Editor" command. This will take you back to the FEA
Editor environment.
Right-click on the "Design Scenario 1" heading at the top
of the tree view and select the "Copy" command. Design
Scenario 2 will be created and will be the active scenario.
Mouse
Right-click on the "Contact (Default: Bonded)" heading.
"Surface Contact"
Select the "Surface Contact" command.
Mouse
Right-click on the "Contact (Default: Surface)" heading.
"Settings "
Select the "Settings" command. The "Contact

Options" dialog will appear.
Mouse
Activate the "Include Friction" checkbox.
0.3
Type "0.3" in the "Static Friction Coefficient" field.
"OK"
3/15/2010
119

Analyzing the Model
"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"

If you once again closely examine the disk/hub interface with the mesh displayed, this time
you'll see that the nodes of the disk shifted axially along the length of the hub. The thickness
was able to decrease due to thermal shrinkage despite the friction in the interface. Animating
the on-screen image will make the effect more apparent.
You should also see a significant reduction in the maximum von Mises stress value
(approximately 33,000 psi versus 43,300 psi). Figure 6.6 (next page) shows a comparison of
the results for the bonded and frictional surface contact versions of the model.
Result Options
The total contact force can be determined for each contact pair in a model in the Results
environment. Right-click on the heading in the tree view for the contact pair and select the
"Contact Force" command. A "Contact Force" dialog will appear with the total contact
force for that pair. The contact distribution can be seen by using the "Results: Element
Forces and Moments: 1) Axial Force" command. This will display the contact force in the
individual contact elements.
An archive containing both design scenarios, with results, is available in the "Chapter 6 Example
Models\Results Archive" folder in the class directory or in the copy of the solutions folders on your
computer.
120
3/15/2010
Figure 6.6: Comparison of Stress and Deformed Shape (Front View)
3/15/2010
121
122
3/15/2010
Exercise E
Yoke Model with Contact
Brick Elements
Applying surface contact between parts in an assembly.
Objective:
Analyze the yoke model again, but include the pins in the CAD solid model. The loads
and constraints will be applied to the pins and contact will be defined between the pins
and the yoke.
Geometry:
Use the file Exercise E.step in the "Exercise E\Input File" folder of the class directory or
in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer. Mesh the model at 90% of the
default mesh size.
Loading:
Apply a total of 800 lbf in traction to the end faces of the pin in the large hole.
Constraints:
Fully constrain the end faces of the pin in the small hole.
Constrain the Z translation of the shaft in the large hole.
Element:
Brick
Material:
Steel (ASTM-A36) for all parts
Questions:
Are the specified constraints adequate to ensure a statically stable model and to prevent
unwanted motion of the parts? If not, add the necessary constraints. As always,
constrain the model in a way that will provide the necessary stability but will not impede
the expected natural deformation of the parts.
How do the results compare to the previous results?
How do the runtimes compare?
3/15/2010
123
Results:
Part Description

(psi)
Yoke (Part 1)
3,430
Small Pin (Part 2)
3,592
Large Pin (Part 3)
425
Full Assembly
Maximum deflection
(in)
0.00047
A completed archive with results (Exercise E.ach) is located in the "Exercise E\Results Archive" folder in
124
3/15/2010
Chapter
Introduction to Linear Dynamics

Chapter Objectives
Learn about the analysis parameters setup for a modal analysis

Learn about lumped masses
Learn about the analysis parameters setup for a modal analysis with load stiffening
Learn about the analysis parameters setup for a critical buckling analysis
Perform a natural frequency (modal) analysis
Perform a critical buckling analysis
Modal Analysis
A modal analysis is performed using the "Natural Frequency (Modal)" analysis option. Most of
the element types available for a static stress analysis are also available for a modal analysis. The
one exception is the gap element. Also, surface and edge contact will not be considered during a
modal analysis. The only factors that affect a modal analysis are the geometry, constraints, and
mass. Therefore, no loads will be used in the analysis. No constraints are required for a modal
analysis to run successfully. However, if a part will be constrained during its use, apply the proper
constraints to the FEA model. This is important to receive accurate modal results because the
constraints can have a very significant effect on the natural frequencies.
The majority of the setup for a modal analysis is done in the "Analysis Parameters" dialog.
This dialog is shown in Figure 7.1.
Figure 7.1: Natural Frequency (Modal) Analysis Parameters Dialog

3/15/2010
125
Chapter 7: Introduction to Linear Dynamics
The "General" tab will be used to specify all of the necessary information. The most
important piece of information that must be specified is the "Number of frequencies/modes
to calculate". This control can be used in conjunction with the "Lower cut-off frequency"
and "Upper cut-off frequency" fields. If a value is entered in the "Lower cut-off
frequency" field, the processor will find the first natural frequency above the specified
frequency. The subsequent natural frequencies will be calculated until the number specified
in the "Number of frequencies/modes to calculate" field is reached. If a value is entered in
the "Upper cut-off frequency" field, the processor will stop after it has calculated a
frequency above this value regardless of the value in the "Number of frequencies/modes to
calculate" field. If a model is not fully constrained, activate the "Rigid body modes are
expected" checkbox. This will notify the processor that rigid or free body motion may be
present in the model. Examples of a fully or partially unconstrained model would be a
floating buoy or a communication satellite in orbit.
Typically, the first several vibration modes of a model that is not fully constrained will be true
rigid body modes and the results will not be meaningful. In other words, there will be motion
(translation and/or rotation) of the entire body but no distortion of the body's shape. To see
valid vibration modes you may have to ignore the first several mode shapes, reflecting rigid
body modes. Therefore, computation of additional modes should be requested. Alternately, a
lower cut-off frequency may be specified in the analysis parameters to filter out the typically
very low frequency rigid body modes.
Lumped Masses
One load that can be applied to models in a modal analysis is a nodal lumped mass. This is a
concentrated mass or weight that will be applied to a node in the model. The mass can be
defined to be effective for specific translational and/or rotational DOFs. To apply
translational mass effects, only the mass/weight needs to be defined. It can act uniformly in
all directions or have different effective magnitudes in the three global directions. For
example, a mass mounted in a pendulum fashion would exhibit little mass effect in the
direction tangent to the bottom of its arc of travel. You could move the object it's attached to
easily in this direction because the mass is free to pivot on its mountings. Moving the
structure side-to-side would require more effort. For most situations, a mass that is uniform in
all three translational directions will be appropriate.
For rotational DOFs, a mass moment of inertia must be entered for all applicable axes of
rotation. This is essentially, the rotational inertia of the object for rotation about the three
global axis directions. The values for X, Y, and Z rotation will differ for everything except a
spherical object due to the differing radii of gyration, though the mass is constant.
The lumped masses may be defined in units of either mass or force. To apply a nodal
lumped mass, select the node, or nodes, that you want to apply it to and right-click in the
display area. Select the "Add: Nodal Lumped Mass" command. The dialog shown in
126
3/15/2010
Figure 7.2: Nodal Lumped Mass Object Dialog

In the "Mass Input" section, specify if the nodal lumped mass will be defined as a mass
("Units of mass") or a weight ("Units of force"). If the nodal lumped mass is to be applied
equally against all of the translational DOFs of that node, activate the "Uniform" checkbox and
specify the magnitude in the "X Direction" field in the "Mass/Weight" section. If the nodal
lumped mass is to be applied against only one or two of the translations DOFs of that node, or if
it will be applied to all of the translational DOFs non-uniformly, deactivate the "Uniform"
checkbox and specify the appropriate magnitudes in the "X Direction", "Y Direction" and "Z
Direction" fields. If the nodal lumped mass is to be applied as a mass moment of inertia against
any of the rotational DOFs, specify the appropriate magnitudes in the "X Direction", "Y
Direction" and "Z Direction" fields in the "Mass Moment of Inertia" section.
Load Stiffening
As explained previously, standard modal analysis does not account for the loads on the model.
In some situations, however, the loads will affect the natural frequencies. An example would
be a guitar string. As tension is applied, the frequency changes. Loads that produce
membrane stresses will affect the natural frequency of the object. Tensile membrane stresses
will increase the natural frequencies and compressive membrane stresses will lower them.
Pure bending stresses will not affect the natural frequency.
To account for the loads in a modal analysis, you must select the "Natural Frequency
(Modal) with Load Stiffening" analysis type. Apply the loads and constraints that the
subject part or assembly would experience during its use.
All of the element types available for a regular modal analysis are available for this analysis
type with the exception of truss and membrane elements. The "Analysis Parameters" dialog
for a load stiffening analysis is shown in Figure 7.3.
3/15/2010
127
Figure 7.3: Natural Frequency (Modal) with Load Stiffening Analysis Parameters Dialog
As can be seen, the "Analysis Parameters" dialog is basically a combination of the dialogs
for modal and static stress analyses. Load multipliers, gravity loads, temperature loads and
centrifugal loads can be applied to a model in the same manner as a static stress analysis.
Example of Natural Frequency (Modal) Analysis

This example is an introduction to Autodesk Algor Simulation's natural frequency (modal)
analysis capabilities. The example will give step-by-step instructions to create a mesh and
analyze a three-dimensional (3-D) model of a tuning fork. There are three sections:
Setting up the model Open the model in the user interface and create a mesh on the model.
Then, use the FEA Editor environment to add the necessary loads and define the model
parameters. Visually check the model for errors with the Results environment.
Analyzing the model Analyze the model using the natural frequency (modal) processor.
View the processor log file.
Reviewing the results View the frequencies and mode shapes graphically using the Results
environment.
Use the 3-D solid model, TuningFork.step, located in the class directory (or in the "Chapter 7
Example Model\Input File" folder copied to your computer) to create a simple model of the
tuning fork (see Figure 7.4). The cylindrical surfaces of the tuning fork will be completely
constrained. The material for this part is steel (AISI 4130) with a mass density of
0.000732 lbf*s2/in/in3 and a modulus of elasticity of 30e6 lb/in2. Analyze the model to
determine the first five natural frequencies and their mode shapes. We will use 50% of the
default mesh size.
128
3/15/2010
Figure 7.4: Tuning Fork Model
Meshing the Model

Simulation"

"Open"

"TuningFork.step"

Select the file "TuningFork.step" in the "Chapter 7
Example Model" directory.
"Open"
"Linear: Natural Frequency

(Modal)"

Click on the arrow to the right of the "Choose Analysis
Type" selection box.
Select the "Linear" pull-out menu and choose the
"Natural Frequency (Modal)" analysis type.
"OK"

"OK"
Mouse
The model will now appear in the FEA Editor environment.

"Mesh: Model Mesh
Settings"
Mouse
"Mesh model"
"No"

Move the slider towards the right to reduce the mesh size to
"50%" of the default size.
Press the "Mesh model" button to create a mesh using the
specified options.
Press the "No" button when asked to view the mesh results.
3/15/2010
129
"View: Rotate"
Access the VIEW pull-down menu and select the "Rotate"

command. Inspect the mesh on the model by rotating the
model around by pressing the left mouse button and
dragging the cursor across the screen.
<Esc>
Press the <Esc> key to cancel the rotate mode.
Adding Constraints
View"
Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse

command.
Click on one of the cylindrical surfaces at the end of the
tuning fork.
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click on the other cylindrical
surface at the end of the tuning fork.
Mouse

Conditions"

"Fixed"
Press the "Fixed" button.
"OK"
Defining the Materials

Right-click on the "Material" heading for Part 1 in the tree
view.
Mouse
"Modify Material"
"Steel (AISI 4130)"
Highlight "Steel (AISI 4130)" from the list of available

materials.
"OK"
Analyzing the Model

"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
View"
130

View" command.
3/15/2010

We want to view the mode shapes and frequencies for the part.
"Results Options: Load Case:

Next"

Set"
2 <Enter>

select the "Load Case" pull-out menu. Select the "Next"
command to advance through the different modes and look
at each shape and frequency.
select the "Load Case" pull-out menu. Select the "Set"
command to be able to specify a specific mode shape to
review.
Type a "2" in the "Enter load case" field and press <Enter>
to specify that you would like to review load case number 2.
The model should appear as shown in Figure 7.5.
NOTE: If your displaced shape for mode 2 is not as shown in Figure 7.5, it is likely that your
computer has calculated the same vibration mode but is showing it 180 out-of-phase from the
point in the vibration cycle captured in the image below. Click the "Animation: Start
Animation" command and you should see the structure go through the pictured shape during
the vibration cycle. Click the "Animation: Stop Animation" command when you are
finished examining the vibration mode.
Figure 7.5: Mode Shape 2 of the Tuning Fork

Results:
Mode
Frequency (Hz)
1
2
3
4
5
241.5
298.9
413.9
854.1
922.8
3/15/2010
131

Note that the natural frequency results will be sensitive to mesh density and to mesh quality.
This is especially true for models comprised of brick elements and having thin cross-sections
that undergo bending during vibration. As in stress analysis, a minimum of three or four brick
elements though the thickness is recommended to accurately capture flexural effects.
Alternately, two elements may be sufficient if the optional midside nodes are enabled.
An archive, with results, is available in the "Chapter 7 Example Model\Results Archive" folder in
Critical Buckling Analysis

In the normal use of most products, buckling can be catastrophic if it occurs. The failure is not
one of stress, but of geometric instability. Once the geometry of the part starts to deform, it
can no longer support even a fraction of the initially applied force.
The worst part about buckling for engineers is that buckling usually occurs at relatively low
stress values compared to what the material can withstand. So a separate check must be
performed to see if a product or section is acceptable with respect to buckling.
Buckling almost always involves compression. In civil engineering, buckling is to be avoided
when designing support columns, load bearing walls and sections of bridges which may flex
under load. For example, an I-beam may be perfectly "safe" when considering only the
maximum stress, but fail disastrously if just one local spot of a flange should buckle.
In engineering, designs involving thin parts in flexible structures, like airplanes and automobiles,
are susceptible to buckling. Even if the stresses are very low, buckling of local areas can
cause the whole structure to collapse by a rapid progression of propagated buckling.
Sometimes, buckling is used as a characteristic part of a design. You may have seen or used
the type of oil can where you pump the oil out by pressing on the bottom of the oil can. If you
press a little, nothing happens. If you press harder, the bottom suddenly "snaps through",
pumping out a small amount of oil. Then it snaps back when you release your thumb. This
phenomena is known as "snap-through" or "oil-can" buckling.
For situations involving linear materials, such as steel or glass, and small deflections or
deformations prior to buckling; a straightforward solution is available. This is the solution
used in the Autodesk Algor Simulation software.
It is important to be aware of the fact that three types of buckling are possiblefully elastic,
partially plastic, and fully plastic. The linear critical buckling solver determines the buckling
load based on fully elastic buckling assumptions. In other words, it is assumed that all
materials are below yield regardless of the magnitude of the buckling load. If, in reality, the
stresses have to exceed yield prior to the structure becoming unstable, then the buckling
phenomena is nonlinear. Short structures with large cross-sections may only fail by crushing,
which is a fully plastic failure mode. For nonlinear situations, buckling can be determined as
part of a nonlinear stress analysis using the Mechanical Event Simulation analysis type.
A high critical buckling safety factor does not necessarily mean that a structure is safe. It
only means that it is not susceptible to elastic buckling. A separate, traditional stress analysis
is also necessary to see if objectionable stresses are produced by operating loads. It is
possible for a very highly stressed structure to pass linear buckling criteria just like it's
possible for a lowly stressed structure to fail buckling criteria.
132
3/15/2010
Setting Up a Critical Buckling Analysis

To set up a buckling analysis, select the "Critical Buckling Load" analysis type. After you
apply the loads and constraints and define the element and material properties, right-click on
the "Analysis Parameters" heading and select the "Modify Analysis Parameters"
command. The dialog shown in Figure 7.6 will appear.
Figure 7.6: Critical Buckling Load Analysis Parameters Dialog

The setup for a buckling analysis is similar to that for a static stress analysis. Assign the
multipliers for the pressure, acceleration, displacement and temperature effects in the
"Multipliers" tab and set up the gravity in the "Gravity" tab. In the "Sparse Solver"
section of the "Solution" tab, you can specify how many buckling modes that you want to
calculate. Once a buckling analysis is completed, the "Results Options: Show Displaced
Model" command can be used to view the buckled shapes of the model. How the buckling
load is determined is explained in the "Result Options" section (next page).
3/15/2010
133
Result Options
Modal: When a natural frequency (modal) analysis is performed and the model is displayed in
the Results environment, each mode will be presented as a separate load case. The frequency
value for each mode will be displayed as an annotation in the lower left corner of the display
area. The displaced shape for each mode can be shown using the "Results Options: Show
Displaced Model" command, which is enabled by default. Note that displacement results are
an available result for modal analyses (with or without load stiffening). However, these are not
scaled to any actual load or structural excitation and are therefore only meaningful as a means of
demonstrating the mode shapes. A restart analysis, such as random vibration or transient stress,
is needed in order to obtain meaningful stress and displacement results.
Buckling: For a critical buckling load analysis, the result will be presented as a buckling
multiplier in the annotation at the lower left corner of the display area. There will be a
different multiplier provided for each of the calculated buckling modes. Note that the
buckling mode shapes are not necessarily the same as the natural frequency mode shapes. In
fact, they are typically different except for very simple columns.
The buckling load multiplier is the factor by which the applied loads would need to be multiplied
in order to produce buckling. For example, if a load of 500 lbf had been applied to a model and
the buckling multiplier is 1.5, that means that buckling will occur at 750 lbf (1.5 * 500). A
multiplier that is less than 1.0 indicates that buckling occurs at less than the applied load.
Finally, a negative buckling multiplier indicates that buckling occurs for a load acting in the
opposite direction. For example, a column in tension won't buckle but one in compression will.
Other Linear Dynamics Analyses

In addition to the three analyses discussed previously in this chapter, there are a number of
other linear dynamics analysis types that may be performed using the Autodesk Algor
Simulation package. Most of these are known as restart analyses because they require a
modal or modal with load stiffening analysis to be completed prior to performing the
subsequent analysis type. The modal results are then scaled to obtain actual stresses and
deflections produced by a known structural excitation. The exception is transient stress
(direct integration), which, like the critical buckling load analysis, does not require a prior
modal analysis of the structure. Here is a list of the other linear dynamics analyses:
Frequency Response
Random Vibration
Response Spectrum
Transient Stress (Modal Superposition)
Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM) Autodesk Algor Simulation

Professional package is required for this analysis type.
Due to the amount of material that must be covered within the three days of this course, the
remaining linear dynamics analysis types, with the exception of DDAM, are presented as self
study material and will not be covered during the class. Please refer to the section, "Self
Study: Linear Dynamics Supplement," which follows Chapter 10, for more information and
exercises. In addition, there is a brief summary of each analysis type within "Appendix B
Analysis Types in Autodesk Algor Simulation."
134
3/15/2010
Exercise F
Concrete Platform
Brick Elements
Setting up, running, and reviewing a modal analysis

Setting up, running, and reviewing a critical buckling analysis
Objective:
Determine the first six (6) natural frequencies and their mode shapes for the concrete
platform. Then, in a second design scenario, perform a critical buckling analysis. Solve
for the first five (5) critical buckling modes (default setting).
Geometry:
Use the file Exercise F.SAT in the "Exercise F\Input File" folder of the class directory or in
the copy of the solutions folders on your computer. Specify an absolute mesh size of 3 inches.
Constraints:
Fully fixed the bottom surface at each of the four legs.
Loading (for Critical Buckling Analysis):

Standard gravity (-Z direction)
100,000 lbf normal force acting on top surface
Element:
Brick
Material:
Concrete (High Strength)
3/15/2010
135

Modal Results:
Mode Number
Frequency (Hz)
10.8
12.0
17.5
20.8
36.7
42.8
Mode Number
Buckling Load
Multiplier
170
200
229
236
293
Buckling Results:
Note:
The buckling safety factor is very high, indicating that this structure is clearly not
susceptible to buckling due to geometric instability. Nonetheless, a linear static stress
analysis would show that the applied load already produces tensile stresses exceeding the
strength of non-reinforced concrete, which is typically less than 500 psi. So the structure
would collapse due to material failure. This is stated to emphasize the importance of
checking a design with regard to both static stress and buckling criteria.
A completed archive with results (Exercise F.ach) is located in the "Exercise F\Results Archive" folder in
the class directory or in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer. The results archive includes a
third design scenario (static stress analysis) showing tensile stresses in excess of the strength of nonreinforced concrete.
136
3/15/2010
Chapter
Steady-State Heat Transfer

Chapter Objectives
Perform an example of a steady-state heat transfer analysis

Overview of thermal contact settings
Overview of element options for thermal analyses
Overview of loading options (part, surface, and nodal loads)
Overview of results options
Complete a steady-state heat transfer exercise
CAD model importing, meshing, and the application of loads and constraints in heat transfer
analysis is similar to the respective processes associated with linear static stress analysis,
covered previously in this manual. We will begin this section with a walk-through of a simple
steady-state heat transfer analysis, after which topics specific to thermal analysis will be
discussed in greater detail.
3-D Radiator Example

This example is an introduction to Autodesk Algor Simulation's steady-state heat transfer
analysis capabilities. The example will give step-by-step instructions to create a mesh and
analyze a three-dimensional (3-D) model of a radiator. There are three sections:
Setting up the model Open the model in the FEA Editor environment and create a
mesh on the model. Add the necessary loads and define the model parameters. Visually
check the model for errors with the Results environment.
Analyzing the model Analyze the model using the steady-state heat transfer processor.
View the processor log file.
Reviewing the results View the temperatures and heat fluxes graphically using the
Results environment.
Use the archive file, Radiator.ach, located in the "Chapter 8 Example Model\Input File"
folder to create a simple model of the radiator (see Figure 8.1). This file may be copied to
your computer from the class directory or the Solutions CD. The fluid at the left end of the
model is 120F. The tube and the ends of the radiator are insulated. The fins are convecting
to an ambient temperature of 70F with a coefficient of 0.04 in lbs . All of the
in 2 sec F
solid parts are made of Steel (ASTM-A36). The thermal conductivity of the fluid is
600 in lbs . Analyze the model to determine the temperature profile of the fluid.
sec in F
3/15/2010
137
Chapter 8: Steady-State Heat Transfer
Figure 8.1: Radiator Model
Meshing the Model

Simulation"
"Open"
(*.ach)"
"Radiator.ach"
"OK"

Click on the "Open" icon at the left side of the dialog, if
it's not already selected.
the "Files of type:" drop-down box.
Select the file Radiator.ach in the "Chapter 8 Example
Model\Input File" directory.
Select the location on your hard drive where you want the
model to be extracted and press the "OK" button.
The model will now appear in the FEA Editor environment. The analysis type will have
already been set as "Steady-State Heat Transfer" and the units system set to "English (in.)".
"Mesh: Model Mesh
Settings"
"Mesh model"
138

Press the "Mesh model" button to create a mesh using the
default options.
"No"
"View: Rotate"

command. Inspect the mesh, rotating the model around by
pressing the left mouse button and dragging the cursor
across the screen.
<Esc>
Press the <Esc> key to cancel the rotate command.
3/15/2010
Setting up the Model

Since you have created a solid mesh, the "Element Type" heading in the tree view has already
set to "Brick" and the default "Element Definition" parameters have been applied.
Adding Loads
"View: Orientation: Back
View"

"Orientation" pull-out menu. Select the "Back View"
command.
Mouse
Click on the heading for Part 1 in the tree view.
<Ctrl> Mouse
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click on the heading for Part
2 in the tree view.
Mouse
"Hide"
Select the "Hide" command.
"Selection: Shape: Rectangle"

Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse

"Shape" pull-out menu. Select the "Rectangle" command.
Click and drag a selection rectangle that fully encloses all of
the fins but does not enclose the pipe fittings.
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click and drag a selection
rectangle that fully encloses all four holes in the fins but does
NOT fully enclose any of the remaining fin surfaces. This
will remove the inner surfaces of each hole from the selection
set. These surfaces will not have the thermal load applied.
Mouse
"Add: Surface Convection

Loads"

Convection Loads" command.
Type "0.04" in the "Temperature Independent
Convection Coefficient" field.
0.04
70
Type "70" in the "Temperature" field.
"OK"
Mouse
Right-click on the "Parts" heading at the top of the parts

list in the tree view.
"Show All Parts"
Select the "Show All Parts" command.
Mouse
Right-click on the heading for Part 17 in the tree view.
"Hide"

View"
Mouse

command.
Draw a box enclosing the far left edge of the model (-X end,
where the fitting has been hidden).
Mouse
"Add: Surface Applied

Temperatures"
120

Applied Temperatures" command.
3/15/2010
139

"OK"
Mouse
"Show"
Select the "Show" command.
Defining the Materials

Mouse
<Ctrl> <Shift> "M"
<Shift> Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
Holding the <Ctrl> and <Shift> keys, press the keyboards

"M" key. This will collapse the parts list in the tree view.
Holding down the <Shift> key, click on the heading for Part
18 in the tree view. All parts should now be selected.
2 in the tree view to deselect it.
Mouse
"Modify: Material"
"Steel (ASTM-A36)"
Select the "Modify" pull-out menu and select the

"Material" command.
available materials.
"OK"
Mouse
Right-click on the heading for Part 2 tree view.
"Modify: Material"
Select the "Modify" pull-out menu and select the

"Material" command.
"Edit Properties"
600
Type "600" in the "Thermal conductivity" field.
"OK"
"OK"
"Details >>"
"Tools: FEA Editor"

analysis.
Click on the "Details >>" button to see the solid meshing
progress log. This process will take some time to complete
for all eighteen parts. The dialog will automatically close
after solid meshing has been completed.
The model will appear within the Results environment. Once
youve approved the model, access the TOOLS pull-down
menu and select the "FEA Editor" command to move back
into the FEA Editor environment to run the analysis.
Analyzing the Model

"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
View"
140

View" command.
3/15/2010

We want to view the temperature profile of the fluid part. In order to do this, we should hide
the other parts.
Mouse
Click the "Toggle Load and Constraint Display" toolbar

button to hide the load and constraint symbols if they are
visible.
Mouse
<Shift> Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
Holding down the <Shift> key, click on the heading for Part
18 in the tree view.
2 in the tree view to deselect it.
Mouse
"Hide"
Select the "Hide" command. The temperature profile for

the fluid should appear as shown in Figure 8.2.
Figure 8.2: Temperature Profile of the Fluid

A completed archive with results (Radiator.ach) is located in the "Chapter 8 Example Model\Results Archive"
folder in the class directory or in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer.
3/15/2010
141
Meshing Options
All of the basic meshing options in the FEA Editor environment are available for a steady-state
heat transfer analysis. For more information on these options, refer to Chapter 5, Meshing.
Thermal Contact
One meshing option that is unique to thermal analysis of assembly models is thermal contact.
This can be applied in the FEA Editor environment. Thermal contact is used to represent
imperfect contact between two parts. You will be able to define a resistance value for each
contact pair in the assembly. This feature can also be used to model the effects of small parts
without physically including them in the model. For example, a thin epoxy film can be
represented by thermal contact between the parts that it connects. If this part were to be
included in the analysis, it would result in a large number of elements because of its size
relative to the rest of the model and the small elements that would be needed to mesh it.
There are four types of thermal contact available. These can be set up for individual pairs of
parts or surfaces by selecting the appropriate headings in the tree view or display area and
right-clicking. Select the "Contact" pull-out menu and select the appropriate contact type as
described below. If you want certain contact parameters to be applied to every contact pair in
the model, right-click on the "Contact" heading in the tree view and select the appropriate
command for the default contact type desired.
Bonded
If the "Bonded" command is selected, the nodes on the surfaces in this contact pair will be
matched. Heat will flow freely from one part to the other through the bonded surfaces and it
will flow without resistance.
Welded
If the "Welded" command is selected, the nodes along the edges of the contact surfaces will
be matched. These nodes will act the same as if the "Bonded" command were selected. The
nodes along the interior of these surfaces will not be matched together. No heat will be
transferred between these nodes.
Free/No Contact
If the "Free" command is selected, the nodes on the surfaces in this contact pair will not be
matched. No heat will be transferred between these nodes.
Surface Contact
If the "Surface Contact" command is selected, the nodes on the surfaces in this contact pair
will be matched. The difference between this command and the "Bonded" command is that
you will be able to define a thermal contact resistance between the surfaces. This can be done
by right-clicking on the heading for the contact pair and selecting the "Settings"
command. You will be able to specify the total combined resistance in all of the surfaces
involved in the selected contact pairs ("Total Resistance") or the amount of resistance per
unit area ("Distributed Resistance") in the "Type:" drop-down box. Enter the appropriate
value in the "Value:" field.
142
3/15/2010

NOTE: If thermal results will subsequently be used as a load in a structural analysis in which
surface contact is to be used, then this should be anticipated prior to running the heat
transfer analysis. Thermal contact should be specified wherever surface contact is to
be used later, even if no thermal resistance is to be imposed. This will ensure that
the node numbering will be consistent between the two models or two design
scenarios. Where two parts having surface or thermal contact meet, there will be sets
of two nodes at each point where the meshes are matched. These will have the same
coordinates and will be connected by zero-length gap elements (for structural
analysis) or thermal contact elements (for heat transfer analysis). Otherwise, with
bonded contact, the nodes for each part will be merged and only one node will exist
at each point where the meshes are matched.
Element Options
There are five types of elements available for a steady-state heat transfer analysis. All of the
element types share the same basic loading options that will be discussed later in this chapter.
Rod Elements
Rod elements are line elements that consist of 2 nodes. These elements can be created in the
FEA Editor environment.
Rod elements are used to represent parts that have a constant cross-section that is small
relative to the length. These elements can be used to represent wires. Since the cross-section
is small, it is assumed that the entire cross-section at a specific point along the length is at a
uniform temperature. The cross-sectional area and perimeter will be required. The perimeter
will be used to calculate the surface area for convection and radiation to the environment.
Rod elements cannot be used in an enclosure for body-to-body radiation.
Rod elements have two material models available. The first material model is the
"Isotropic" material model. This material model is used for a material that has material
properties that are constant with regards to the temperature. The second material model is the
"Temperature Dependent Isotropic" material model. This material model is used for a
material that has different material properties at different temperatures. The material
properties for each temperature will be entered into a spreadsheet. The temperatures that the
model will experience must be between the low and high values of the spreadsheet.
2-D Elements
2-D elements are planar elements that are drawn in the Y-Z plane. Each element consists of
an area enclosed by three or four lines. These elements are generally created by building and
meshing Y-Z sketches in the FEA Editor environment. There are two geometry types
available for 2-D elementsplanar and axisymmetric. The planar geometry is used to model
parts of a constant thickness that can be represented by a cross-section. The axisymmetric
geometry is used to model parts that have a continuous cross-section that is revolved about a
center axis. In Autodesk Algor Simulation, this axis of revolution must be the global Z
axis and the cross-section must be drawn in the +Y half of the Y-Z plane.
2-D elements have four available material models. The first is "Isotropic." This model is
used for materials that have identical thermal properties in all directions and at all
temperatures. The second material model is "Orthotropic." This model is used for
materials that have different thermal properties in different directions but the properties are
assumed not to vary as the temperature changes. The third and fourth material models are
3/15/2010
143

"Temperature Dependent Isotropic" and "Temperature Dependent Orthotropic." As
the names imply, these are temperature dependent variants of the Isotropic and Orthotropic
material models. Either one allows you to model materials that have different thermal
conductivity and specific heat values at different temperatures. The material properties for
each temperature will be entered into a spreadsheet within the "Element Material
Specification" dialog. The temperatures that the FEA model will experience during the
analysis must fall between the low and high values of the spreadsheet.
For an orthotropic material model, you will need to define two orthogonal material axes. The
"Principal Axis Transformation Angle" field on the "General" tab of the "Element
Definition" dialog is used to accomplish this. The value in this field is measured
counterclockwise from the positive Y axis and defines the direction of the principal material axis
(also referred to as the "n" axis or the "r" axis). The "s" axis will be based on the same
transformation angle but measured counterclockwise from the positive Z axis. The third
material axis will always be the X axis for 2-D elements. Please note that the letters "n" and "r"
are used interchangeably when referring to the first material axis. For example, the conductivity
in this direction may be referred to as "Thermal conductivity, Local Axis n" or as "Kr."
Plate Elements
Plate elements are 3-D area elements that consist of an area enclosed by three or four lines.
These elements can be created from CAD solid parts or assemblies by using the "Midplane"
mesh setting. They can also be manually created in the FEA Editor environment. Lastly,
plate elements can be generated from CAD surface models (i.e. those models consisting of
zero-thickness surface geometry, rather than solids). To do this, choose the "Plate/Shell"
mesh option.
These elements are used to represent parts that are thin relative to the other dimensions. Since
these parts are thin, it is assumed that both the top and bottom of the plates are the same
temperature. No temperature distribution will exist through the thickness. In the "General
Controls and Parameters" section of the "General" tab of the "Element Definition"
dialog, you will be able to define a point in space (the "Element Normal" point) that will be
used to define the top of the plate elements in this part. The top of the plate will face away
from this point. The orientation of the plate is only used when considering the side of a plate
involved in an enclosure for body-to-body radiation.
As is true for the 2-D elements discussed previously, plate elements have four available
material models. The first is "Isotropic," used for materials that have identical thermal
properties in all directions and at all temperatures. The second material model is
"Orthotropic," used when materials have different thermal properties in different directions
but the properties are assumed not to vary with the temperature. The third and fourth material
models are "Temperature Dependent Isotropic" and "Temperature Dependent
Orthotropic." As the names imply, these are temperature dependent variants of the Isotropic
and Orthotropic material models. Either one allows you to model materials that have different
thermal conductivity and specific heat values at different temperatures. The material
properties for each temperature will be entered into a spreadsheet within the "Element
Material Specification" dialog. The temperatures that the FEA model will experience during
the analysis must fall between the low and high values of the spreadsheet.
For an orthotropic material model, you will need to define the orientation of the three
orthogonal material axes, "n," "s," and "t" (or "r," "s," and "t"). This is done in the
"Orientation" tab of the "Element Definition" dialog, which is shown in Figure 8.3. Please
note that the letters "n" and "r" are used interchangeably when referring to the first material
axis. For example, the conductivity in this direction may be referred to as "Thermal
conductivity, Local Axis n" or as "Kr."
144
3/15/2010
Figure 8.3: Orientation Tab of the Element Definition Thermal Plate Dialog
There are four options available for defining the n, s and t axes. These are found in the
"Material axis direction specified using" drop-down box. If the "Global X-direction"
option is selected, the n axis will be the global X axis, the s axis will be the global Y axis and
the t axis will be the global Z axis. If the "Global Y-direction" option is selected, the n axis
will be the global Y axis, the s axis will be the global Z axis and the t axis will be the global X
axis. If the "Global Z-direction" option is selected, the n axis will be the global Z axis, the s
axis will be the global X axis and the t axis will be the global Y axis. If any of these three
options are selected, the material axes can be rotated counterclockwise about the n axis by the
value specified in the "Material Axis Rotation Angle" field. If the "Spatial Points" option
is selected, you will need to enter the coordinates of at least three points in the "Spatial point
coordinates" table. Once the spatial points are defined, you can select the appropriate spatial
points in the "Index of spatial point 1", "Index of spatial point 2" and "Index of spatial
point 3" drop-down boxes. The n axis will be a vector going from "Index of spatial point 1"
to "Index of spatial point 2". The s axis will be normal to the n axis and will travel through
"Index of spatial point 3". The t axis will be calculated as the cross product of n and s.
Brick and Tetrahedral Elements

Brick and tetrahedral elements are 3-D solid elements. Tetrahedral elements consist of 4
triangular faces and 4 corner nodes. Brick elements consist of 4, 5, or 6 triangular and/or
quadrilateral faces and 4, 5, 6 or 8 corner nodes. These elements can be created in the FEA
Editor environment. Valid forms are the same as those used for structural analysis and are
shown in Table 2.1 (page 34).
As is true for the previously discussed 2-D and plate elements, both brick and tetrahedral
elements have four available material models. The first is "Isotropic," used for materials
that have identical thermal properties in all directions and at all temperatures. The second
material model is "Orthotropic," used when materials have different thermal properties in
different directions but the properties are assumed not to vary with the temperature. The third
and fourth material models are "Temperature Dependent Isotropic" and "Temperature
Dependent Orthotropic." As the names imply, these are temperature dependent variants of
the Isotropic and Orthotropic material models. Either one allows you to model materials that
3/15/2010
145

have different thermal conductivity and specific heat values at different temperatures. The
material properties for each temperature will be entered into a spreadsheet within the
"Element Material Specification" dialog. The temperatures that the FEA model will
experience during the analysis must fall between the low and high values of the spreadsheet.
For an orthotropic material model, you will need to define the orientation of the three
orthogonal material axes, "n," "s," and "t" (or "r," "s," and "t"). This is done by defining
three points in the "Orientation" tab of the "Element Definition" dialog. Please note that
the letters "n" and "r" are used interchangeably when referring to the first material axis. For
example, the conductivity in this direction may be referred to as "Thermal conductivity, Local
Axis n" or as "Kr."
You must know the node numbers of three vertices in order to define the axes. To determine
the node numbers, use the "Analysis: Check Model" command to load the model into the
Results environment. You can determine the number of a node in two ways. The first way is
to select the node on the model and use the "Inquire: Results" command. The node
number will be displayed in the resulting dialog. The second method is to zoom in on the
node and select the "Display Options: Show Node Numbers" command. The latter method
should be avoided when two different nodes exist at the same coordinates (such as where two
parts are connected via surface contact), because the overlapping numbers will likely be
misread. The "Orientation" tab of the "Element Definition" dialog is shown in Figure 8.4.
Figure 8.4: Orientation Tab of the Element Definition Thermal Brick Dialog
The three nodes numbers acquired from the Results environment will be entered into the
"Orientation Node 1", "Orientation Node 2" and "Orientation Node 3" fields. The
n axis will be a vector going from "Orientation Node 1" to "Orientation Node 2". The
s axis will be normal to the n axis and will travel through "Orientation Node 3". The t axis
will be calculated as the cross product of the n and s axes. If no nodes are specified in this
tab, the n axis will be the global X-axis, the s axis will be the global Y-axis and the t axis will
be the global Z-axis. This is the same as the "Global X-direction" orientation option available
for plate elements.
146
3/15/2010
Loading Options
Each element type in a steady-state heat transfer analysis can have eight types of loads
applied. These eight loads can be split into three categories: nodal loads, surface loads and
element loads. All of the loads will be set up identically for all of the element types. The one
exception is that plate elements will have an additional option for surface loads. Surface
loads on plate elements can be applied to one or both sides. This can be specified by checking
the "Apply load to both sides" checkbox in the "Plate Options" section within the load
definition dialog. Since there is no conduction through the thickness of a plate element,
applying a load on both sides is the equivalent of doubling the load.
Nodal Loads
Nodal Temperatures
Nodal temperatures can be applied to any node on the model. To add a nodal temperature,
first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out menu and
choose the desired selection method. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and
choose the "Select" pull-out menu and select the "Vertices" command. Click on the vertex
or vertices to which you want to apply a nodal temperature and right-click anywhere in the
display area. In the menu that appears, select the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Nodal
Temperature" command. The dialog shown in Figure 8.5 will appear if 1 node was
selected before accessing this command. Nodal temperatures are used to define the initial
temperature of a node. This node will not be held at this temperature throughout the analysis.
Figure 8.5: Nodal Temperature Object Dialog

Magnitude: Enter the desired magnitude of the nodal temperature in this field. The node
will begin the analysis at this temperature.
Description: This field allows you to apply a name for this set of nodal temperatures. This
description will be used to name each temperature in the tree view.
Nodal Applied Temperatures
Nodal applied temperatures can be applied to any node on the model. To add a nodal applied
temperature, first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out
menu and choose the desired selection method. Then access the SELECTION pull-down
menu and choose the "Select" pull-out menu and select the "Vertices" command. Click on
the vertex or vertices to which you want to apply a nodal applied temperature and right-click
anywhere in the display area. In the menu that appears, select the "Add" pull-out menu and
then the "Nodal Applied Temperature" command. The dialog shown in Figure 8.6 will
appear if 1 node was selected before accessing this command. Nodal applied temperatures
3/15/2010
147

will hold the temperature of a node at a certain value. This temperature will be conducted
through the part.
For a nodal applied temperature to be used properly during the analysis, a "Boundary
temperature multiplier" must be assigned in the "Multipliers" tab of the "Analysis
Parameters" dialog. The "Boundary temperature multiplier" adjusts the temperature.
Setting the multiplier to 0 does not disable the nodal applied temperature; it changes the
magnitude to 0.
Figure 8.6: Nodal Applied Temperature Object Dialog

Magnitude: Enter the desired magnitude of the nodal applied temperature in this field. This
temperature will be conducted through the part.
Stiffness: A nodal applied temperature is used to fix a node to a certain temperature
throughout the analysis. This is done using a thermal boundary element. The heat is
transferred from the new node to the node on the model through an element with a thermal
stiffness specified in the "Stiffness" field. The heat flow will be equal to the product of the
stiffness and the difference of the magnitude of the nodal applied temperature and the
calculated temperature for that node. The temperature of the node on the model will depend
on the stiffness value. A high stiffness value will cause the node on the model to be very
close to the magnitude of the applied nodal temperature. A low stiffness means that the
temperature of the node on the model could be significantly lower than the magnitude of the
applied nodal temperature.
148
3/15/2010
Surface Loads
Surface Temperatures
A surface temperature can be applied to any surface on a model. To add a surface
temperature, first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out
menu and choose the "Point" command. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and
choose the "Select" pull-out menu and select the "Surfaces" command. Click on the
surfaces to which you want to apply a surface temperature and right-click anywhere in the
display area. Multiple surfaces can be selected by holding down the <Ctrl> key. In the menu
that appears, select the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Surface Temperature"
command. A nodal temperature will be applied to every node on the selected surface. If any
of the lines meeting at a certain node are in the selected surfaces, a nodal temperature will be
applied to that node. Refer to the section about nodal temperatures for the definitions of the
commands on this dialog.
Surface Applied Temperatures
A surface applied temperature can be applied to any surface on a model. To add a surface
applied temperature, first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape"
pull-out menu and choose the "Point" command. Then access the SELECTION pull-down
menu and choose the "Select" pull-out menu and select the "Surfaces" command. Click on
the surfaces to which you want to apply a surface applied temperature and right-click
anywhere in the display area. Multiple surfaces can be selected by holding down the <Ctrl>
key. In the menu that appears, select the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Surface
Applied Temperature" command. A nodal applied temperature will be applied to every
node on the selected surface. If any of the lines meeting at a certain node are in the selected
surfaces, a nodal applied temperature will be applied to that node. Refer to the section about
nodal applied temperatures for the definitions of the commands on this dialog.
For a surface applied temperature to be used properly during the analysis, a "Boundary
temperature multiplier" must be assigned in the "Multipliers" tab of the "Analysis
Parameters" dialog. The "Boundary temperature multiplier" adjusts the temperature. Setting
the multiplier to 0 does not disable the surface applied temperature; it changes the magnitude to 0.
Surface Convection Load
Convection can be applied to any surface in the model. To apply convection, first access the
SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out menu and choose the "Point"
command. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and choose the "Select" pull-out menu
and select the "Surfaces" command. Click on the surfaces to which you want to apply convection
and right-click anywhere in the display area. Multiple surfaces can be selected by holding down
the <Ctrl> key. In the menu that appears, select the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Surface
Convection Load" command. The dialog shown in Figure 8.7 will appear.
3/15/2010
149
Figure 8.7: Surface Convection Object Properties Dialog

In general, a convection load is defined by two parameters: a convection coefficient and an
ambient temperature. The ambient temperature is the temperature of the environment
surrounding the surface. Enter this value in the "Ambient Temperature" field.
Two types of convection coefficients may be defined:
Constant Convection Coefficient
For a surface that will have the same convection coefficient for all of the nodes, a constant
convection coefficient can be used. To set up this type of convection coefficient, specify a value
in the "Temperature Independent Convection Coefficient" field. This value can be derived
from experimental data. If no experimental data is available, the user interface provides a
library of pre-defined convection coefficients for air and water (for buoyant or forced flow) or
can calculate a value based on various user-input parameters. To use a predefined value, press
the "Read from Library" button and select the condition that most closely matches the
parameters of the model being analyzed. To calculate a convection coefficient, press the
"Calculate" button. You will be requested to enter flow, geometry and material properties
about the model and the ambient fluid in three tabs. After the necessary data is specified, press
the "Calculate film/convection coefficient" button. A value will be calculated for the
convection coefficient. When you leave this dialog, you will have the option to have this value
automatically assigned to the "Convection Coefficient" field. For information on the equations
used for the convection coefficient calculations, refer to the User's Guide. From the "Contents"
tab, navigate to "Setting Up and Performing the Analysis: Thermal: Loads and Constraints:
Convection: Film/Convection Coefficient Calculator."
150
3/15/2010
Temperature-Dependent Convection Coefficient

For a surface that will have a different convection coefficient at nodes with different
temperatures, a temperature-dependent convection coefficient can be used. To set up this type
of convection coefficient, activate the "Temperature Dependent Curve" checkbox. Press
the "View/Edit Curve" button. The "Temperature Dependent Data" dialog shown in
Figure 8.8: Temperature Dependent Data Dialog

The convection coefficient can be dependent on two temperature values. Select the "Lookup
based on surface temperature" radio button if you want the value of the nodes to be used to
calculate the corresponding convection coefficient. Select the "Lookup based on average
temperature (surface and ambient)" radio button if you want the average of the
temperature at the node and the ambient temperature to be used to calculate the corresponding
convection coefficient. Type a descriptive name of the curve in the "Name" field. In the
"Convection Coefficient as a Function of Temperature" table, enter the convection
coefficient for each temperature value. The temperature range must enclose the expected
range of temperatures during the analysis. You can import data from a comma separated
value (*.csv) file using the "Import" button. When the curve is completed, press the
"OK" button. Select the appropriate curve in the "Temperature Dependent Curve" dropdown box. If you need to change values in an existing curve, select that curve and press the
"Modify" button.
For convection to be used properly during the analysis, a "Convection multiplier" must be
assigned in the "Multipliers" tab of the "Analysis Parameters" dialog. The "Convection
multiplier" scales the convection coefficient.
3/15/2010
151

Surface Radiation Load
Radiation can be applied to any surface in the model. To apply radiation, first access the
SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out menu and choose the "Point"
command. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and choose the "Select" pull-out
menu and select the "Surfaces" command. Click on the surfaces to which you want to apply
radiation and right-click anywhere in the display area. Multiple surfaces can be selected by
holding down the <Ctrl> key. In the menu that appears, select the "Add" pull-out menu and
then the "Surface Radiation Load" command. The dialog shown in Figure 8.9 will appear.
Figure 8.9: Surface Radiation Object Dialog

The radiation defined in this dialog is to the ambient conditions. For example, a hot plate on a
table exchanging heat with the surroundings. This radiation will not take into account the
exchange of heat from another body. In order to account for this type of heat transfer, you
must set up body-to-body radiation, which is discussed later in this chapter. Radiation is
defined by two parameters: an ambient temperature and a radiation function.
Ambient Temperature: Specify the temperature of the environment surrounding the surface
in this field.
Radiation Function: The radiation function, Frad, adjusts the amount of heat transferred by
radiation to account for absorptivity () of the cold surface, emissivity () of the hot surface,
and the view factor (Vm-s) between the model (m) and the surroundings (s). Absorptivity and
emissivity are properties of the two objects. At equilibrium, = . The view factor is
dependent on the geometry between the model and the surroundings and can be obtained from
heat transfer textbooks. The radiation function is defined as Frad = * Vm-s = * Vm-s, since
equilibrium is assumed.
For radiation to be used properly during the analysis, a "Radiation multiplier" must be
assigned in the "Multipliers" tab of the "Analysis Parameters" dialog. The "Radiation
multiplier" adjusts the radiation function.
152
3/15/2010

Surface Heat Flux
A surface heat flux can be applied to any surface in the model. To apply a surface heat flux,
first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out menu and choose
the "Point" command. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and choose the
"Select" pull-out menu and select the "Surfaces" command. Click on the surfaces to which
you want to apply a surface heat flux. Multiple surfaces can be selected by holding down the
<Ctrl> key. Right-click anywhere in the display area, select the "Add" pull-out menu and then
the "Surface Heat Flux" command. The dialog shown in Figure 8.10 will appear.
Figure 8.10: Surface Heat Flux Object Dialog

Heat Flux: Define the magnitude of the heat flux per unit area in this field. A positive value
will represent a heat source and a negative value will represent a heat sink.
For a surface heat flux to be used properly during the analysis, a "Convection multiplier"
must be assigned in the "Multipliers" tab of the "Analysis Parameters" dialog. The
"Convection multiplier" adjusts the heat flux magnitude.
Element Loads
Heat Generation
Internal heat generation can be applied to any part in a model. To apply internal heat
generation to a model, right-click the heading for the desired part in the tree view or go to
"Select: Select: Parts" in the pull down menus and select the desired part in the display area.
Hold down the <Ctrl> key while clicking to select additional parts or part headings. Rightclick on the selected part headings or within the display area. In the menu that appears, select
the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Heat Generation" command. The dialog shown
in Figure 8.11 will appear.
3/15/2010
153
Figure 8.11: Heat Generation Object Dialog

There are two types of internal heat generation available in the program:
Constant Internal Heat Generation
If the magnitude of the internal heat generation in a part will be constant throughout the part
regardless of the temperature in that area, a constant internal heat generation can be applied.
To apply a constant internal heat generation, enter the magnitude of the internal heat
generation per unit volume in the "Internal Heat Generation" field.
Temperature-Dependent Internal Heat Generation
If the magnitude of the internal heat generation in a part will vary throughout the part based on
the temperature in that area, a temperature-dependent internal heat generation can be applied.
To set up this type of internal heat generation, activate the "Temperature Dependent"
checkbox. Press the "Curve" button and the dialog shown in Figure 8.12 will appear.
Figure 8.12: Temperature Dependent Data Dialog

154
3/15/2010
In the table at the left side of the dialog, enter the temperature values and corresponding heat
generation rate for each. Click the "Add Row" button as needed for each additional data
point you wish to enter. The temperature values must be in ascending order. If the data is
entered out of sequence, or if additional temperature values are added later, clicking the
"Sort" button will automatically reorder the list. The temperature range must enclose the
expected range of temperatures that will occur during the analysis. You can import data from
a comma separated value (*.csv) file using the "Import CSV" command. You may also
export a curve for later use in another analysis by clicking the "Export CSV" command.
The table or graph may be printed using the "Print Table" or the "Print Plot"
command. When the curve is completed, press the "OK" button. Select the appropriate
curve in the "Temperature Dependent Curve" drop-down box. If you need to change
values in an existing curve, select that curve and press the "Modify" button.
An "Equation Editor.." command is also provided. This opens a dialog, as shown in Figure
8.13, that list various mathematical functions from which complex curves may be created.
The Equation Editor automatically fills in the heat generation versus temperature data table
based on user-specified start, end, and interval values. The "Overwrite Nodes" option
causes the Equation Editor data to replace any previously entered data points in the heat
generation versus temperature table.
Figure 8.13: Equation Editor Dialog

For internal heat generation to be used properly during the analysis, a "Heat generation
multiplier" must be assigned in the "Multipliers" tab of the "Analysis Parameters" dialog.
The "Heat generation multiplier" adjusts the magnitude of the internal heat generation.
Body-to-Body Radiation
Body-to-body radiation is a type of load that is applied to part of or all of a model. Body-tobody radiation accounts for heat transfer between parts of a model due to radiation. As
mentioned before, the radiation applied to a surface only transfers heat to the surroundings.
To set up body-to-body radiation, right-click in the display area with no objects selected and
select the "Body-to-Body Radiation" command. The dialog shown in Figure 8.14 will appear.
3/15/2010
155
Figure 8.14: Body-to-Body Radiation Dialog

The first thing to do when setting up body-to-body radiation is to determine the type of
emissivity that will be used in the model. If the emissivity on all of the surfaces will be
constant regardless of the temperature on the surface, you can proceed to the next step. If the
emissivity on any of the surfaces will vary with the temperature of the surface, press the
"Emissivity curves" button. The dialog shown in Figure 8.15 will appear.
Figure 8.15: Body-to-Body Radiation Temperature Dependent Emissivity Dialog
156
3/15/2010

Enter a descriptive name for the emissivity curve in the "Description" field. Then enter the
emissivity values at each temperature in the "Temperature Dependent Emissivity" table.
The temperature range must include all of the temperatures that the surface will experience.
Press the "Add curve" button to define multiple curves. Press the "OK" button when you
have defined all of the emissivity curves.
The next step for the body-to-body radiation setup is to define surfaces. To define a surface,
press the "Define Surfaces" button in the "Surface Parameters" section. The dialog
shown in Figure 8.16 will appear.
Figure 8.16: Body-to-Body Radiation Surfaces Dialog

Press the "Add surface" button. A dialog will appear which will allow you to select a
specific surface on a part to include in this surface or all of the surfaces on a part. If a part
consists of plate elements, you will also need to specify the side of the plate elements that will
be included in the surface. Pressing the "OK" button will return you to the previous dialog.
The information that you specified will appear in the "Definition of Surface" section. If you
define multiple surfaces, you can select the desired surface in the "Surface number" dropdown box. If the emissivity of the selected surface does not vary with temperature, select the
"Temperature independent" option in the "Type of emissivity" drop-down box and enter
the constant emissivity value in the "Temperature independent emissivity" field. If the
emissivity of the selected surface varies with temperature, select the "Temperature
dependent" option in the "Type of emissivity" drop-down box and select the appropriate
curve in the "Temperature dependent emissivity curve" field. To do this, emissivity
curves must first be defined by clicking the "Emissivity curves" button and providing the
necessary data, which consists of a table of emissivity versus temperature values. When you
have defined the emissivity for each surface, press the "OK" button.
The next step is to define the enclosures. An enclosure is comprised of one or more of the
surfaces that were defined in the previous step. The surfaces in an enclosure will exchange
heat with each other through radiation. A surface can only be included in one enclosure.
Select the enclosure that you want to define in the "Enclosure number" drop-down box and
press the "Add" button in the "Surfaces" section. A dialog will appear that will allow you
to select the surfaces that will be included in this enclosure. Once you select a surface, press
the "OK" button. Press the "Add" button again to add another surface. If you want to
include shadowing in this enclosure, select the "Included" option in the "Shadowing" dropdown box. Shadowing indicates that one body blocks the direct line of sight between surfaces
of another body. An example is nested cylinders as shown in Figure 8.17. The inside of the
3/15/2010
157

large cylinder could radiate across the diameter, passing right through the small cylinder. To
avoid this situation, shadowing should be included. Only surfaces defined in the enclosure
will have a shadowing effect.
Figure 8.17: Example of Shadowing

If the surfaces in the enclosure will also radiate to the environment, select the "Timeindependent" or "Time-dependent" option in the "Ambient temperature" drop-down box
and specify the ambient temperature in the "Ambient temperature value" field. Timedependent ambient temperature is only supported for transient thermal analyses (see next
chapter). If the "Time-dependent" option is selected, specify the load curve that the ambient
temperature will follow in the "Ambient temperature load curve" field.
After defining the parameters for all of the enclosures, press the "OK" button. The body-tobody radiation setup is now complete. The "Radiation multiplier" on the "Multipliers" tab
of the "Analysis Parameters" dialog and the "Radiation" tab will be used for body-to-body
radiation in the same way as they were used for radiation to the ambient surroundings.
Element Definition Options for Body-to-Body Radiation
The Element Definition dialog for thermal brick or 2-D elements includes an option to specify
the part as transparent or non-transparent for body-to-body radiation. The dialog for thermal
bricks is shown in Figure 8.18.
Figure 8.18: General Tab of the Element Definition Thermal Brick Dialog
(with the Advanced Settings Option Enabled)
158
3/15/2010

If a body is specified as "Transparent," body-to-body radiation will pass through it without
producing any shadowing effect. Otherwise, as the default "Non-transparent" type of part,
it will participate in body-to-body radiation by absorbing or emitting radiant heat and/or by
shadowing radiation between other parts.
Controlling Nonlinear Iterations

There are a few options that can be included in a steady-state heat transfer analysis that will cause
the solution process to be nonlinear. These include radiation, temperature-dependent material
models and temperature-dependent loads. When any of these options are included in an analysis,
an iterative process must be performed. The iterative process is controlled by the options on the
"Advanced" tab of the "Analysis Parameters" dialog. This dialog is shown in Figure 8.19.
Figure 8.19: Advanced Tab of the Analysis Parameters Dialog

If any of the conditions listed above exist in your model, activate the "Perform" checkbox
(this option is off by default). You can control how many times the processor can iterate on
the solution using the "Maximum number of iterations" field. The solution after this many
iterations will be used as the analysis result. In some cases, an adequate solution will be
converged upon before the maximum number of iterations. There are two values that are
calculated to determine the quality of the convergence. The first value is the corrective norm.
The corrective norm is calculated as:
(T
n
i =1
i old Ti new
)2
n
Where n is the total number of nodes in the model.
3/15/2010
159

The second value is the relative norm. This is calculated as:
(T
n
i =1
i old
Ti new
)2
(Ti )2
n
i =1
old
Where n is the total number of nodes in the model. The "Corrective tolerance" field can be
used to define the maximum value for the corrective norm. The "Relative tolerance" field
can be used to define the maximum value for the relative norm. The temperature of a node
after an iteration, Tcur, could be higher or lower than the final converged value. The value in
the "Relaxation parameter" field can be used to minimize the oscillations. This value will
be multiplied by the difference of the new and old temperatures for this node. The product
will be added to the old temperature. This value will be used as Tcur. A relaxation parameter
between 0.8 and 1 will provide the best results.
There are five options to decide to stop the iterative process. These can be selected in the
"Criteria" drop-down box. If the "Do all N iterations" option is selected, all of the
iterations specified in the "Maximum number of iterations" field will be performed. If the
"Stop when corrective norm < E1 (case 1)" option is selected, the iterations will stop when
the corrective norm is less than the value in the "Corrective tolerance" field. If the "Stop
when relative norm < E2 (case 2)" option is selected, the iterations will stop when the
relative norm is less than the value in the "Relative tolerance" field. If the "Stop when
either case 1 or 2" option is selected, the iterations will stop when either the corrective norm
is less than the value in the "Corrective tolerance" field or the relative norm is less than the
value in the "Relative tolerance" field. If the "Stop when both case 1 and 2" option is
selected, the iterations will stop when the corrective norm is less than the value in the
"Corrective tolerance" field and the relative norm is less than the value in the "Relative
tolerance" field.
Result Options
The Results environment is used to view the results of a steady-state heat transfer analysis.
For information on the options available for results presentation, refer to Chapter 3. The
following result options are available in the RESULTS pull-down menu:
Temperature: If this command is selected, the display will be based on the temperatures
from the steady-state analysis.
Heat Flux: If one of the commands in this pull-out menu is selected, the display will be based
on the flux value at the element centroid.
Heat Rate of Face: If this command is selected, the display will be based on the heat rate
normal to the associated face.
Precision of Heat Flux Magnitude: Precision is a measure of the adequacy of the mesh and
indicates regions requiring mesh refinement. A low numerical value of this measure is desirable.
It may be used to refine the grid for improved (lower numerical value) accuracy where the
numerical value of precision is high. The precision is based on the discontinuous (across element
boundaries) heat flux magnitude from element to element. It is calculated as follows:
160
3/15/2010
q i''
q i''
max
Pi =
2 q ' ' MAX
min
if q ' '
if q ' '
MAX
MAX
= 0
where:
Pi is the precision at node i,
q ''i
max
is the maximum heat flux magnitude at node i, obtained by finding the maximum
over its neighboring elements,
q ''i
is the minimum heat flux magnitude at node i, obtained by finding the minimum
min
over its neighboring elements,
q ''
MAX
is the global maximum of the heat flux magnitude.
Calculating the Total Flow: It is often important to know the total amount of heat flowing
through a surface of a model. This can be done in the Results environment. First, access the
RESULTS pull-down menu and select the "Heat Rate of Face" command.
Note: In order to inquire about and to sum the heat rate of element faces or model surfaces,
smoothing of the results must be disabled. To do this, go to the "Results Options" pull
down menu and deselect the "Smooth Results" command.
Select the element faces or model surface through which you want to know the total heat
flow. Access the INQUIRE pull-down menu and select the "Results" command. The
"Inquire: Results" dialog will appear as shown in Figure 8.20. Select the "Sum" option in
the "Summary:" drop-down box.
Figure 8.20: Inquire: Results Dialog

3/15/2010
161
162
3/15/2010
Exercise G
Infrared Detector Model
Brick Elements
Defining internal heat generation

Specifying a surface radiation load
Running a steady-state heat transfer analysis
Objective:
Determine the temperature of an infrared detector that is submerged in liquid nitrogen

and has a specified amount of heat generated by an electrical heater.
Geometry:
Use the file Exercise G.ach in the "Exercise G\Input File" folder copied to your computer
from the class directory or Solutions CD. Mesh the model using an absolute mesh size of
0.5 mm.
The cold finger has been built as two parts. One part represents the portion that is
submerged in the liquid nitrogen.
Loading:
The bottom 25 mm of the finger has a surface applied temperatures of -196C.

The top surface of the detector radiates to an ambient temperature of 27C with a
radiation function of 0.9.
The heat generated by the electrical heater is 0.025 J/(mm3*s).
Element:
Brick
3/15/2010
163
Materials:
Electrical heater and detector: Thermal conductivity = 1.00 J/(s*mm*C)

Cold finger: Thermal conductivity = 0.01 J/(s*mm*C)
Results:
Maximum Temperature
55.9 C
A completed archive with results (Exercise G.ach) is located in the "Exercise G\Results Archive" folder in
164
3/15/2010
Chapter
Transient Heat Transfer

Chapter Objectives
Discussion of when to use a transient heat transfer analysis

Overview of loading options unique to transient thermal analyses
Overview of results options unique to transient thermal analyses
Complete a transient heat transfer exercise
When to Use Transient Heat Transfer

A transient heat transfer analysis will determine how the temperature distribution in a model
changes over time. The magnitudes of the thermal loads can also vary throughout the
analysis. This type of analysis is useful for models that will experience different loads during
a typical application. A transient heat transfer analysis will require the mass density and
specific heat properties for each material in the model. The results are output at each time
step. In the "Analysis Parameters" dialog, there are three parameters in the "Event"
section. The "Number of time steps" field controls how often the results are calculated.
The "Time-step size" field determines the size of each time step. Equal time steps will be
used throughout the analysis. The "Output interval" field controls how often the calculated
results are output to the result files. It is recommended that this value be kept at 1.
Element Options
All of the element types available in a steady-state heat transfer analysis are also available in a
transient heat transfer analysis.
Loading Options
All of the loading options discussed in Chapter 8 are available for a transient heat transfer
analysis. Two loading features that are exclusive to a transient heat transfer analysis are
discussed under the heading, "Important Note Regarding Load Curve Factors," that follows
the "Load Curves" discussion (next page). One detail that should be noted is that the thermal
stiffness matrix may change during the analysis if certain loads or material models are used.
If any temperature-dependent materials or loads are present in the model, the matrix should be
recalculated to assure accurate results. Also, if convection or radiation loads are present, the
matrix must be recalculated to include the updated surface temperature. To reduce analysis
time, you can control how often the matrix is reformulated. This is done in the "Advanced"
tab of the "Analysis Parameters" dialog. Specify how often you want to reformulate the
matrix in the "Number of time steps between matrix reformulation" field. A large
number will have less accurate results, but a faster analysis time.
3/15/2010
165
Chapter 9: Transient Heat Transfer
Load Curves
Loads in a transient heat transfer analysis follow load curves. The load curves are used to
change the magnitudes of the loads throughout the analysis. Multiple load curves can be
defined in a model and multiple loads can follow a single load curve. A load can be assigned
to a load curve by selecting the appropriate load curve in the "Load Curve" drop-down box.
Load Curve 0 is the default value for most loads. This load curve will keep the load at the
specified magnitude throughout the analysis.
The load curves are set up in the "Analysis Parameters" dialog by pressing the "Load
Curves" button. The dialog shown in Figure 9.1 will appear.
Figure 9.1 Load Curve Input Dialog

You will define the curve by entering values in the "Time" and "Factor" columns. Each
load curve must start at time 0 and must go to time equal to or greater than the duration of the
event. The value in the "Factor" column will affect the loads assigned to this load curve.
Important Note Regarding Load Curve Factors:
For most loads, the value in the "Factor" column will be multiplied by the magnitude of the
load. One exception to this is a load curve applied to the ambient temperature of a convection
or radiation load. In this case, the value in the "Factor" column will be added to the
magnitude of the temperature. Another exception is when a load curve is used to control a
surface-applied or nodal-applied temperature. In this case, the value in the "Factor" column
is part of an expression including also the applied loads "Stiffness" and "Scale" values. The
result of this expression is added to the applied temperature (see "Controlling Nodal and
Surface Applied Temperatures" on page 168). In any case, the values used throughout the
analysis event are linearly interpolated between the values entered into the "Time" and
"Factor" columns whenever the time of the current calculation iteration doesnt correspond
exactly with a given load curve data point.
166
3/15/2010
Nodal Heat Source

In addition to the loading options available for steady-state heat transfer analyses, a nodal heat
source can be applied to a transient heat transfer analysis. The magnitude of a nodal heat
source can vary during the analysis. Nodal heat sources can be applied to any node on the
model. To add a nodal heat source, first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select
the "Shape" pull-out menu and choose the desired selection method. Then access the
SELECTION pull-down menu and choose the "Select" pull-out menu and select the
"Vertices" command. Click on the vertex or vertices to which you want to apply a nodal
heat source and right-click anywhere in the display area. In the menu that appears, select the
"Add" pull-out menu and then the "Nodal Heat Source" command. The dialog shown in
Figure 9.2 will appear if 1 node was selected before accessing this command.
Figure 9.2: Nodal Heat Source Object Dialog

Magnitude: Enter the desired magnitude of the nodal heat source in this field. A positive
magnitude represents heat flowing into the node. A negative magnitude represents heat
flowing out of the node.
Load Case / Load Curve: Specify the load curve that will control the magnitude of the
nodal heat source throughout the analysis. The load curve must be defined in the "Analysis
Parameters" dialog.
Activation Time: If you want the nodal heat source to start during the analysis, specify that
time in this field. The "Factor" of the specified load curve at time 0 will be applied at this
time in the analysis. The load curve will continue from this point. For example, if you have a
load curve defined for 10 seconds and apply it to a nodal heat source with an activation time
of 2 seconds, the factor at 0 seconds on the load curve will be applied 2 seconds into the
analysis. The factor at 5 seconds on the load curve will be applied 7 seconds into the analysis.
Description: This field allows you to apply a name for this set of nodal heat sources. This
description will be used to name each heat source in the tree view.
3/15/2010
167
Controlling Nodal and Surface Applied Temperatures

For a transient heat transfer analysis, the magnitudes of nodal and surface applied
temperatures can vary during the analysis. To control the magnitude of an applied
temperature, add the applied temperature to the model and specify the magnitude and stiffness
as explained in Chapter 8. It is recommended that the applied temperature have a large
stiffness value. Next, activate the "Varies with Time" checkbox. Specify the load curve
that will control the magnitude of the applied temperature throughout the analysis. The load
curve must be defined in the "Analysis Parameters" dialog. Specify a scale factor to be
applied to the load curve in the "Scale" field. The magnitude of the applied temperature will
be calculated at each time step using the following equation:
Factor * Scale
+ Tapplied temperature
Tnode =
Stiffness
T node is the value of the applied temperature at a specific time. T applied temperature is the
magnitude of the applied temperature defined in the FEA Editor environment. Factor refers to
the factor of the load curve specified in the "Load Case / Load Curve" field. Scale refers to
the value in the "Scale" field. Stiffness refers to the stiffness of the applied temperature.
The easiest and most intuitive way to control the temperature of nodes or surfaces is to do the
following. Specify an applied temperature "Magnitude" of zero (0). Set both the
"Stiffness" and "Scale" fields to the same high value. By default, both of these fields will
have a value of 1e11. Define a load curve with the values in the factor column equal to the
exact temperatures that you want for each time listed in the load curve table. Substituting
these values into the above equation, it can be seen that the Scale and Stiffness values will
cancel each other out and, since Tapplied temperature = 0, the resultant Tnode value will be equal to
the Factor throughout the analysis. In other words, the load curve will show actual
temperature versus time values when this technique is employed.
Result Options
All of the result options available for a steady-state heat transfer analysis are also available for
a transient heat transfer analysis. These results are calculated at each time step of the
analysis. Each time step can be viewed in the Results environment as a separate load case.
The commands in the "Load Case" pull-out menu in the RESULTS OPTIONS pull-down
menu can be used to toggle forward and backward through the load cases. An animation of a
result through all of the time steps can be created using the "File: Export: Animation"
command.
In addition to viewing the results in the display area, you can also create a graph of the results
at one or multiple nodes at each time step of an analysis. This can be done by selecting the
nodes and right-clicking in the display area. Select either the "Graph Value(s)" or the
Embed Graph" command, depending upon whether you want a separate graph window or a
graph embedded within the current presentation plot. A graph will appear plotting the
currently displayed value throughout the analysis duration.
168
3/15/2010
Exercise H
Transistor Case Model
Brick Elements

Specifying surface convection load
Setting up and running a transient heat transfer analysis
Objective:
Perform a transient heat transfer analysis to determine the cooling effect of air blown
over a transistor case.
Geometry:
Use the file, Exercise H.ach, in the "Exercise H\Input File" folder copied to your
computer from the class directory or Solutions CD. Use the default mesh size.
Loading:
The free ends of the wires are 150C. Apply convection to these surfaces at an ambient
temperature of 150C with a convection coefficient of 100 J/(s*C*mm2).
25C air is blown across the top surface of the case. At the beginning of the analysis, the
convection coefficient is 2.5E-7 J/(s*C*mm2). After 10 minutes, the convection
coefficient is 2.5E-3 J/(s*C*mm2).
Element:
Brick
Material:
Wires: Mass density = 8.933E-9 N*s2/mm/mm3

Thermal conductivity = 0.005 J/(s*mm*C)
Specific heat = 385,000 J/(N*s2/mm*C)
Case:
Mass density = 2.65E-10 N*s2/mm/mm3

3/15/2010
169

Analysis
Parameters:
Number of time steps = 20

Duration = 600 s
Load Curve:
Time (s)
Factor
600
10000
Results:
Minimum
Temperature at
10 Minutes
27.5 C
A completed archive with results (Exercise H.ach) is located in the "Exercise H\Results Archive" folder in
170
3/15/2010
Chapter
10
Thermal Stress
Chapter Objectives
Learn how to perform a thermal stress multiphysics analysis

Complete a thermal stress exercise
Multiphysics Overview
When two or more different analysis types are combined for the same model, it is referred to
as a multiphysics analysis. These analyses are categorized as either coupled or uncoupled,
with the majority of scenarios fitting the latter description.
An uncoupled multiphysics scheme consists of running an analysis one time and then using
the obtained results as a load in a different type of analysis, for which the solution is also run
only once. This is also referred to as one-way coupling because the results of the first
analysis affect the results of the second one. However, the results of the second analysis have
no effect on the results of the first one.
Conversely, in a fully coupled analysis (two-way coupling), two different types of solutions are
executed concurrently and iteratively until both converge. This method is used when the results
of each analysis are interdependent, such as in fluid thermal analyses where natural buoyancy
due to the temperature distribution drives a significant portion of the fluid flow. The
temperature profile affects the fluid flow and the flow, in turn, affects the temperature profile.
With the products included in the Autodesk Algor Simulation package, it is possible to
perform thermal stress analyses based on linear material models. For thermal stress analyses
involving time-dependent effects (such as inertia, acceleration, or damping) and/or involving
nonlinear material behavior, the MES package is required. For coupled multiphysics analyses
or any uncoupled analyses involving fluid flow, the CFD package is required. For any
multiphysics analyses involving electrostatics, the Professional version is required.
Depending upon the type of load being applied from a prior analysis to a subsequent analysis,
and also, depending upon the type of elements in the model, the meshes for each phase of the
multiphysics analysis may or may not have to be identical. Specifically, identical geometry is
required for multiphysics analyses involving line elements (such as trusses and beams) and
area elements (such as plates and membranes). For volume elements (such as bricks and
tetrahedra), the meshes do not have to be matched, assuming the involved loads also support
differing meshes. Node mapping is supported for nodal-based results that are available for
selection within the Analysis Parameter dialog. For other types of loads, identical meshes are
required. Node mapping uses a combination of interpolation and projection to map the nodal
results from one analysis to a differing mesh in a subsequent analysis. Though the meshes
may differ, parts with nodal results being applied to a subsequent analysis must also exist, and
have the same part number, in the subsequent analysis. In other words, even if the geometry
3/15/2010
171
Chapter 10: Thermal Stress

differs, the part numbering must be identical. For example, Part 3 in analysis B receives its
load from Part 3 in analysis A.
Parts that are not required for or have no effect on a particular phase of a multiphysics
analysis may be deactivated when running that phase of the analysis. An example of this
would be the air between conductors in an electrostatic analysis. It is needed to calculate
electrical field strength but has no effect on the stresses in a structural analysis. Another
example would be the pipes carrying fluid in an uncoupled fluid/thermal analysis. The pipes
are deactivated for the fluid flow analysis but activated for the thermal analysis.
Performing a Thermal Stress Analysis

The temperature profile from a steady-state or transient heat transfer analysis can be applied
to a static stress or Mechanical Event Simulation (MES) analysis. The temperature values at
each node will be compared to a stress free reference temperature for each part and the
difference will be multiplied by the thermal expansion coefficient to calculate thermal strain
and the resulting stresses. The geometry in both models may be identical but do not have to
be identical for this multiphysics analysis.
We will outline the procedure for completing a thermal stress analysis. Then, there is an
exercise in which the results of a specific time step from a transient heat transfer analysis will
be used as a thermal load in a subsequent linear static stress analysis.
To set up a thermal stress analysis, perform the following steps:

1.
Set up and run the steady-state or transient heat transfer analysis.
2.
Change the analysis type to either "Static Stress with Linear Material Models" or
"MES with Nonlinear Material Models". When prompted, choose "Yes" to create a
new design scenario rather than changing the initial design scenarios analysis type.
Note: Depending on the products that you own, the "MES with Nonlinear Material
Models" option may be replaced with either "MES with Linear Material Models" or
"Static Stress with Nonlinear Material Models".
3.
Load and constrain the model appropriately.
4.
In the "Element Definition" dialog for each part, enter a value in the "Stress Free
Reference Temperature" field.
5.
Make sure that there is a value in the "Thermal Coefficient of Expansion" field in the
"Element Material Specification" dialog for each part.
6.
Access the ANALYSIS pull-down menu and select the "Parameters" command.
7.
For a static stress analysis with linear material models, type "1" in the "Thermal"
column for each load case in which the thermal stress will be included.
Note that the load case multiplier does not directly multiply the nodal temperatures.
Rather, it multiplies the thermal load, which is based on the difference between the stress
free reference temperature and the nodal temperature. For example, say the nodal
temperature is 150F and the stress free temperature is 70F. This is a stress-producing T
of 80F. A multiplier of 2.0 does not mean that the nodal temperature is 300F (or a T of
230F). It means a T of 2*80F or 160F, which would be consistent with a nodal
temperature of 230F for this example.
172
3/15/2010

Go to the "Thermal/Electrical" tab. Select either the "Steady-state analysis" or
"Transient analysis" option in the "Source of nodal temperatures" drop-down box.
Press the "Browse" button next to the "Temperature data in file" field. Navigate to
the results file from the heat transfer analysis and press the "Open" button. If you have
selected the "Transient analysis" option in the "Source of nodal temperatures" dropdown box, you can select either the "Last" or "Specified" option in the "Time step
from heat transfer analysis" drop-down box. If you select the "Specified" option,
enter the desired time step in the "Time step" field.
8.
For an MES analysis, if you are using the results from a transient heat transfer analysis, set
the "Duration" and "Capture rate" equivalent to those used in the transient heat transfer
analysis. If the results of a steady-state heat transfer analysis are to be used as the source of
nodal temperatures, define a load curve that will be used to control the temperature
magnitude throughout the analysis. For temperatures from transient heat transfer analyses,
the load curve multiplier will be ignored. The temperatures will be read-in as-is and applied
without modification by the load curve. In the "Multiphysics" tab, change the "Source of
nodal temperatures" drop-down box to either the "Steady-state analysis" or "Transient
analysis" option. Specify the load curve that will be used to multiply the temperatures in
the "Nodal temperature load curve index" drop-down box. Press the "Browse"
button next to the "Temperature data in file" field. Navigate to the results file from the
heat transfer analysis and press the "Open" button. Note that for MES you must have the
Autodesk Algor Simulation MES or Autodesk Algor Simulation Professional
package. It is not included within the standard Simulation package.
9.
Run the analysis.
NOTE: When the preceding method is used to import nodal temperatures into a stress analysis, the
nodal temperature transfer is done via node mapping. So, the heat transfer and stress analysis
meshes need not be identical. Nonetheless, it is often appropriate and convenient to match the
meshes. The best way to ensure identical geometry is to run, or at least solid mesh, the heat
transfer model and then copy it to a new design scenario for the stress analysis phase.
There is an alternate method of importing temperature data. It is based on the nodal
coordinates, but without the interpolation and projection capabilities of the node mapping
process. For a node to receive a load, it must be located at the same coordinates as a node
with results in the prior analysis. Otherwise, a default nodal temperature will be applied.
For this alternate method, use the "Loads from File" command. This command is
accessed from the context menu obtained by right-clicking in the display area of the FEA
Editor with nothing selected. Other types of loads can also be applied using this command
(such as electrostatic reaction forces and fluid boundary reaction forces).
This alternate method has the disadvantage of not being able to apply differing results at
the same sets of coordinatesfor example, where two parts meet that are connected via
surface or edge contact. Let us suppose that thermal resistance is specified between the
contact surfaces. At such places, there will be two or more nodes existing at identical
coordinates (one for each part) and their temperatures will likely be different. The user
cannot control which nodal temperature gets applied at the matching coordinates in the
subsequent analysis. Whereas, in the outlined procedure, if three parts meet at a common
nodal location and each has a different temperature, all three temperatures will be applied
to the subsequent analysis. In other words, the unique temperatures of each part are
maintained where they meet.
3/15/2010
173

For more information regarding the alternate temperature application method, refer to the
program help files. Go to the "Help: Contents" and, from there; navigate to one of the
following sections:
"Algor Simulation: Setting Up and Performing the Analysis: Setting Up Part 1:

Linear: Loads and Constraints: Temperature"
"Algor Simulation: Setting Up and Performing the Analysis: Setting Up Part 2:

Nonlinear: Loads and Constraints: Temperature."
The pertinent information appears below the "Method 2" heading under the "Applying a
Temperature Profile from a Thermal Analysis" topic.
For more information concerning capabilities and/or limitations for other loads, consult the
specific sections of the help files dealing with each load type of interest.
174
3/15/2010
Exercise I
Disk Brake Rotor Heat-up and Stress
Brick Elements
Applying a surface heat flux load
Using the temperature results from a transient heat transfer analysis as a thermal
load in a linear static stress analysis
Objective:
Perform a transient heat transfer analysis to determine the temperature profile of

the rotor during braking. Choose the time step with the maximum temperature
differential and use these temperatures to determine the thermal stress via a second
design scenario. Use mirror planes to observe a full-model representation.
Geometry:
Use the one-eight symmetry model file, Exercise I.step, in the "Exercise I\
Input File" folder copied to your computer from the Solutions CD. Use 50% of
the default mesh size.
Thermal Loading:
Define a constant applied temperature of 100 F at the hub bore surface.

Specify a heat flux of 4000 in.lbf/(s*in2). The heat flux will decrease linearly
from the full magnitude to zero during the duration of the simulation event.
Constraints
(Stress Analysis):
Apply the appropriate symmetry boundary conditions to each of the model's

three planes of symmetry.
3/15/2010
175
Element:
Brick
Material:
Thermal Analysis:
Mass density = 6.9e-4 lbf*s2/in/in3

Thermal conductivity = 6 in*lbf/(s*in*F)
Specific heat = 500,000 in*lbf/(lbf*s2/in*F)
Stress Analysis:

Modulus of Elasticity = 18e6 psi
Poisson's Ratio 0.265
Thermal Coef. of Expansion = 7.2e-6 / F
Thermal Analysis
Parameters:
Duration = 20 s
Number of Steps = 10
Default Nodal Temperature = 100 F
Thermal
Load Curve:
Element Data
(Stress Analysis):
Time (s)
Factor
20
Stress Free Reference Temperature = 80 F
Results:
Maximum
Temperature at
12 Seconds
Maximum
von Mises Stress
~321 F
~22,923 psi
A completed archive with results (Exercise I.ach) is located in the "Exercise I\Results Archive" folder in the
class directory or in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer.
176
3/15/2010
Self
Study
Linear Dynamics Supplement
Chapter Objectives
Learn how to perform a response spectrum analysis

Learn how to perform a random vibration analysis
Learn how to perform a frequency analysis
Learn how to perform transient stress analyses (direct integration and modal superposition)
Overview
In Chapter 7, modal and critical buckling analyses were discussed and an exercise was
performed to demonstrate these two analysis types. In this section, we will explore the
remaining linear dynamics capabilities, excluding DDAM (Dynamic Design Analysis
Method), which is not included within the Autodesk Algor Simulation package. The
Professional version is necessary for performing DDAM analyses.
The exercises in this section are based on plate and beam element models that have already
been constructed for you. An Advanced Modeling Supplement is available that covers, in
detail, the tools available for building structured mesh brick, plate, beam, and 2-D models.
Note that the analysis parameters dialogs are unique for each type of linear dynamics analysis,
as they are also for other analysis types. To see the dialogs discussed within this section, be
sure to first choose the corresponding analysis type.
Response Spectrum Analysis

Response spectrum analysis is a method whereby the responses of a group of single-degreeof-freedom bodies to a dynamic excitation can be related to a similar response of a complex,
multi-degree-of-freedom system in the frequency domain. This differs from a time history
solution where the solution is solved for in the time domain instead of the frequency domain.
This is used during the simulation of an earthquake loading, when part of a model is fixed to
the ground, and another part is attached to a fixed structure. The structure will filter the
earthquake movement attenuating some frequency response and accentuating others. The part
of the model attached to the structure will have a different response spectrum than the part of
the model attached directly to the ground.
The response spectrum is a plot of the maximum response of a group of single-degree-offreedom bodies to a specified load function. The abscissa of the spectrum is the frequency or
period of the responding single-degree-of-freedom body, and the ordinate is the maximum
response. The maximum response may be given in terms of displacement, velocity or
acceleration. Each is related to the other by the frequency, or frequency squared.
3/15/2010
177
Self Study Linear Dynamics Supplement

To set up a response spectrum analysis, right-click on the "Analysis Type" heading in the
tree view and select the "Modify Analysis Parameters" command. Press the "Spectrum
Data" button in the "Analysis Parameters" dialog to access the "Response Spectrum
Analysis Input" dialog. The dialog shown in Figure SS.1 will appear.
Figure SS.1: Response Spectrum Analysis Input Dialog

The input spectrum can be in units of displacement, acceleration or gravity (g) versus the
period. Select the appropriate radio button in the "Input Spectrum Type" section. The
input spectrum can be applied with different magnitudes along each global direction. Specify
the factors that will be used to multiply the input spectrum along each of the three directions
in the "X Dir", "Y Dir" and "Z Dir" fields in the "Factors" section. If the "Cluster"
checkbox is activated, subsequent frequencies will be checked to determine if they are within
a certain percentage of each other specified in the "Cluster" field. If a value of 0.1 is entered
in the "Cluster" field and two subsequent frequencies are within 10% of each other, they will
be combined when applied to the model.
The actual input spectrum can be input using two methods. The first is to manually enter the
data in the "Period" and "Displacement" columns in the spreadsheet in the lower right
corner. (The "Displacement" column may be replaced with the "Acceleration" or "g"
column depending on the radio button selected in the "Input Spectrum Type" section.) The
second is to activate the "Generate Response Spectrum" checkbox in the upper right
corner. If this checkbox is active, you will define the frequency of the spectrum in the
"Oscillating Frequency (Hz)" field and the damping ratio in the "Damping Ration (0.01 =
1%)" field in the "Response Spectrum Parameters" section. You will also need to define a
scale factor in the "Scale Factor" field. The spectrum data will be automatically calculated
and will be displayed in the plot area.
After a response spectrum analysis is performed, the contribution of each natural frequency
from the modal analysis is displayed as a separate load case using the "Results Options:
Load Case" pull-out menu. In addition, you can use the "Results Options: Resultant"
178
3/15/2010

command to view the resultant of all of the solved natural frequencies. This result will be
displayed as the default when you first enter the Results environment.
Example of a Response Spectrum Analysis

A 1 inch square beam, 42 inches in length, has been constructed along the Y axis. The bottom
node should be fully fixed and TxRyz boundary conditions applied to all other nodes. A weight
of 1000 lbf is applied to the end of the beam opposite the fully fixed constraint. A modulus of
elasticity of 30e6 psi and a Poisson's ratio of 0.3 will be used. The beam should have a first
natural frequency of 1Hz from the modal analysis. Applying a g vs. period input of .304g at
.5sec and .304g at 1.5sec, we should obtain a theoretical displacement of around 3 inches.
Figure SS.2: Beam Model

To illustrate the concepts, we will use the archive file, Response Spectrum.ach, located in the
"Self Study Example Models\Input Files" folder in the class directory or in the copy of the
solutions folders on your computer.
Simulation"

"Open"

(*.ach)"
"Response Spectrum.ach"

drop-down box.
Select the file "Response Spectrum.ach" in the "Self Study
Example Models\Input Files" directory.
"Open"
"OK"

We will now define the element and material parameters for the beam.
3/15/2010
179

Right-click on the "Element Type" heading for Part 1 in
the tree view and select "Beam".
in the tree view.
Mouse
"Beam"
Mouse
"Modify Element
Definition"

Press the "OK" button to accept the default beam properties,
which correspond to a 1 inch square cross-section.
view.
"OK"
Mouse
"Modify Material"
"Edit Properties"
Press the "Edit Properties" button inside the Element

Material Selection window.
30e6
0.3

the "Element Material Specification" window.
Selection" window.
"OK"
"OK"
We will now apply the boundary conditions and the lumped mass.
Mouse
Mouse
"Add: Nodal Boundary

Condition"
Select the "Add:" pull-out menu and select the "Nodal

Boundary Condition" command.
"Fixed"
"OK"

Mouse
180
Access the SELECTION pull-down menu and then select

Click on the left-most point on the model to select the node
to add the fully fixed constraint to.

"Shape" pull-out menu. Select the "Rectangle"
command.
Draw a rectangle encompassing the entire model except the
fully fixed boundary condition that had just been added.
Mouse

Conditions"

Mouse
Activate the "Tx" checkbox.
Mouse
Activate the "Ry" checkbox.
Mouse
Activate the "Rz" checkbox.
"OK"
Mouse
Draw a rectangle encompassing the top right-most node on

the model. This is the node at the complete opposite end of
the model from the fully fixed node.
3/15/2010

Mouse
"Add: Nodal Lumped

Mass"

Lumped Mass" command.
"Units of mass"
Select the "Units of mass" radio button.
1000
Type "1000" in the "X Direction" field in the

"Mass/Weight" section. Had we chosen the "Units of mass"
option, we would have entered 2.588 (= 1,000/386.4).
"OK"
Press the "OK" button to accept and apply the value.
Next, we will specify that we want to calculate only the first natural frequency.
"Analysis: Parameters"
1

"Parameters" command.
Type "1" in the "Number of frequencies/modes to
calculate" field.
"OK"
We are now ready to perform the analysis and review the natural frequency results.
"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
Model Options"
"Transparent"
Mouse

Access the RESULTS OPTIONS pull-down menu, and
select the "Displaced Model Options" command.
Select the "Transparent" radio button to draw the
undisplaced shape in a transparent view.
Click the "X" at the top right hand corner of the Displaced
Model Options pop-up window to close it.
3/15/2010
181
Figure SS.3: Mode Shape 1 of the Beam

The solution for the first mode of vibration should be approximately 1.0 Hz. Next, we will
return to the FEA Editor environment and set up the response spectrum analysis.
"Tools: FEA Editor"
Access the TOOLS pull-down menu and then select "FEA

Editor" to transfer the model out of the results environment.
Mouse
"Set Current Analysis Type:

Linear: Response Spectrum"
"Yes"
"Spectrum Data"
1
"g vs. Period"
182
Select the "Set Current Analysis Type" pull-down menu

and select the "Linear" pull-out menu. Select the
"Response Spectrum" command.
Choose the "Yes" button to answer the question "Would
you first like to copy your design scenario?".
Access the ANALYSIS pull-down menu and choose
"Parameters"
Press the "Spectrum Data" button on the "Analysis
Parameters Response Spectrum" pop-up window so
that we can access the "Response Spectrum Analysis
Input" screen.
Confirm that "1" is entered in the "Use modal results
from Design Scenario" field to specify the design scenario
where our modal results are located.
Select the "g vs. Period" radio button in the "Input
Spectrum Type" section.
Type "1" in the "Z Dir" field in the "Factors" section.
"Insert Row"
Press the "Insert Row" button to have two total rows for
period vs. g data.
3/15/2010

0.5
Type "0.5" in the first row of the "Period" column.
0.304
Type "0.304" in the first row of the "g" column.
1.5
Type "1.5" in the second row of the "Period" column.
0.304
Type "0.304" in the second row of the "g" column.
"Apply"
Click the "Apply" button. The input screen should look

like figure SS.4.
Figure SS.4: Response Spectrum Analysis Input
"OK"
"OK"
Press the "OK" button to accept the data entered into the
"Response Spectrum Analysis Input" window and exit.
Press the "OK" button close the "Analysis Parameters
Response Spectrum" window.
We are now ready to perform the analysis and to review the response spectrum results. We
know that the displacement should be approximately 3 inches. In the results environment we
can review both the displacements and the stresses that are produced by the assumed response
spectrum loading.
3/15/2010
183

"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
Magnitude"

Access the RESULTS pull-down menu and select the
"Displacement" pull-out menu. Select the "Magnitude"
command.
The displacement magnitude should be approximately 3.0 inches. A completed archive of

this model, including results, (Response Spectrum.ach) is located in the "Self Study Example
Models\Results Archive" folder in the class directory or Solutions CD.
184
3/15/2010
Exercise SS-1
Tower Model Response Spectrum Analysis
Plate and Beam Elements
Objective:
Perform a modal analysis of the model shown below and then a response spectrum
analysis (using a second design scenario). Solve for the first 7 natural frequencies.
Geometry:
Use the file Exercise SS-2.ach in the class directory (or the "Self Study Exercises\
Exercise SS-1\Input File" folder copied to your computer).
The plates are 2" thick.
The beams have a 1" x 1" square cross-section.
Loading:
A displacement vs. period spectrum with an oscillating frequency of 20 Hz and a

damping ratio of 5% of critical damping is applied in the X, Y and Z directions.
Constraints:
The bottom of the four supports are fully constrained.
Element:
Plate and beam
Material:
Both beams and plates are Steel (AISI 4130).
3/15/2010
185
Results:
Response Spectrum Resultant Load Case Results
von Mises Stress
(psi)
Beam & Truss

Worst Stress
(psi)
Maximum
Deflection
(in)
~28,541
~61,138
~2.48
A completed archive of this model, including results, Exercise SS-1.ach, is located in the "Self Study
Exercises\Exercise SS-1\Results Archive" folder in the class directory or in the copy of the solutions folders
copied to your computer.
186
3/15/2010
Random Vibration Analysis

A random vibration analysis is used to find out how a device or structure responds to steady
shaking of the kind you would feel riding in a truck, rail car, rocket (when the motor is on)
and so on. Also, objects that are riding in the vehicle, such as on-board electronics or cargo of
any kind, may require a random vibration analysis. The input for a random vibration analysis
is a power spectrum density (PSD).
To set up a random vibration analysis, right-click on the "Analysis Type" heading in the tree
view and select the "Modify Analysis Parameters" command. Press the "Analysis
Data" button in the "Analysis Parameters" dialog to access the "Random Vibration
Analysis Input" dialog shown in Figure SS.5.
Figure SS.5: Random Vibration Analysis Input Dialog

First, you must specify if you will use a PSD with units of acceleration squared per Hz
["Accel Squared/Hz vs. Freq (Hz)"] or gravity squared per Hz ["g Squared/Hz vs.
Freq (Hz)"]. Do this by selecting the appropriate radio button within the "Input Power
Spectrum Density (PSD) Type" section of the dialog.
If you want consecutive natural frequencies that are close together to be clustered, activate the
"Cluster" checkbox and specify the desired factor in the "Cluster" field. If a value of 0.1 is
entered in the "Cluster" field and two subsequent frequencies are within 10% of each other,
they will be combined when applied to the model.
The damping ratio must be defined in the "Damping Ratio" field. Specify the direction of the
PSD or the two directions of the cross-spectral density by selecting the appropriate radio button in
the "Excitation Type" section. The input spectrum density must be applied along a global axis.
3/15/2010
187

The input spectrum density can be defined in the table to the right by entering the appropriate
amplitude values for each frequency. The units of the "Amplitude" column will depend on
the selection in the "Input Power Spectrum Density (PSD) Type" section.
After a random vibration analysis is performed, the contribution of each natural frequency
from the modal analysis is displayed as a separate load case using the "Results Options:
Load Case" pull-out menu. In addition, you can use the "Results Options: Resultant"
command to view the resultant of all of the solved natural frequencies. This result will be
displayed as the default when you first enter the Results environment.
Example of Random Vibration Analysis

A beam model 50 inches in length has been constructed along the X axis. The cross-section
area is 0.1 in2. The node at the left end should be fully fixed. All of the other nodes have all
DOF except translation in the X direction constrained. Masses of 75 lbf*s2/in are applied to a
point 30 inches from the fixed end and at the free end. A modulus of elasticity of 30e6 psi
and a Poisson's ratio of 0.3 will be used. The beam should have a first natural frequency of
3.76118 Hz and a second natural frequency of 10.9977 Hz from the modal analysis. A g2/Hz
vs. frequency PSD of 0.15 will be applied in the X direction. The theoretical displacement of
the nodes where the forces are applied should be 3.7597 in and 5.2126 in.
Figure SS.6: Beam Model

To illustrate the concepts, we will use the archive file, Random Vibration.ach, located in the
"Self Study Examples\Input Files" folder in the class directory or in the copy of the solutions
188

Simulation"

"Open"

(*.ach)"

drop-down box.
3/15/2010

"Random Vibration.ach"
Select the file "Random Vibration.ach" in the "Self Study

Examples\Input Files" directory.
"Open"
"OK"

We will now define the element and material parameters for the beam.
Right-click on the "Element Type" heading for Part 1 in
the tree view and select "Beam".
in the tree view.
Mouse
"Beam"
Mouse
"Modify Element
Definition"

Type "0.1" in the first row of the "A" column. The
constraint scheme we are using only permits purely axial
motion. Since there will be no flexural effects, only the
cross-sectional area will be significant. Therefore, we do
not have to change the other properties.
Press the "OK" button to accept the beam cross-sectional
properties and to exit the "Element Definition" dialog.
view.
0.1
"OK"
Mouse
"Modify Material"
"Edit Properties"
Press the "Edit Properties" button inside the Element

Material Selection window.
30e6
0.3

the "Element Material Specification" window.
Selection" window.
"OK"
"OK"
We will now apply the boundary conditions and the lumped mass.
View"
Mouse

command.
Click on the left-most point on the model to select the node
to add the fully fixed constraint to.
Mouse

Condition"

"Fixed"
"OK"
3/15/2010
189

Mouse

Draw a rectangle encompassing the entire model except the
fully fixed boundary condition that had just been added.
Mouse

Conditions"

"Fixed"
Mouse
Deactivate the "Tx" checkbox.
"OK"
Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
Draw a rectangle encompassing the right-most node on the

model. This is the node at the complete opposite end of the
model from the fully fixed node.
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, draw a box around the node
located four nodes to the left of the selected node.
Mouse
"Add: Nodal Lumped

Masses"

Lumped Masses" command.
"Units of mass"
Select the "Units of mass" radio button.
75
Type "75" in the "X Direction" field in the

"Mass/Weight" section. This corresponds to a weight of
28,980 lbf (= 75 * 386.4) at each node.
"OK"
Press the "OK" button to accept and apply the value.
Next, we will specify that we want to calculate only the first two natural frequencies.
2

calculate" field.
"OK"
We are now ready to perform the analysis and review the natural frequency results.
"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
Model Options"
"Transparent"
Mouse
Previous" or
Next"
190

then display the model in the Results environment.
Access the RESULTS OPTIONS pull-down menu, and
Select the "Transparent" radio button to draw the
undisplaced shape in a transparent view.
Click the "X" at the top right hand corner of the Displaced
Model Options pop-up window to close it.
Access the RESULTS OPTIONS pull-down menu and select
the "Load Case" pull-out menu. Use the "Previous" or
"Next" commands to switch between the two natural
frequencies that were calculated.
3/15/2010

The first natural frequency should be approximately 3.76 cycles/s and the second one about
11.0 cycles/s. Next, we will return to the FEA Editor environment and set up the random
vibration analysis.
"Tools: FEA Editor"
Access the TOOLS pull-down menu and then select "FEA

Editor" to transfer the model out of the results environment.
Mouse

Linear: Random Vibration"
"Yes"
"Analysis Data"
1
Select the "Set Current Analysis Type" pull-down menu

"Random Vibration" command.
Choose the "Yes" button to answer the question "Would
you first like to copy your design scenario?".
Access the ANALYSIS pull-down menu and choose
"Parameters"
Press the "Analysis Data" button on the "Analysis
Parameters" dialog.
Confirm that "1" is shown in the "Use modal results from
Design Scenario" field to specify the design scenario
where our modal results are located.
0.01
Type "0.01" in the "Damping Ratio" field.
"g Squared/Hz vs. Freq (Hz)"
Select the "g Squared/Hz vs. Freq (Hz)"radio button in

the "Input Power Spectrum Density (PSD) Type" section.
"Insert Row"
Press the "Insert Row" button.
Type "0" in the first row of the "Frequency (Hz)" column.
0.15
Type "0.15" in the first row of the "Amplitude" column.
100
Type "100" in the second row of the "Frequency (Hz)"

column.
0.15
Type "0.15" in the second row of the "Amplitude" column.
"Apply"
Click the "Apply" button. The dialog should appear as

shown in Figure SS.7.
3/15/2010
191
Figure SS.7: Random Vibration Analysis Input

Press the "OK" button to accept the data entered into the
"Random Vibration Analysis Input" dialog and exit.
Press the "OK" button close the "Analysis Parameters
Random Vibration" dialog.
"OK"
"OK"
We are now ready to perform the analysis and review the random vibration results. We know that
the maximum displacement result should be approximately 5.21 inches. In the results environment
we can review both displacement and stress as a result of performing a random vibration analysis.
"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
"Results Options: Resultant"
(deselect}
Magnitude"

Next"

Access the RESULTS OPTIONS pull-down menu and ensure
that the "Resultant" option is NOT selected (that is, if there is
a checkmark next to it, click the option to deselect it).
command.
The displacement magnitude should be
approximately 5.216 inches for Load Case 1.
Access the RESULTS OPTIONS pull-down menu and select
the "Load Case" pull-out menu. Use the "Next" commands
to see the second load case. The displacement magnitude
should be approximately 0.169 inches for Load Case 2.
A completed archive of this model including results, Random Vibration.ach, is located in the
"Self Study Examples\Results Archives" folder in the class directory or in the copy of the
192
3/15/2010
Exercise SS-2
Tower Model Random Vibration Analysis
Objective:
Perform a random vibration analysis of the model below (using a second design
scenario). The modal analysis has already been completed and its results are included
within the input file. The first seven (7) natural frequencies were calculated. Determine
the stresses and displacement due to random vibration (resultant of 7 modes).
Geometry:
Use the file, Exercise SS-2.ach, in the class directory (or the "Self Study Exercises\
Exercise SS-2\Input File" folder copied to your computer). The beams have a 2 inch
square cross-section and the plates are 2 inches thick (predefined).
Loading:
An acceleration2/Hz vs. frequency PSD with the following values will be applied in the
X and Y directions (cross-spectral density):
Frequency (Hz)
Amplitude
0
20
40
50
75
250
200
100
The system has a damping ratio of 5% of critical damping.
3/15/2010
193
Constraints:
The bottom of each of the four supports is fully constrained.
Elements:
Plate and beam.
Material:
Results:
Random Vibration Resultant Load Case Results
von Mises Stress
(psi)
Beam & Truss

Worst Stress
(psi)
Maximum
Deflection
(in)
~4,578
~10,416
~0.19
Exercises\Exercise SS-2\Results Archives" folder in the class directory or in the copy of the solutions
194
3/15/2010
Frequency Response
When a model is subjected to forced harmonic excitation, its response takes place at the same
frequency as that of the excitation. Common sources of harmonic excitation are unbalanced
rotating machines and forces produced by reciprocating machines. These excitations can be
undesirable to structural safety if large vibration amplitudes develop. Dampers and absorbers
are often used to prevent this.
Although pure harmonic excitation is less likely to occur than periodic or other types of
excitation, understanding the behavior of a model as it undergoes response to harmonic
excitation is essential in order to comprehend how it will respond to more general types of
excitation. Additionally, most field vibration problems are due to excitations that excite only
single modes of the model. Frequency response can be used to simulate these situations, and
to predict support loads and dynamic stresses caused by the excitation. Frequency response
can be specified as either a force or displacement at some point in the system. The force or
displacement can be applied to any node in any global direction, and the loads can be
separated by a phase angle. Vortex shedding due to wind loads can also cause harmonic
excitation perpendicular to the wind direction. Displacements are generally used to simulate
the effect of a vibrating component.
To set up a frequency response analysis, right-click on the "Analysis Parameters" heading in
the tree view and select the "Modify Analysis Parameters" command. Press the "Analysis
Setup" button in the "Analysis Parameters" dialog to access the "Frequency Response
Analysis Input" dialog. This dialog consists of four tabs. The "Exciting Frequencies" tab is
shown in Figure ss.8. This is the first tab in which you will need to specify data.
Figure SS.8: Excited Frequencies Tab of the Frequency Response Analysis Input Dialog
You can group frequencies together in multiple frequency indices in this tab. Enter the
frequencies that you want to be in a certain frequency index in the "Frequency (Hz)"
column. If you want to create a new frequency index, press the "New" button. If you want
to apply all of the natural frequencies calculated during the modal analysis, activate the
3/15/2010
195

"Include Natural Frequencies" checkbox. If this checkbox is activated, the natural
frequencies will be included in each frequency index.
The second tab in which you will specify data is the "Excited Nodes" tab, shown in Figure SS.9.
Figure SS.9: Excited Nodes Tab of the Frequency Response Analysis Input Dialog
If all of the applied loads will be applied at the same frequency, activate the "Loads of the
Same Frequency" checkbox. If this checkbox is activated, a square root sum of squares
(SRSS) combination will be performed. You can apply the loads to individual node sets.
Each node set can consist of a particular node or all of the nodes with boundary conditions.
If you want to apply a load to a particular node, select the "Node Number of Applied
Excitation" radio button in the "Node Number" section and specify the node number in the
field to the right. To determine the node numbers, use the "Analysis: Check Model"
command to load the model in the Results environment. You can determine the number of a
node in two ways. The first is to select the node on the model and use the "Inquire: Results"
command. The node number will be displayed in the resulting dialog. The second method is to
zoom in on the node and select the "Display Options: Show Node Numbers" command. If
you want the load applied to all of the nodes with boundary conditions, select the "Base
Acceleration Motion" radio button in the "Node Number" section.
The load can have a magnitude of either acceleration or force. Select the appropriate radio
button in the "Type of Excitation" section. The load must be applied along a single global
direction. Select the appropriate radio button in the "Direction of Excitation" section.
Select the frequency index of the set of frequencies that you want to apply to this node set in
the "Index of Exciting Frequency Definition" drop-down box. Specify the factor that will
be used to multiply the magnitude in the "Scale Factor for Amplitudes" field. If the
"Loads of the Same Frequency" checkbox is activated, you will be able to specify a phase
shift for the frequency in the "Phase Shift (in degrees) of the Applied Excitation" field.
The next tab in which you will specify data is the "Damping Ratios" tab, shown in Figure SS.10.
196
3/15/2010
Figure SS.10: Damping Ratios Tab of the Frequency Response Analysis Input Dialog
Define a damping ratio over the entire range of frequencies that will be used in the analysis.
This must also include the natural frequencies if the "Include Natural Frequencies"
checkbox has been activated in the "Exciting Frequencies" tab. The damping ratio will be
linearly interpolated between frequency values.
The last tab in which you will specify data is the "Amplitudes" tab, shown in Figure SS.11.
Figure SS.11: Amplitudes Tab of the Frequency Response Analysis Input Dialog
3/15/2010
197

Define a force or acceleration amplitude over the entire range of frequencies that will be used
in the analysis in the appropriate column. This must also include the natural frequencies if the
"Include Natural Frequencies" checkbox has been activated in the "Exciting
Frequencies" tab. The amplitude will be linearly interpolated between frequency values.
Select the appropriate radio button in the graph section to view the desired plot.
After a frequency response analysis is performed, you will be able to review the results of
each applied frequency in a separate load case using the "Results Options: Load Case" pullout menu. For each frequency, you can view the in-phase, out-of-phase and SRSS responses.
You can select the response that you want to view in the "Results Options: Response Type"
pull-out menu.
198
3/15/2010
Exercise SS-3
Tower Model Frequency Response
Objective:
Perform a frequency response analysis of the model below (using a second design
scenario). Solve for the first 7 natural frequencies. The modal analysis has already been
completed and its results are included within the input file.
Geometry:
Exercise SS-3\Input File" folder copied to your computer.
Loading:
A 6 g acceleration in the X direction is applied to the base nodes at the following

frequencies:
10 Hz
25 Hz
75 Hz
100 Hz
The model has 5% of critical damping.
Constraints:
Element:
Plate and beam
Material:

3/15/2010
199
Results:
Frequency Response Load Case 1 Results (SRSS)
von Mises Stress
(psi)
Beam & Truss

Worst Stress
(psi)
Maximum
Deflection
(in)
~6,314
~40,650
~0.75
Exercises\Exercise SS-3\Results Archives" folder in the class directory or in the copy of the solutions
200
3/15/2010
Transient Stress (Modal Superposition) Analysis

The "Transient Stress (Modal Superposition)" analysis type is just like the other modal
superposition analyses in that it will require the results from a modal analysis. All of the
element types available in a modal analysis are supported in a transient stress (modal
superposition) analysis. All of the constraint options available in a static stress analysis are
also available. The loading options for a transient stress (modal superposition) analysis are
different from a static stress analysis. Pressures, thermal loads and displacements are not
available in a transient stress (modal superposition) analysis. The only loads available are
nodal forces and nodal moments. Instead of defining these loads in the display area, these loads
are defined in the "Analysis Parameters" dialog. This dialog is shown in Figure SS.12.
Figure SS.12: Loads Tab of the Transient Stress (Modal

Superposition) Analysis Parameters Dialog
Load curves can be set up in the same manner as in a transient heat transfer analysis by
pressing the "Load Curves" button. The factor will multiply the magnitude of the force or
moment to which it is applied. You must define the "Number of time steps" and "Timestep size" in the "Event" section. The damping factor for the analysis must be specified in
the "Damping Factor (Fraction of Critical)" field. Forces and moments will be applied to
nodes using the spreadsheet in the "Loads" tab. Specify the node to which the load will be
applied in the next available row of the "Node Number" column. To determine the node
numbers, use the "Analysis: Check Model" command to load the model in the Results
environment. You can determine the number of a node in two ways. The first is to select the
node on the model and use the "Inquire: Results" command. The node number will be
displayed in the resulting dialog. The second method is to zoom in on the node and select the
"Display Options: Show Node Numbers" command. Specify the load curve that will be
used to multiply the magnitude of the force in the "Load Curve" column. In the "Type"
column, enter a 0 if the load will be applied against translation (force) or a 1 if the load will be
applied against rotation (moment). Use the "X Scale", "Y Scale" and "Z Scale" columns to
3/15/2010
201

control the direction of the force or moment. There are two methods to control the magnitude
and direction of the force or moment. The first is to enter the direction cosines, or a unit
vector, in the "X Scale", "Y Scale" and "Z Scale" columns. The SRSS of these three values
must be equal to 1. Then enter the actual magnitude of the force at each time step as the
factor in the load curve. The second method is to enter the components of the load in the "X
Scale", "Y Scale" and "Z Scale" columns. Then use the factor in the load curve to multiply
the magnitude of the load. If you want the load to start during the analysis, specify that time
in the "Activation Time" column. The factor of the specified load curve at time 0 will be
applied at this time in the analysis. The load curve will continue from this point. For
example, if you have a load curve defined for 10 seconds and apply it to load with an
activation time of 2 seconds, the factor at 0 seconds on the load curve will be applied 2
seconds into the analysis. The factor at 5 seconds on the load curve will be applied 7 seconds
into the analysis.
One additional load that can be applied in a transient stress (modal superposition) analysis is
ground motion. This can be set up in the "Options" tab. This can be seen in Figure SS.13.
Figure SS.13: Options Tab of the Transient Stress (Modal

Superposition) Analysis Parameters Dialog
Ground motion will be applied as a translation of all nodes with a constraint against
translation in the direction in which the ground motion is applied. First a load curve must be
created by pressing the "Load Curves" button. The factor of the load curve must be the
magnitude of the displacement at that time. To set up the ground motion, select the
"Translation" option in the "Ground Motion Type" drop-down box and press the
"Setup" button. The dialog shown in Figure SS.14 will appear.
202
3/15/2010
Figure SS.14: Ground Motion Setup Dialog

There is a separate section to control the ground motion in each global direction. Select the
appropriate load curve in the "Load Curve" drop-down box if you want the ground motion
to be applied along that direction. If you want the load to start during the analysis, specify
that time in the "Activation Time" field. The factor of the specified load curve at time 0 will
be applied at this time in the analysis. The load curve will continue from this point. For
example, if you have a load curve defined for 10 seconds and apply it to a load with an
activation time of 2 seconds, the factor at 0 seconds on the load curve will be applied 2
seconds into the analysis. The factor at 5 seconds on the load curve will be applied 7 seconds
into the analysis.
3/15/2010
203

The "Transient Stress (Direct Integration)" analysis type does not require modal results.
This analysis type works best when the time is relatively short and conditions are violent,
such as conditions of shock.
The transient stress (direct integration) analysis setup is very similar to transient stress (modal
superposition) analysis. However, in addition to specifying the forces and moments in the
"Analysis Parameters" dialog, the nodal forces and nodal moments can also be applied in
the display area of the FEA Editor environment, in the same manner as for a static stress
analysis. Simply select one or more nodes, right-click, and choose the "Add: Nodal Force"
or "Add: Nodal Moment" command. The value in the "Load Case / Load Curve" field of
the "Create Nodal Force Object" or "Create Nodal Moment Object" dialog box will
specify the load curve that will be used to multiply the nodal load.
In addition, pressures can be applied to surfaces in a transient stress (direct integration) analysis
in the same manner as they are for a static stress analysis. There will be an additional "Load
Curve" drop-down box within the "Create Surface Pressure/Traction Object" dialog to
select the load curve that will be used to multiply the magnitude of each pressure load.
Ground motion can be set up for a transient stress (direct integration) analysis in the same
manner as for a transient stress (modal superposition) analysis.
204
3/15/2010
Exercise SS-4
Pressure Vessel Model Transient Stress (Direct Integration)
Brick Elements
Objective:
Perform a transient stress (direct integration) analysis on the pressure vessel shown
below.
Geometry:
Use the file Exercise SS-4.igs in the class directory (or in the "Self Study Exercises\
Exercise SS-4\Input File" folder copied to your computer). Mesh the model at 75% of
Loading:
Initially, the large and small cylinders have an internal pressure of 0 psi. The pressure
ramps up to 1,000 psi at 5 seconds. The pressure is then ramped up to 3,000 psi at
10 seconds. Specify 100 time steps of 0.1 seconds each.
The alpha and beta damping coefficients are 0.05.
Constraints:
The ends of the large cylinder are fully constrained.
Element:
Brick
Material:
Aluminum (6061-T6)
3/15/2010
205
Results:
Time
(seconds)
Maximum
von Mises Stress (psi)
0.1
5
127
25,591
10
76,849
A completed archive of this model including results, Exercise SS-4.ach is located in the "Self Study
Exercises\Exercise SS-4\Results Archive" folder in the class directory or in the copy of the solutions folders
on your computer.
206
3/15/2010
Appendix A Finite Element Method Using

Hand Calculations
3/15/2010
207
Appendix A Finite Element Method Using Hand Calculations
208
3/15/2010
Model Description and Governing Equations

In this appendix, we will illustrate how FEA calculations on the truss structure shown below
can be performed by hand. Figure A.1 shows the model to be analyzed.
Figure A.1: System of Trusses to be Solved by Hand

Given:
F = 10,000 lbs force
L = 120 in length
A = 2 in 2 area
E = 30x106 psi modulus of elasticity
= 45
Hand Calculations:
First, we know that the sum of the forces in the X and Y directions must be 0 at Node 1.
F
F
=F13 cos F14 = 0
(1)
=F12 + F13 sin 10,000 = 0
(2)
Since we will assume small deflections, we can ignore the rotation of the trusses. Consider
the elongation of each member as the deflection along the original position.
3/15/2010
209
Figure A.2: Forces and Deflections of Each Member
F12 L12
y
AE
F L
14 = 14 14 x
AE
F13L13
13 =
y sin x cos
AE
12 =
Substituting for x and y gives
F13L13 F12 L12

F L
=
sin 14 14 cos
AE
AE
AE
(3)
Solving equations 1, 2 and 3 for the three unknown forces gives

F12=7,929
F13=2,929
F14=-2,071
12=3,965
13=1,465
14=1,036
x=0.00414
y=-0.01586
F = 10,000 lbs force
L = 120 in length
A = 2 in 2 area
E = 30x106 psi modulus of elasticity
= 45
210
3/15/2010
Hand-Calculation of the Finite Element Solution

To see how a hand-calculation would be performed using the finite element method, we will
now present the construction of the stiffness matrix for each element.
For the element from point 1 to point 2:
0 0
AE 0 1
k=
L 0 0
0 1
0
0 1 (2 ) 30 x10 6
=
0 0
120
0 1
0
0 0
0 1
0 0
0 1
0
0 1
0 0
0 1
0
0.5 0.5 0.5

0.5
0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5 (2 ) 30 x10 6
AE
k=
=
0.5
L 2 0.5 0.5 0.5
120 2
0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5

0.5
0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5

0.5
0.5
0.5 0.5 0.5
AE 0
k=
L 1
0 1
0 0
0 1
0 0
0
0 (2) 30 x10 6
=
0
120
1
0
0 1
0 0
0 1
0 0
0
0
0
Combine the individual matrices to create the total stiffness matrix:
0.354
1.354
0.354
1.354
0
0
0
1
k = (500,000 )
0.354 0.354
0.354 0.354
1
0
0
0
0 0 0.354 0.354 1
0 1 0.354 0.354 0
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0 1
0
0 0
0.354
0.354
0
0.354
0.354
0
0 0
0 0
0
0
1
0 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
The force vector can be constructed. The horizontal and vertical forces at point 1 are known.
0
10,000
F2 x
F =
F2 y
F3 x
F3 y
3/15/2010
211

The displacement vector can also be constructed. The only two unknowns are the horizontal
and vertical displacements of point 1. All other displacements are 0.
D1x
D
1y
0
D=
0
0
0
Now we can invert the stiffness matrix and solve the equation:
{D} = [K ]1 {F }
After solving the above equation, the displacement results are:
D1x = 0.414 x10 2 in

D1 y = 1.59 x10 2 in
The stresses can be calculated by dividing the axial forces by the cross-sectional area.
1 = 3965 psi
2 = 1471 psi
3 = 1035 psi
Autodesk Algor Simulation Example

Figure A.3 below shows the truss system as modeled in the user interface. It is loaded and
constrained as illustrated previously in Figure A.1 (page 209).
Figure A.3: Truss System Model
212
3/15/2010

Figure A.4 shows the results of the analysis. The X and Y components of the displacement
are shown. Table A.1 shows a comparison of the program results to the hand calculation
results. An archive of the model including the results (Truss Example.ach) is available in the
"Appendix A Example\Results Archive" folder of the class directory or in the copy of the
Figure A.4: Displacements in the X and Y directions
Table A.1: Comparison of Autodesk Algor Simulation Results to the Hand Calculations
1x
1y
12
13
14
Hand Calculations
Autodesk Algor
Simulation
0.00414 in
-0.0159 in
3965 psi
1465 psi
-1036 psi
0.00414 in
-0.0159 in
3964 psi
1464 psi
-1036 psi
3/15/2010
213
214
3/15/2010
Appendix B Analysis Types in Autodesk

Algor Simulation
3/15/2010
215
Appendix B Analysis Types in Autodesk Algor Simulation
216
3/15/2010
Background on the Different Analysis Types

Static Stress with Linear Material Models
Static stress analysis with linear material models is the most common type of FEA used today.
Industrial products, manufacturing, consumer products, civil engineering, medical research,
power transmission and electronic design are just a few of the areas in which static stress
analysis is often performed.
The simplest of all analysis types, the static stress analysis with linear material models, should
only be used in cases where all applied loads are static and all material strains are expected to
be in the linear elastic range. Whenever any of the strains produced are expected to be in the
nonlinear range of the materials used, a nonlinear analysis type should be specified.
Static stress analysis with linear material models enables the study of stress, strain,
displacement and shear and axial forces that result from static loading. This analysis type is
often sufficient for situations in which loads are known and the time of peak stress is evident.
When performing a static stress analysis with linear material models, engineers apply static
loads such as forces, pressures or known "imposed" displacements to a finite element model.
Then, they add elastic material data, boundary conditions and other information such as the
direction of gravity. Static forces are assumed to be constant for an infinite period of time,
while resulting strain, movement and deformation are small. Engineers assume that the
material will not deform beyond its elastic limit and any resulting dynamic effects from the
loading are insignificant.
Natural Frequency (Modal)
Engineers have to design things to withstand vibration when it cannot be avoided. For
example, tires and shock absorbers ("dampers" in technical terms) help reduce vibration in
cars and trucks. Similarly, flexible couplings help isolate vibrations produced by the engines.
Vibration is about frequencies. By its very nature, vibration involves repetitive motion. Each
occurrence of a complete motion sequence is called a cycle. Frequency is defined as so many
cycles in a given time period.
Individual parts have, what engineers call, natural frequencies. For example, a violin string at
a certain tension will vibrate only at a set number of frequencies, which is why you can
produce specific musical tones. There is a base frequency in which the entire string is going
back and forth in a simple bow shape. Harmonics and overtones occur because individual
sections of the string can vibrate independently within the larger vibration. These various
shapes are called modes. The base frequency is said to vibrate in the first mode, and so on up
the ladder. Each mode shape will have an associated frequency. Higher mode shapes have
higher frequencies.
The most disastrous consequences occur when a power-driven device, such as a motor for
example, produces a frequency at which an attached structure naturally vibrates. This event is
called resonance. If sufficient power is applied, the attached structure will be destroyed.
When vibration causes resonance in an object, destruction will result unless it has been
designed to withstand the stress. The wine glass, for example, is not sound enough to
withstand the resonance caused by the frequencies produced by the opera singer.
3/15/2010
217

Note that ancient armies, which normally marched in step, were taken out of step when
crossing bridges. Should the beat of the marching feet align with a natural frequency of the
bridge, it could fall down.
Engineers must design so that resonance does not occur during regular operation of machines.
This is a major purpose of modal analysis. Ideally, the first mode has a frequency higher than
any potential driving frequency.
Frequently, resonance cannot be avoided, especially for short periods of time. For example,
when a motor comes up to speed it produces a variety of frequencies. So it may pass through
a resonant frequency. Other vibration processes, such as time history, response spectrum,
random vibration, etc., are used in addition to modal analysis to deal with this type of more
complex situation. These are called transient natural frequency processors.
When you strike a guitar string or a tuning fork, it goes from a state of inactivity into vibration
to make a musical tone. This tone seems loudest at first, then gradually dies out. Conditions
are changing from the first moment the note is struck.
When an electric motor is started up, it eventually reaches a steady-state of operation. But to
get there, it starts from zero rpm and passes through an infinite number of speeds until it
attains the operating speed.
Every time you rev the motor in your car, you are creating transient vibration. When things
vibrate, internal stresses are created by the vibration. These stresses can be devastating if
resonance occurs between a device producing vibration and a structure responding to
vibration.
A bridge may vibrate in the wind or when cars and trucks go across it. Very complex
vibration patterns can occur. Because things are constantly changing, engineers must know
what the frequencies and stresses are at all moments in time.
Sometimes transient vibrations are extremely violent and short-lived. Imagine a torpedo
striking the side of a ship and exploding, or a car slamming into a concrete abutment, or
dropping a coffeepot on a hard floor. Such vibrations are called shocks, which is just what
you would imagine. In real life, shock is rarely a good thing and almost always unplanned.
But shocks occur regardless. Because of vibration, shock is always more devastating than if
the same force were applied gradually.
The direct integration process works best when the time is relatively short and conditions are
violent, such as conditions of shock.
Transient Stress (Modal Superposition)
The transient stress (modal superposition) analysis uses mode shapes and natural frequencies
calculated through a linear natural frequency analysis to solve for time-varying loads at low
frequencies. Engineers can produce the dynamic response of a structure subjected to forces,
moments, temperatures or boundary accelerations.
Furthermore, ground acceleration components can be added in any or all three of the global
directions to determine dynamic responses such as deflection, velocity, acceleration and stress
versus time.
218
3/15/2010

Modal superposition excludes the effects of high frequency modes; thus, it uses only low
frequency modes of vibration and requires fewer calculations. This type of analysis is used
for fluid flow, structural vibration and load testing. For example, the effects of impulsive
wind loading on towers or sinusoidal loading on air purification equipment can be
determined.
The transient stress (modal superposition) analysis uses the time history processor. The time
history processor uses the mode shapes and natural frequencies calculated by the linear mode
shapes and natural frequencies processor to perform a modal superposition solution for timevarying forcing functions. The dynamic response can be produced for two general types of
input:
1.
2.
Ground acceleration input in any (or all) of the three global (X,Y,Z) directions.
Time-varying loads (forces/moments) applied to any (or all) nodal degrees-offreedom.
Response Spectrum
Engineers use this type of analysis to find out how a device or structure responds to sudden
forces or shocks. It is assumed that these shocks or forces occur at boundary points which are
normally fixed.
An example would be a building, dam or nuclear reactor when an earthquake strikes. During
an earthquake, violent shaking occurs. This shaking transmits into the structure or device at
the points where they are attached to the ground (boundary points).
Response spectrum analysis is used extensively by civil engineers who must design structures
in earthquake-prone areas. The quantities describing many of the great earthquakes of the
recent past have been captured with instruments and can now be fed into a response spectrum
program to determine how a structure would react to a past real-world earthquake.
Mechanical engineers who design components for nuclear power plants must use response
spectrum analysis as well. Such components might include nuclear reactor parts, pumps,
valves, piping, condensers, etc.
When an engineer uses response spectrum analysis, he/she is looking for the maximum
acceleration, velocity and displacements that occur after the shock. These in turn lead to
maximum stresses. Autodesk Algor Simulation's response spectrum analysis utilizes
formulas recommended by the U. S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission (NRC).
Random Vibration
Engineers use this type of analysis to find out how a device or structure responds to steady
shaking of the kind you would feel riding in a truck, rail car, rocket (when the motor is on)
and so on. Also, things that are riding in the vehicle, such as on-board electronics or cargo of
any kind, may need random vibration analysis.
The vibration generated in vehicles from the motors, road conditions, etc. is a combination of
a great many frequencies from a variety of sources and has a certain "random" nature.
Random vibration analysis is used by engineers who design various kinds of transportation
equipment. Engineers provide input to the processor in the form of a power spectral density
(PSD), which is a representation of the vibration frequencies and energy in a statistical form.
3/15/2010
219

When an engineer uses random vibration analysis, they are looking to determine the
maximum stresses resulting from the vibration. These stresses are important in determining
the lifetime of a structure of a transportation vehicle. Also, it would be important to know if
things being transported in vehicles will survive until they reach the destination.
Frequency Response
Suppose an electric motor is to drive a conveyer system to move grain from the storage area
to the area where it will be processed into cereal.
When the motor is switched on, the system starts up, going through a number of transient
conditions, possibly with occasional rumbling and buzzing, finally reaching a steady-state
condition for smooth, normal operation. Analyzing the parts of the conveyer system
throughout this time and during the final running state can be done with a random vibration
analysis. But this type of analysis may provide much more information than is actually
needed if the engineers only want to study the normal running operation. Further, defining
the input information to include the final condition would involve a large amount of data.
Frequency response analysis was invented to analyze only the steady-state operation of the
system. The inputs and output are very simple and the analysis works quickly. The engineers
run one modal analysis followed by all the steady-state scenarios they desire.
This type of analysis is recommended whenever the transient phase of operation is either very
short in relation to the total operating time or is of no interest.
Critical Buckling Load
If you press down on an empty soft drink can with your hand, not much will seem to happen.
If you put the can on the floor and gradually increase the force by stepping down on it with
your foot, at some point it will suddenly squash. This sudden scrunching is known as
buckling.
In the normal use of most products, buckling can be catastrophic if it occurs. The failure is
not one of stress, but of geometric stability. Once the geometry of the part starts to deform, it
can no longer support even a fraction of the force initially applied.
The worst part about buckling for engineers is that buckling usually occurs at relatively low
stress values compared to what the material can withstand. So a separate check must be
performed to see if a product or section is acceptable with respect to buckling.
Buckling almost always involves compression. In civil engineering, buckling is to be avoided
when designing support columns, load bearing walls and sections of bridges which may flex
under load. For example an I-beam may be perfectly "safe" when considering only the
maximum stress, but fail disastrously if just one local spot of a flange should buckle.
In engineering, designs involving thin parts in flexible structures like airplanes and
automobiles are susceptible to buckling. Even if the stress is very low, buckling of local areas
can cause the whole structure to collapse by a rapid progression of propagated buckling.
Sometimes, buckling is used as a characteristic part of a design. You may have seen or used
the type of oilcan where you pump the oil out by pressing on the bottom of the oilcan. If you
press a little, nothing happens. If you press harder, the bottom suddenly "snaps through",
pumping out a small amount of oil. Then it snaps back when you release your thumb. This
phenomenon is known as "snap through" or "oil can" buckling.
220
3/15/2010

For situations involving linear materials such as steel or glass and small deflections or
deformations prior to buckling, a straightforward solution is available Autodesk Algor
Simulations Critical Buckling analysis type.
For nonlinear situations, buckling can be determined as part of a nonlinear stress analysis
using the Mechanical Event Simulation (MES) analysis type.
Natural Frequency (Modal) with Load Stiffening
The natural frequency (modal) with load stiffening analysis is very similar to natural
frequency (modal) analysis. However, it can handle a situation when a part is under
compression or tension at the same time that vibration is induced. Think of a violin or guitar
string. If you tighten or loosen the screw, nothing is done to the string to change its mass or
length, but the tone changes anyway. This effect makes music possible and engineers call it
load stiffening.
Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM)
The Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM) enables engineers to analyze models using
U.S. Navy procedures for shock design. All mission-essential equipment onboard surface
ships and submarines must be qualified for shock loads, such as from depth charges, mines,
missiles and torpedoes.
This analysis can determine the characteristics of underwater explosion phenomena including
the effects of shock waves, surface ship or submarine body response to shock loading and
application of shock spectra to component design. Engineers can use DDAM to analyze the
shock response at the mountings of shipboard equipment such as masts, propulsion shafts,
rudders, exhaust uptakes and other critical structures.
MES with Nonlinear Material Models
Engineers often need to check a design while it is moving in a dynamic event such as
buckling, swinging, rotation or oscillation. MES combines kinematic, rigid- and flexiblebody dynamics and nonlinear stress analysis capabilities.
As a result, MES can
simultaneously analyze mechanical events involving large deformations, nonlinear material
properties, kinematic motion and forces caused by that motion and then predict the resulting
stresses.
One of the main advantages of MES is the need to make fewer assumptions. With MES, there
is no need for elaborate hand calculations, interpretation of results or experiments to
determine equivalent loading. The fewer the assumptions that need to be made, the lesser the
chance for errors will be.
Static Stress with Nonlinear Material Models
Like MES, this analysis type supports nonlinear material behavior. However, the inertial and
damping effects included in a full, dynamic analysis are excluded. Therefore, all parts must
be statically stable. However, geometric nonlinearity is accounted for in Static/NLM
analyses. So, the results will correctly reflect changes in load location, load orientation, and
part cross-section that occur as the structure deforms.
MES Riks Analysis
A Riks analysis is specifically intended to capture post-buckling and collapse events. An
example of post-buckling behavior is the snap-through action of the bottom of an old style oil
3/15/2010
221

can, where the structure becomes unstable, buckles inward, and then becomes stable once
again. Like Static/NLM analyses, a Riks model must be statically stable, since inertial and
damping effects are not supported. In addition, surface and element based loads are not
supported. However, nodal forces and moments are supported.
Natural Frequency (Modal) with Nonlinear Material Models
The natural frequency (modal) with nonlinear material models analysis calculates the natural
frequencies of a system. It is a very similar to the linear modes shapes and natural
frequencies processor except that it also considers the effects of nonlinear materials such as
rubber and many kinds of plastics and composite materials.
Steady-State Heat Transfer
Steady-state heat transfer analysis is used to determine the steady-state temperature
distribution and heat flow. This type of analysis can be performed when the temperature at
every point within the model, including the surfaces, is independent of time.
Transient Heat Transfer
Transient heat transfer analysis is used to determine the temperature distribution and heat flow
within an object having time-dependent temperature conditions. The specific heat constant
and the density of the material are required to perform a transient analysis.
Steady Fluid Flow
Steady fluid flow analysis provides for the simulation of incompressible, viscous flows as
governed by the Navier-Stokes equations. It can be used to analyze flows that have reached a
steady condition.
Turbulence capabilities enable the prediction of turbulent flow (large changes in velocity over small
distances) and laminar flow (smooth, gradual changes in velocity distribution) at the same time in
the same model.
Unsteady Fluid Flow
Unsteady fluid flow analysis provides for the simulation of incompressible, viscous flows as
governed by the Navier-Stokes equations. It can be used to analyze flows that have not yet reached
a steady condition.
Turbulence capabilities enable the prediction of turbulent flow (large changes in velocity over small
distances) and laminar flow (smooth, gradual changes in velocity distribution) at the same time in
the same model.
Flow Through Porous Media
The flow through porous media analysis will analyze fluid flow through a fully saturated
porous medium. The flow must be steady, incompressible and isothermal and must maintain
its dimensional integrity. The permeability of the medium can be independent of direction or
can vary in orthogonal directions. This processor can calculate the flow in a 2-D planar, 2-D
axisymmetric or 3-D configuration. Each part can have an individual permeability. A part
can also be used to model unrestrained flow as the fluid moves between porous media.
222
3/15/2010

The flow can be generated by pressures and velocities. At least one pressure load must be
applied to the model so that a reference is established. Any surface without a velocity or
pressure applied will be considered impermeable.
Open Channel Flow
Open channel flows involve the existence of a free surface between the flowing fluid and a gas
above it. In such flows, the liquid and the gas are clearly separated, not interpenetrating
(mixing), and the density ratio between them is quite large. Flow is generally governed by the
force of gravity and inertia. An example of this is the flow within a manometer when pressure is
applied or removed. The liquid lies in the bottom of the U-tube and air is above the liquid.
Due to a low density and negligible viscosity, both the inertia and the viscous force of the gas
are negligible, and the only influence of the gas is the pressure acted on the interface. Hence,
the region of gas need not be analyzed, and the free surface is calculated as a boundary with
constant pressure (for example, zero pressure by totally ignoring the air effect).
Electrostatic Current and Voltage
Electrostatic current and voltage analysis predicts the outcome when an electric potential is
applied to a conductive material, which results in a voltage and current distribution over the
surface or throughout the volume of an object and its surroundings. This enables engineers to
study an assemblys electric conduction properties.
The input consists of electrical conductivity, voltage at boundaries and current loadings. The
output consists of voltage at nodes, current flux density (vectors) at element centroids and
current flow through element faces.
Electrostatic Field Strength and Voltage
Electrostatic field strength and voltage analysis is used to study electric fields around objects.
It can also analyze dielectrics, which are non-conducting (insulating) materials polarized by
electric fields. Analysts can use electrostatic field strength and voltage analysis to ensure that
an electric field does not exceed the dielectric strength of a capacitor or a surrounding
medium.
Unlike electrostatic current and voltage analysis, electrostatic field strength and voltage analysis
requires engineers to model the area around a conducting object. Engineers typically specify
voltage, permittivity values or charge density as inputs for electric field analyses. The output
consists of voltage at nodes and electric and displacement fields (vectors) at element centroids.
Transient Mass Transfer
Mass transfer refers to mass in transit due to gradients in the concentration of species within a
mixture, and the transfer is due to random molecular motion. Species transport is an
analogous name for mass transfer. The solution of mass transfer is to determine the species
concentration distribution and corresponding species flux over a time interval.
As implemented in Autodesk Algor Simulation, the mass transfer occurs via Poisson
mode, which considers diffusion mass transfer balance only. There are no convective terms
included, and the species do not interact with each other. (Consequently, one model with ten
species will give the same results as ten individual models with one specie each.) Poisson
mode can be applied for both fluid and solid phases. A typical application example is
chemical species migrating through a membrane. Multiple species may be involved in each
part of the model.
3/15/2010
223
Steady Coupled Fluid Flow and Thermal

This multiphysics analysis will combine the heat transfer analysis with fluid flow analysis,
based on steady state conditions. The heat transfer due to the flow of the fluid over a surface
will be accounted for as well as the natural convection (buoyancy) in the fluid due to the
temperatures. All of the options available for a steady fluid flow analysis and a steady-state
heat transfer analysis are available.
Transient Coupled Fluid Flow and Thermal
This multiphysics analysis will combine the heat transfer analysis with fluid flow analysis,
based on transient (unsteady) conditions. The heat transfer due to the flow of the fluid over a
surface will be accounted for as well as the natural convection (buoyancy) in the fluid due to
the temperatures. All of the options available for an unsteady fluid flow analysis and a
transient heat transfer analysis are available.
Choosing the Right Analysis Type for Your Application

Below are some basic guidelines that you can follow to choose the correct analysis type for
your situation. The example applications listed are by no means comprehensive. They are
provided only as a general indication of the type of analysis that can be performed with each
analysis type.
Static Stress with Linear Material Models:
Use when you want to calculate the displacements and stresses due to static loads.
The magnitude or direction of the loading will not change over time.
No inertial effects. (The mass of the model may be used to determine loads, such as
gravity and centrifugal forces.)
Although contact is a nonlinear effect, it can be included in a static stress analysis;

the solution becomes iterative.
Examples: Structures (buildings, car frames, truss systems, etc.), bodies (valve
bodies, ship hulls, housings, support brackets, pressure vessels, etc.), and press-fits.
Natural Frequency (Modal):
Use when you want to calculate the natural frequencies and mode shapes of the
model due to purely geometric and material properties.
Examples: Structures (buildings, bridges, towers, etc), shafts, bodies (housings,

support brackets, etc.).
Natural Frequency (Modal) with Load Stiffening:
224
model due to purely geometric and material properties.
Axial compressive or tensile loads affect the frequency of the system.
Examples: Structures (buildings, bridges, towers, etc), shafts, bodies (housings,

3/15/2010

Response Spectrum:
Use when you want to calculate the maximum displacements and stresses due to a
spectrum-type load.
Examples: Structures subjected to earthquakes, blast and shock loads, etc.
Random Vibration:
Use when you want to calculate the statistical response of a system (displacements
and stresses) due to a random vibration, white noise, or a power spectrum density.
Examples: Suspension systems, aerospace components, fans and pumps.
Frequency Response:
Use when you want to calculate the steady state response (displacements and
stresses) due to a harmonic or sinusoidal load or acceleration.
Examples: Structures with rotating imbalance, frequency sweeps, fans and pumps.
Transient Stress (Direct Integration or Modal Superposition):
Use when you want to calculate the displacements and stresses over time due to
loads that will vary in a known fashion.
Inertial effects are included.
Examples: Structures subjected to transient events (buildings, bridges, towers, etc),

bodies (housings, support brackets, etc.), and rotating imbalance.
Critical Buckling Load:
Use when you want to calculate the load that will cause your model to buckle due to
geometric instability.
No inertial effects. (The mass of the model may be used to determine loads, such as
gravity and centrifugal forces.)
Examples: Column designs, structures (buildings, bridges, towers, etc.).
Dynamic Design Analysis Method (DDAM):
Use when you want to calculate the maximum displacements and stresses due to a
spectrum-type load.
Use when designing naval equipment or vessels.
Examples: exhaust uptakes, masts, propulsion shafts
MES (Mechanical Event Simulation) with Nonlinear Material Models:
Use when you want to calculate the displacements, velocities, accelerations, and
stresses over time due to dynamic loads.
The loads can be constant, vary over time, or vary based on calculated results.
Examples: Linkages, mechanisms, press-fit, snap-fits, multiple body contact, impact,

forming and extruding processes, rubber and foam components (bellows and seats).
3/15/2010
225
Static Stress with Nonlinear Material Models:
Use when you want to calculate the displacements and stresses due to static loads.
The loads can be constant, vary between "time steps" or load cases, or vary based on
calculated results.
Inertial effects are ignored. (The mass of the model may be used to determine loads,
such as gravity and centrifugal forces.)
Examples: Press-fit, multiple body contact, forming and extruding processes, rubber
and foam components (bellows and seats).
Natural Frequency (Modal) with Nonlinear Material Models:
model.
The change in frequency due to displacements or changing material properties is not

included.
Loads do not affect the frequencies.
Boundary conditions are fixed.
Examples: Structures (buildings, bridges, towers, etc.), shafts, bodies (housings,

MES Riks Analysis:
Use when you want to calculate the displacements and stresses before and after the
model has buckled or collapsed.
Inertial effects are ignored.
Examples: Columns, components with snap-through behavior.
Steady State Heat Transfer:
Use when you want to calculate temperature and heat fluxes after an infinite period
of time (steady-state conditions).
The thermal loads are constant over time.
Examples: structures (furnaces, insulating walls, etc), electrical components
Transient Heat Transfer:
226
Use when you want to calculate the temperature and heat fluxes over time due to the
thermal loads.
The thermal loads can be constant or change over time.
The material can change states between a solid and liquid.
Examples: Structures (furnaces, insulating walls, brake systems, etc.), electrical

components, and annealing processes.
3/15/2010

Steady Fluid Flow:
Use when you want to calculate the velocity and pressure distribution due to the
motion of a fluid.
The fluid has reached a steady-state solution at each "time step" or load case.
Examples: Valves, rotating equipment (fans, mixers, etc.), wind and drag force
analysis, and flow measuring devices.
Unsteady Fluid Flow:
Use when you want to calculate the velocity and pressure distribution due to the
motion of a fluid.
The fluid is undergoing acceleration during the analysis or changes over time.
Examples: Valves, rotating equipment (fans, mixers, etc.), wind and drag force
analysis, and flow measuring devices.
Flow through Porous Media:
Use when you want to calculate the velocity and pressure distribution of a fluid
passing through a series of filtering layers.
The flow is through (or dominated by) a fully saturated porous medium.
The fluid has reached a steady-state solution after an infinite period of time.
Examples: Aquifers, catalyst beds, filters, and sedimentary studies.
Electrostatic Current and Voltage:
Use when you want to calculate the current and voltage distribution after an infinite
period of time (steady-state conditions) due to induced voltages and current sources.
Examples: Electrical components (circuit breakers, circuit boards, batteries, etc.)

and piezoelectric devices.
Electrostatic Field Strength and Voltage:
Use when you want to calculate the electric field and voltage distribution after an
infinite period of time (steady-state conditions) in an insulator due to induced
voltages and charges.
Examples: Insulators and micro electromechanical systems (MEMS)
Transient Mass Transfer:
Use when you want to calculate the concentration over time of multiple species
The transport of the species is due to random molecular motion.
Examples: Chemical species through a membrane (drug delivery, etc.).
3/15/2010
227

Steady Coupled Fluid Flow and Thermal:
Use when you want to calculate the temperatures, heat fluxes, velocities, and
pressure distribution in a fluid or a model with fluid and solid parts.
The fluid has reached a steady-state solution at each "time step" or load case.
The thermal results have reached a steady-state solution at each "time step" or load case.
Examples: Heat exchangers, circuit boards, cooling/heating system design, and

HVAC systems.
Transient Coupled Fluid Flow and Thermal:
Use when you want to calculate the temperatures, heat fluxes, velocities, and
pressure distribution in a fluid or a model with fluid and solid parts.
All of the results can vary over time.
The fluid is undergoing acceleration during the analysis or changing over time.
The thermal loads can be constant or change over time.
Examples: Heat exchangers, circuit boards, cooling/heating system design, and

HVAC systems.
Combining Analysis Types for Multiphysics

Real-world mechanical behavior is often the result of several physical factors acting
simultaneously. Multiphysics options enable engineers to simulate a product's behavior when
those multiple physical factors interact. The following are types of multiphysics analysis
combinations that can be completed in addition to the two coupled fluid thermal analysis
types previously discussed.
228
Thermal, fluid flow, electrostatic and structural
Thermal, fluid flow and structural
Fluid flow and thermal
Fluid flow and structural
Thermal and structural
Electrostatic and thermal
Electrostatic and structural (commonly used for Micro Electromechanical Systems

MEMS)
3/15/2010
Appendix C Linear Loads and Constraints
3/15/2010
229
230
3/15/2010
Nodal Loading
Nodal Forces
Forces can be applied to any node on the model. To add a force, first access the SELECTION
pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out menu and choose the desired selection
method. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and choose the "Select" pull-out
menu and select the "Vertices" command. Click on the vertex or vertices to which you want
to apply a force and right-click in the display area. In the menu that appears, select the
"Add" pull-out menu and then the "Nodal Force" command. The dialog shown in Figure
C.1 will appear if 1 node was selected before accessing this command.
Figure C.1: Nodal Force Object Dialog

Magnitude: Enter the desired magnitude of the nodal forces in this field. Place a "-" before
the value if you want this force applied in the negative direction of the vector chosen. If you
have selected multiple nodes, a force of this magnitude will be applied to each node.
Direction section: If you select the "X", "Y" or "Z" radio buttons, the "X", "Y" and "Z"
fields will be filled in to represent a unit vector along that direction. If you select the
"Custom" radio button, you will be able to define a unit vector in the "X", "Y" and "Z"
fields. If you press the "Vector Selector" button, you will be able to define a vector by
clicking on two nodes in the model.
Load Case / Load Curve: The number in this field will control the load case to which this
force is applied. If you want a force to be present in multiple load cases, you must apply two
forces to the node and change this value. Time-dependent curves are disabled for linear static
analyses. For nonlinear analyses, click the "Curve" button to define a load curve.
Description: This field allows you to apply a name for this set of nodal forces. This
description will be used to name each force in the tree view.
3/15/2010
231

Nodal Lumped Masses
Lumped masses can be used to resist the translation or rotation of nodes, assuming the
element type to which they're attached support rotational DOFs. Otherwise, only translation
will be resisted.
With nodes selected, right-click in the display area and select the "Add" pull-out menu. Select
the "Nodal Lumped Mass..." command. The dialog box shown in Figure C.2 will appear.
Figure C.2: Nodal Lumped Mass Object Dialog

Select the appropriate radio button in the "Mass Input" section to determine if the lumped
mass input values will be defined in units of force or mass (=weight/gravity).
If the lumped mass will be equally effective in all translational directions, activate the
"Uniform" checkbox and specify the magnitude of the mass in the "X Direction" field of
the "Mass/Weight" section. If the lumped mass has different effective magnitudes along the
three translational directions, deactivate the "Uniform" checkbox and specify the appropriate
values in the "X Direction", "Y Direction" and "Z Direction" fields in the
"Mass/Weight" section.
If the lumped mass will be effective in rotational directions, specify the appropriate values in
the "X Direction", "Y Direction" and "Z Direction" fields in the "Mass Moment of
Inertia" section.
Nodal Moments
Moments can be applied to any node on the model that is on an element type that has a
rotational DOF (i.e. beams and plates). To add a moment, first access the SELECTION pulldown menu and select the "Shape" pull-out menu and choose the desired selection method.
Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and choose the "Select" pull-out menu and
select the "Vertices" command. Click on the vertex or vertices to which you want to apply a
232
3/15/2010

moment and right-click anywhere in the display area. In the menu that appears, select the
"Add" pull-out menu and then the "Nodal Moment" command. The dialog shown in
Figure C.3 will appear if a single node was selected before accessing this command. Since
the nodes on brick elements only have the translational DOFs, a moment cannot be applied
directly to a brick element part.
Figure C.3: Nodal Moment Object Dialog

Magnitude: Enter the desired magnitude of the nodal moments in this field. A positive value
will be applied counterclockwise according to the right-hand rule. Place a "-" before the
value if you want this moment applied in the clockwise direction. If you have selected
multiple nodes, a moment of this magnitude will be applied to each node.
Load Case / Load Curve: The number in this field will control which load case this moment
is applied to. If you want a moment to be present in multiple load cases, you must apply two
moments to the node and change this value. Time-dependent curves are disabled for linear
static analyses. For nonlinear analyses, click the "Curve" button to define a load curve.
Description: This field allows you to apply a name for this set of nodal moments. This
description will be used to name each moment in the tree view.
Nodal Displacement Boundary Elements
Displacement boundary elements can be applied to any node on the model. A node to which
a displacement boundary element is added will translate or rotate by the specified magnitude
in the specified direction. To add a displacement boundary element, first access the
SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out menu and choose the desired
selection method. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and choose the "Select"
3/15/2010
233

pull-out menu and select the "Vertices" command. Click on the vertex or vertices to which
you want to apply a displacement boundary element and right-click anywhere in the display
area. In the menu that appears, select the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Nodal
Displacement Boundary" command. The dialog shown in Figure C.4 will appear if 1
node was selected before accessing this command.
Figure C.4: Nodal Displacement Boundary Element Object Dialog

Type section: In this section, select the "Translation" or "Rotation" radio button to specify
the type of displacement boundary element that will be applied. The value in the
"Magnitude" field will control how much the displacement boundary element will translate
or rotate. Rotational displacement boundary elements should only be applied to nodes on
elements that have a rotational degree of freedom in that direction.
Magnitude: Enter the desired magnitude of the nodal displacement boundary element in this
field. If the "Translation" radio button in the "Type" section is selected, place a "-" before
the value if you want this displacement applied in the negative direction of the vector chosen.
If the "Rotation" radio button in the "Type" section is selected, a positive value will be
applied counterclockwise according to the right-hand rule. Place a "-" before the value if you
want this rotation displacement boundary element to be applied in the clockwise direction. If
you have selected multiple nodes, a displacement boundary element of this type and
magnitude will be applied to each node.
Stiffness: During the analysis, an element will be generated between the selected node and a
new node located an arbitrary distance from the selected node in the specified direction. This
element will be a line connecting the two nodes. The translation or rotation will be applied to
the new node. The value in this field will control how much of the translation or rotation gets
234
3/15/2010

transferred to the selected node. A large stiffness (~1e8) will cause more of the translation or
rotation to be applied to the selected node. This is useful for modeling springs or other
supports in a model.
Description: This field allows you to apply a name for this set of nodal displacement
boundary elements. This description will be used to name each displacement boundary
element in the tree view.
Nodal Temperatures
Nodal temperatures can be applied to any node on the model. To add a nodal temperature,
first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out menu and
choose the desired selection method. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and
choose the "Select" pull-out menu and select the "Vertices" command. Click on the vertex
or vertices to which you want to apply a displacement boundary element and right-click
then the "Nodal Temperature" command. The dialog shown in Figure C.5 will appear if
1 node was selected before accessing this command.
Figure C.5: Nodal Temperature Object Dialog

Magnitude: Enter the desired magnitude of the nodal temperature in this field. The
difference between this value and the value in the "Stress Free Reference Temperature" in
the "Parameters and Controls" section of the "General" tab in the "Element Definition"
dialog will be used to calculate the thermal stress.
Nodal Voltages
Nodal voltages can be applied to any node on the model. To add a nodal voltage, first access
the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out menu and choose the
desired selection method. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and choose the
"Select" pull-out menu and select the "Vertices" command. Click on the vertex or vertices
to which you want to apply a nodal voltage and right-click anywhere in the display area. In
the menu that appears, select the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Nodal Voltage"
command. The dialog shown in Figure C.6 will appear if 1 node was selected before
accessing this command.
3/15/2010
235
Figure C.6: Nodal Voltage Object Dialog

Magnitude: Enter the desired magnitude of the nodal voltage in this field.
Description: This field allows you to apply a name for this set of nodal voltages. This
description will be used to name each voltage in the tree view.
Edge Loading
Edge Forces
Edge forces can be applied to any edge on a model that originated from a CAD solid model.
To add an edge force, first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape"
pull-out menu and choose the desired selection method. Then access the SELECTION pulldown menu and choose the "Select" pull-out menu and select the "Edges" command. Click
on the edge or edges to which you want to apply an edge force and right-click anywhere in the
display area. In the menu that appears, select the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Edge
Forces" command. A magnitude will be defined for the edge force. Nodal forces will be
applied to the nodes on that edge so that the combined magnitude will equal the defined
magnitude. The total force will be evenly distributed over the edge.
Edge Displacement Boundaries
Edge displacement boundaries can be applied to any edge on a model that originated from a
CAD solid model. To add edge displacement boundary elements, first access the
SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out menu and choose the desired
selection method. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and choose the "Select"
pull-out menu and select the "Edges" command. Click on the edge or edges to which you
want to apply an edge displacement boundary element and right-click anywhere in the display
area. In the menu that appears, select the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Edge
Displacement Boundary" command. A magnitude will be defined for the edge
displacement boundary in the same manner as a nodal displacement boundary element. Nodal
displacement boundary elements will be applied to the nodes on that edge.
236
3/15/2010
Surface Loading
Surface Force
Surface forces can be applied to any surface on a brick, tetrahedral or plate part. To add a
surface force, first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out
menu and choose the "Point" command. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and
choose the "Select" pull-out menu and select the "Surfaces" command. Click on the surfaces
to which you want to apply a surface force and right-click anywhere in the display area.
Multiple surfaces can be selected by holding down the <Ctrl> key. In the menu that appears,
select the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Surface Force" command. The dialog shown
in Figure C.7 will appear if 1 surface was selected before accessing this command.
Figure C.7: Surface Force Object Dialog

Magnitude: Enter the magnitude of the force that will be distributed over each selected surface
in this field. A force of this magnitude will be applied to each surface that is selected. The area
of each surface will be calculated from the CAD model and the magnitude will be divided by
this value. A pressure or traction with the resulting magnitude will be applied to each surface.
Direction section: If you select the "Normal" radio button, the force will be applied normal
to the face of each element on the surface. If a positive value was entered in the
"Magnitude" field, the force will be directed into the element. If a negative value was
entered in the "Magnitude" field, the force will be directed away from the element. If you
select the "X", "Y" or "Z" radio buttons, the "X", "Y" and "Z" fields will be filled in to
represent a unit vector along that direction. If you select the "Custom" radio button, you will
be able to define a unit vector in the "X", "Y" and "Z" fields. If you press the "Vector
Selector" button, you will be able to define a vector by clicking on two nodes in the model.
Description: This field allows you to apply a name for this set of surface forces. This
description will be used to name each surface force in the tree view.
3/15/2010
237

Pressure/Traction
Pressures and tractions can be applied to any surface on the model. To add a pressure or
traction, first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out menu
and choose the "Point" command. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and
surfaces to which you want to apply a pressure or traction and right-click anywhere in the
that appears, select the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Surface Pressure/Traction"
command. The dialog shown in Figure C.8 will appear.
Figure C.8: Surface Pressure/Traction Object Dialog

Magnitude section:
Pressure: If you want to apply a normal pressure, select the "Pressure" radio button
and specify the magnitude of the pressure to be applied to each surface in the
"Magnitude" field. A positive pressure will be directed into the element. A negative
pressure will be directed away from the element. The units are force/area.
Traction: If you want to apply a pressure along a specific direction, select the
"Traction" radio button and specify the X, Y and Z components of the traction in the "X
Magnitude", "Y Magnitude" and "Z Magnitude" fields.
Hydrostatic Pressure
Hydrostatic pressure can be applied to any surface on the model. To add a hydrostatic
pressure, first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out menu
and choose the "Point" command. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and
238
3/15/2010

surfaces to which you want to apply a hydrostatic pressure and right-click anywhere in the
that appears, select the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Surface Hydrostatic
Pressure" command. The dialog shown in Figure C.9 will appear when applying
hydrostatic pressures to solid element surfaces in a linear static stress analysis.
Figure C.9: Surface Hydrostatic Pressure Object Dialog for Solid Elements
Parameters section:
Y Reference: Enter the Y-coordinate of the top of the surface of the fluid that is creating
the hydrostatic pressure. The distance from this point to the face of the element will be
multiplied by the value in the "Fluid Density" field to calculate the pressure at that face.
Figure C.10 shows how the hydrostatic pressure is applied to the model.
Fluid Density: Enter the weight density of the fluid that is creating the hydrostatic
pressure. This value will be multiplied by the distance from the top of the fluid to
calculate the pressure for that face.
Figure C.10: Hydrostatic Pressure of Brick Elements
3/15/2010
239

NOTE: When applying hydrostatic pressures to plate elements in a linear static stress analysis
or to any applicable element type in a nonlinear stress analysis (including solid
elements) a different dialog box from that shown in the preceding Figure C.9 will be
obtained. For linear plates and for nonlinear stress analyses, the model is not limited to
an orientation with +Y up for hydrostatic loads, as it is for linear bricks and tetrahedra.
The alternate dialog box includes additional input fields for specifying a point on the
surface of the fluid (rather than just a Y value). It also contains fields for specifying
the surface normal direction of the fluid. This is specifically the direction of increasing
depth and increasing load, which corresponds to the direction of gravity.
Surface Variable Load
Surface variable loads can be applied to any surface on a brick, tetrahedral or plate part. To
add a surface variable load, first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the
"Shape" pull-out menu and choose the "Point" command. Then access the SELECTION
pull-down menu and choose the "Select" pull-out menu and select the "Surfaces" command.
Click on the surfaces to which you want to apply a surface variable load and right-click
anywhere in the display area. Multiple surfaces can be selected by holding down the <Ctrl>
key. In the menu that appears, select the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Surface
Variable Load" command. The dialog shown in Figure C.11 will appear.
Figure C.11: Surface Variable Load Dialog
240
3/15/2010

For the first variable load applied to a model, The "Active Function" drop-down box will
display "New function". You must use this field to specify a name for the function. If
you already have variable loads on the model, you will be able to select a previously defined
function name in this drop-down box. If you change the parameters of the function, the
changes will be applied to every variable load in the model that uses that function. If you do
not wish to alter a previously defined function, specify a new active function name.
Select the coordinate system that the variable load will follow in the "Coordinate System"
drop-down box. All local coordinate systems defined in the FEA Editor environment will be
listed in addition to the global coordinate system. For example, If you want a surface
variable load to start at zero at an edge of a surface, you should create a coordinate system
that has the origin at one of the nodes along that edge. Select that coordinate system in this
drop-down box. The coordinate systems can be rectangular, cylindrical or spherical.
If the direction of the variable load will always be normal to the surface, select the "Normal
to Surface" radio button in the "Load Orientation" section. If the variable load will be
applied in a constant direction, select the "Traction" radio button in the "Load
Orientation" section and define the direction as a vector in the "X", "Y" and "Z" fields.
Define the function in the "Expression" field. The magnitude will be input as a pressure.
Use the variable r for the local X coordinate, s for the local Y coordinate and t for the local Z
coordinate, where the meaning of the local X,Y and Z coordinate depends on the coordinate
system. You can use basic operators such as +,-,*,/, () and ^. Pressing the "Available
Primitives >>" button will allow you to access several common functions.
Pressing the "View" button will allow you to see a graphical view of the load along a specific
direction. You can select the radio button for the direction along which you want to see the
magnitude of the variable load since the load can be dependent on the other directions. You
will then have to define the other two coordinates. For example, if you have a load that
increases linearly in the X direction you will want to select the "X" radio button. This will
generate a straight line at a constant slope. Since the load does not vary in the Y or Z
directions, it does not matter what values are entered for these coordinates. If you were to
select the "Y" or "Z" radio buttons, you will view a horizontal line. The value of the
horizontal line will vary with the value in the "X" field. You can view the graph at multiple
X coordinates by changing the coordinate and pressing the "Recalculate" button.
Specify the load case in which you want the variable load to be placed in the "Load Case /
Load Curve" field. If you are going to perform a transient stress (direct integration) analysis,
this field will determine the load curve that this force will follow throughout the analysis.
Since the variable load will be converted into nodal forces, the load in the Results
environment may not appear to follow the function exactly. If the mesh is not evenly spaced,
numerous forces of low magnitude may be applied in an area with a fine mesh and fewer
forces of higher magnitudes may be applied in an area with a coarse mesh. Also, nodes that
are not shared by multiple elements will have a force with a lower magnitude than the others.
This is because the node gets a force applied from each element that it is shared by.
Surface Displacement Boundary
A surface displacement boundary can be applied to any surface on a model. To add a surface
displacement boundary, first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape"
pull-out menu and choose the "Point" command. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu
and select the "Select" pull-out menu and select the "Surfaces" command. Click on the surfaces
to which you want to apply a surface displacement boundary element and right-click anywhere in
the display area. Multiple surfaces can be selected by holding down the <Ctrl> key. In the menu
3/15/2010
241

that appears, select the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Surface Displacement Boundary"
command. A displacement boundary element will be applied to every node on the selected
surface. If any of the lines meeting at a certain node are in the selected surfaces, a displacement
boundary element will be applied to that node. Refer to the section about nodal displacement
boundary elements for the definitions of the commands on this dialog.
Surface Temperature
A surface temperature can be applied to any surface on a model. To add a surface temperature,
first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out menu and choose
the "Point" command. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Select"
pull-out menu and select the "Surfaces" command. Click on the surfaces to which you want to
apply a surface temperature and right-click anywhere in the display area. Multiple surfaces can
be selected by holding down the <Ctrl> key. In the menu that appears, select the "Add" pullout menu and then the "Surface Temperature" command. A temperature will be applied to
every node on the selected surface. If any of the lines meeting at a certain node are in the
selected surfaces, a temperature will be applied to that node. Refer to the section about nodal
temperatures for the definitions of the commands on this dialog.
Surface Voltage
A surface voltage can be applied to any surface on a model. To add a surface voltage, first
access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pull-out menu and choose
the "Point" command. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the
"Select" pull-out menu and select the "Surfaces" command. Click on the surfaces to which
you want to apply a surface voltage and right-click anywhere in the display area. Multiple
surfaces can be selected by holding down the <Ctrl> key. In the menu that appears, select the
"Add" pull-out menu and then the "Surface Voltage" command. A voltage will be
applied to every node on the selected surface. If any of the lines meeting at a certain node are
in the selected surfaces, a voltage will be applied to that node. Refer to the section about
nodal voltage for the definitions of the commands on this dialog.
Element Loading
Accelerations/Gravity
An acceleration load is defined within the "Acceleration / Gravity Load" section of the
"Acceleration/Gravity" tab of the "Analysis Parameters" dialog. Aside from selecting
this tab while already displaying the Analysis Parameters dialog, these settings may also be
directly accessed by right-clicking on the "Acceleration/Gravity" heading under the
"Analysis Type" heading in the tree view and selecting the "Modify" command. The
"Accel/Gravity" tab is shown in Figure C.12. In addition to these parameters, a value must
be applied in the "Accel/Gravity" column of the "Load Case Multipliers" table in the
"Multipliers" tab of the "Analysis Parameters" dialog.
242
3/15/2010
Figure C.12: Gravity/Acceleration Tab of the Analysis Parameters Dialog

Acceleration/Gravity Load section:
Set for standard gravity: Pressing this button will enter the standard acceleration of
gravity value for Earth in the "Acceleration due to body force" field.
Acceleration due to body force: Enter the magnitude of the acceleration in this field.
This will be applied to every part in the assembly. You must enter a value in the "Mass
Density" field in the "Element Material Specification" dialog for each part in order for
the acceleration to take effect. This dialog can be accessed by right-clicking on the
"Material" heading for the each part in the tree view and selecting the "Modify
Material" command. This will access the "Element Material Selection" dialog.
You can select any material and press the "Edit Properties" button to access the
"Element Material Specification" dialog for that material.
X multiplier: The value in this field will be multiplied by the value in the "Acceleration
due to body force" field. The resulting acceleration will be applied to the assembly in
the X direction.
Y multiplier: The value in this field will be multiplied by the value in the "Acceleration
the Y direction.
Z multiplier: The value in this field will be multiplied by the value in the "Acceleration
the Z direction.
3/15/2010
243

Centrifugal
The "Multipliers" tab of the Analysis Parameters dialog for linear static stress analyses
includes multiplier columns labeled "Rotation" and "Angular Accel." Centrifugal forces
acting on elements, due to their mass being rotated around a user-defined axis, are enabled by
entering a non-zero value in one or both of these columns. The speed of rotation, angular
acceleration rate and axis of rotation are defined within the "Centrifugal" tab of the
"Analysis Parameters" screen
The geometry is not actually rotated by the solver and the model should be properly
constrained against rigid body motion in all three global directions, as for all linear static
analyses (i.e., the model must be statically stable). The force is calculated and applied to each
individual element based on its mass density and volume, as if it were actually rotating at the
specified speed and/or acceleration rate.
The axis of rotation must be parallel to one of the global axes. The user chooses the axis
orientation and specifies the X, Y and Z coordinates of a single point through which the
rotational axis passes. Since this is a global load, all parts of the model will be subjected to it.
However, if there are non-rotating parts in the assembly, enter a material mass density of zero
for these parts and the centrifugal load will have no effect on them. Please be aware that a
rotation multiplier of "2" results in four times the centrifugal force. This is because the
rotational speed is multiplied by the factor and the centrifugal force is a function of the
angular speed squared (F = m*2/R).
The "Centrifugal" tab of the "Analysis Parameters" screen is shown in Figure C.13.
Figure C.13: Centrifugal Tab of the Analysis Parameters Dialog
244
3/15/2010
Boundary Conditions
Boundary conditions can be applied to any node, edge or surface on the model. Edge boundary
conditions can only be applied to models that originated from CAD solid models. To add a
boundary condition, first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the "Shape" pullout menu and choose the desired selection method. Then access the SELECTION pull-down
menu and choose the "Select" pull-out menu and select the desired selection method. Click on
the vertex, edge or surface to which you want to apply the boundary condition and right-click
then the "Nodal Boundary Condition", "Edge Boundary Condition" or the "Surface
Boundary Condition"command. A dialog similar to the dialog shown in Figure C.14 will
appear if 1 node was selected before accessing this command.
Figure C.14: Nodal Boundary Condition Object Dialog

Constrained DOFs section: This section contains a checkbox for each DOF. By activating
any of the checkboxes, no translation (T) or no rotation (R) will be allowed in that direction at
that node. In order for the boundary condition to take effect, the element type to which the
boundary condition is applied must have that DOF available.
Predefined section:
Fixed: When this button is pressed, every checkbox in the "Constrained DOFs" section
will be activated. No translation or rotation will be permitted at these nodes.
Free: When this button is pressed, every checkbox in the "Constrained DOFs" section
will be deactivated. No constraints will be applied to these nodes.
Pinned: When this button is pressed, the "Tx", "Ty" and "Tz" checkboxes in the
"Constrained DOFs" section will be activated. These nodes will not be able to translate
but will be able to rotate in any direction.
No Rotation: When this button is pressed, the "Rx", "Ry" and "Rz" checkboxes in the
"Constrained DOFs" section will be activated. These nodes will not be able to rotate
but will be able to translate in any direction.
3/15/2010
245

X Symmetry: When this button is pressed, the "Tx", "Ry" and "Rz" checkboxes in the
"Constrained DOFs" section will be activated. This should be applied to a model that
is being constructed using symmetry where the plane of symmetry is the YZ plane. For
symmetry to exist in a model, both the geometry and the loading must be symmetric.
Y Symmetry: When this button is pressed, the "Ty", "Rx" and "Rz" checkboxes in the
is being constructed using symmetry where the plane of symmetry is the XZ plane. For
Z Symmetry: When this button is pressed, the "Tz", "Rx" and "Ry" checkboxes in the
is being constructed using symmetry where the plane of symmetry is the XY plane. For
X Antisymmetric: When this button is pressed, the "Ty", "Tz" and "Rx" checkboxes
in the "Constrained DOFs" section will be activated. This should be applied to a model
that is being constructed using antisymmetry where the plane of antisymmetry is the YZ
plane. For antisymmetry to exist in a model, the geometry must be symmetric and the
loading must by antisymmetric.
Y Antisymmetric: When this button is pressed, the "Tx", "Tz" and "Ry" checkboxes
that is being constructed using antisymmetry where the plane of antisymmetry is the XZ
Z Antisymmetric: When this button is pressed, the "Tx", "Ty" and "Rz" checkboxes
that is being constructed using antisymmetry where the plane of antisymmetry is the XY
Description: This field allows you to apply a name for this set of boundary conditions. This
description will be used to name each boundary condition in the tree view.
Rigid Boundary Elements

Rigid boundary elements can be applied to any node, edge or surface on the model. A rigid
boundary element will apply a translational or rotational stiffness along one or more of the
global X, Y or Z directions. To add a rigid boundary element, first access the SELECTION
pull-down menu and choose the "Shape" pull-out menu and choose the desired selection
method. Then access the SELECTION pull-down menu and choose the "Select" pull-out
menu and select the desired selection method. Click on the vertex, edge or surface to which
you want to apply the rigid boundary element and right-click anywhere in the display area. In
the menu that appears, select the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Nodal Rigid
Boundary", "Edge Rigid Boundary" or "Surface Rigid Boundary"command. A
dialog similar to the dialog shown in Figure C.15 will appear if 1 node was selected before
accessing this command.
246
3/15/2010
Figure C.15: Nodal Rigid Boundary Element Object Dialog

Fixed section: By activating one or more of the checkboxes in this section, you can specify
along which global directions the rigid boundary elements will be applied. During the
analysis process, an individual element will be generated for each direction. The rigid
boundary elements will constrain translation and rotation in both directions along the selected
axes.
Type section: Select the radio button for the type of movement that will be constrained by
these rigid boundary elements in this section.
element will be a line connecting the two nodes. The translation or rotation constraint will be
applied to the new node. The value in this field will control how much of the translation or
rotation affects the selected node. A large stiffness (~1e8) will cause less movement of the
selected node. This is useful for modeling springs or other supports in a model.
Description: This field allows you to apply a name for this set of rigid boundary elements.
Elastic Boundary Elements

Elastic boundary elements can be applied to any node, edge or surface on the model. An
elastic boundary element will apply a translational or rotational stiffness along any userdefined direction. Elastic boundary elements are often used to simulate springs. To add an
elastic boundary element, first access the SELECTION pull-down menu and select the
"Shape" pull-out menu and choose the desired selection method. Then access the
SELECTION pull-down menu and choose the "Select" pull-out menu and choose the desired
selection method. Click on the vertex, edge or surface to which you want to apply the elastic
boundary element and right-click anywhere in the display area. In the menu that appears,
select the "Add" pull-out menu and then the "Nodal Elastic Boundary", "Edge Elastic
Boundary" or "Surface Elastic Boundary"command. A dialog similar to the dialog
shown in Figure C.16 will appear if 1 node was selected before accessing this command.
3/15/2010
247
Figure C.16: Nodal Elastic Boundary Element Object Dialog

Type section: Select the radio button for the type of movement that will be constrained by
the elastic boundary elements in this section.
element will be a line connecting the two nodes. The translation or rotation constraint will be
applied to the new node. The value in this field will control how much of the translation or
rotation affects the selected node. A large stiffness (~1e8) will cause less movement of the
selected node. This is useful for modeling springs or other supports in a model.
Description: This field allows you to apply a name for the set of elastic boundary elements.
248
3/15/2010
Appendix D Material Model Options
3/15/2010
249
250
3/15/2010
Autodesk Algor Simulation provides twenty-three different material models to choose

from. The type of material model will depend on the element type and the analysis type
to be performed. For example, when working with a type of steel, choose "Standard"
since steel is an isotropic material. The table below lists material model, the analysis
type that can be performed, and also a short description of the material model.
Material Model
Structural
Standard Isotropic
Elastic/Plastic,
Thermal, Electrical
Properties
Truss
Beam
2-D
Membrane
Plate
Brick
Tetrahedral
Orthotropic
Elastic/Plastic,
Thermal, Electrical
Properties
Standard
Temperature
Dependent
Elastic/Plastic
Properties
Orthotropic
Temperature
Dependent
Elastic/Plastic,
Thermal Properties
Piezoelectric
Voltage induced
stresses
General Piezoelectric
Voltage induced
stresses
Anisotropic
Stress versus Strain
Stress versus strain
curve data
Bulk Modulus versus
Strain
Bulk modulus of
elasticity versus strain
data for rock
structures
Mooney-Rivilin
For rubber like
materials
Brick
Plate
Composites
MES/Nonlinear
Structural
Truss
Beam
2-D
Plate/Shell
Membrane
Brick
Tetrahedral
Kinematic
Pipe
2-D
Brick
Tetrahedral
Composite/Shell
Fluid
Flow
Thermal
Electrostatics
None
2-D
Bricks
Tetrahedral
Rod
Plate
2-D
Bricks
Tetrahedral
None
2-D
Bricks
Tetrahedral
Plate
2-D
Bricks
Tetrahedral
None
Rod
Plate
2-D
Bricks
Tetrahedral
2-D
Bricks
Tetrahedral
None
2-D
Brick
Tetrahedral
2-D
Membrane
Brick
Tetrahedral
None
2-D
Bricks
Tetrahedral
Plate
Brick
Tetrahedral
Brick
Tetrahedral
None
None
None
Brick
Tetrahedral
Brick
Tetrahedral
None
None
None
Brick
Tetrahedral
None
None
None
None
None
Truss
None
None
None
None
Brick
Tetrahedral
None
None
None
None
2-D
Brick
Tetrahedral
None
None
None
3/15/2010
251
Material Model
Structural
Ogden
For higher order
rubber like materials
None
Drucker-Prager
For soil like materials
None
Variable Tangent
For rock like materials
None
Viscoelastic
Creep
None
Viscoplastic
Creep
None
Fluid
Fluid flow material
properties
Hydrodynamic
Fluid properties for
stress calculations
Hyperfoam For
hyperelastic,
compressible materials
Blatz-Ko For
hyperelastic,
Arruda-Boyce For
hyperelastic,
Gasket for modeling
seals between parts
252
None
None
None
None
None
None
MES/Nonlinear
Structural
2-D
Brick
Tetrahedral
2-D
Brick
Tetrahedral
2-D
2-D
Brick
Shell
Tetrahedral
2-D
Brick
Tetrahedral
None
2-D
Brick
Tetrahedral
2-D
Brick
Tetrahedral
2-D
Brick
Tetrahedral
2-D
Brick
Tetrahedral
2-D Gasket
3-D Gasket
Fluid
Flow
Thermal
Electrostatics
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
2-D
Brick
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
Concrete
None
Brick
None
None
None
Duncan-Chang
For soil
None
2-D
Brick
Tetrahedral
None
None
None
3/15/2010
Autodesk Algor
Simulation 2011
Solutions Manual
II
Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Solutions Manual
3/15/2010
SOLUTIONS MANUAL
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Foreword...................................................... 1
Exercise A.......................................................................................................................... 3
Exercise B.......................................................................................................................... 9
Exercise C........................................................................................................................ 21
Exercise D........................................................................................................................ 27
Exercise E ........................................................................................................................ 35
Exercise F ........................................................................................................................ 43
Exercise G ....................................................................................................................... 49
Exercise H........................................................................................................................ 55
Exercise I ......................................................................................................................... 61
Exercise SS-1 .................................................................................................................. 69
Exercise SS-2 .................................................................................................................. 75
Exercise SS-3 .................................................................................................................. 79
Exercise SS-4 .................................................................................................................. 83
3/15/2010
III
IV
3/15/2010
Foreword
Starting Autodesk Algor Simulation
The software may be started by:
Accessing the Windows "Start" menu and selecting the "All Programs" pull-out menu,
followed by selecting the "Autodesk" group and the "Autodesk Algor Simulation" folder
within it. Select the "Autodesk Algor Simulation" command.
In addition, the program may be started by choosing the "Autodesk Algor Mesh" command
within supported CAD solid modeling applications. This method starts the program and transfersin the CAD solid model in one operation.
Defaults
Each exercise is written using the default program settings, as if the software has been opened for the first
time after installation. In this way, a user can work through the exercises in any order. If a user will be
working through several exercises during one session, some settings from one exercise may be retained,
creating incorrect or invalid steps in the following exercise. To minimize this possibility, exit the program
at the end of each exercise and reopen it to begin a new exercise. It is possible for an experienced user to
work through several exercises without this precaution, but extra care should be taken to review that input
is correct and appropriate.
It is important that the user access view commands exactly as described, except as otherwise indicated (that
is, from the pull-down menus or toolbars). These commands ensure a constant and repeatable view
orientation that is not ensured when using the ViewCube. Specifically, while the displayed plane will be
correct, the rotational position may not be as expected when using the ViewCube.
Several program settings are global. That is, once set, they will influence the program behavior for every
model until the settings are changed again. In particular, the solution steps in this manual may be
invalidated if a deviation is made from any of the settings listed below. These are the program settings
upon which the solution procedures are based:
"Tools: Options"
o
"Analysis"
"Automate Analysis" Activated
"Ask to show mesh results after CAD meshing" Activated
"Default Modeling Units" = English (in)
"CAD Import: Global CAD Import Options"

"Knit surfaces on import:" = No
Automatically generate contact pairs:" = No
"Graphics: Navigation Tools: View Cube"

"Fit-to-View on view change" Activated
"Mouse Options: Mouse settings templates" = Algor Simulation
"Views Options: Views settings templates" = Algor Simulation

3/15/2010
Forward
Archives
A Solutions CD is affixed to the inside back cover of this manual. The Solutions CD contains the input
files and result archives for all of the exercises in the Solutions Manual. There are clearly identified
subfolders containing the appropriate files for each exercise. Within a classroom setting, this solutions
archive will typically be extracted to a shared network location or will be pre-installed onto each student's
workstation. If being provided via a shared drive on the network, the input files and results archives must
be copied to the local computer before being opened. Do not try to open any models directly from the CD.
This will fail because files cannot be written to the read-only disk.
Opening Archives
1. Copy the set of folders and files to your local computer from the class directory or from the
Solutions CD.
2. Start Autodesk Algor Simulation and select the "Open" icon at the left side of the dialog.
3. Select the "Algor Simulation Archive (*.ach)" option in the Autodesk Algor Files section of the
"Files of type:" drop-down box.
4. Double-click to open the desired folder, highlight the desired file, and press the "Open" button.
5. In the "Browse for Folder" screen, select a folder on the hard drive for the location of the
restored model files.
6. Press the "OK" button.
The model will be restored to the selected folder and automatically opened in the FEA Editor environment.
For exercises based on CAD solid models, the input files will be universal format CAD solid model files,
rather than Autodesk Algor archives.
3/15/2010
Exercise A
Frame Full to Quarter-Symmetry Model Comparison
Brick Elements
Concepts that will be illustrated:
Merging two CAD solid models into a single FEA model

Applying pressure loads
Applying symmetry constraints
Comparing full model results to symmetry model results
Objective:
Mesh and analyze the frame shown below. Analyze the whole model and a quartersymmetry version of the model, side-by-side, and verify that the results are the same.
Geometry:
Start with the file Exercise A (Full).step and then merge in the second file
Exercise A (Quarter).step. Both files are in the "Exercise A\Input Files" folder of the
class directory or in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer. By merging the
two together, they can be solved simultaneously and compared more easily.
Mesh:
For a precise comparison, use a relatively small, absolute mesh size of 0.15 inch.
Constraints:
Fully fix the holes at the top of each part (half-holes in the case of the symmetry version).
Apply proper symmetry boundary conditions for the quarter-symmetry model.
3/15/2010
Exercise A
Loads:
Apply a 10,000 psi pressure normal to one surface of each part, as indicated in the
preceding diagram.
Element:
Brick
Material:
Steel (ASTM-A36)
Results:
Assembly Description
Maximum
von Mises Stress
(psi) *
Maximum
Displacement
Magnitude
(in)
Full Model
30,744
0.00759
Quarter-Symmetry Model
30,765
0.00759
* Note that the stress variation between the two parts is less than onetenth of 1% (0.07%, in fact). This small variation can easily be
explained by the differences in the surface and/or interior meshes of
the two solids.
3/15/2010
Exercise A
Solution
Opening the Model
Start Autodesk Algor Simulation, if it is not already running. Also, before starting this exercise, copy the
Exercise A (Full).step and Exercise A (Quarter).step files from the "Exercise A\Input Files" folder in the class
directory if they are not already on your computer.
We will first open the complete model and will then merge in the quarter-symmetry model.
"Open"
"Exercise A (Full).step"
Click on the "Open" icon at the left side of the dialog. If

the program is already running, go to "File: Open" to access
this screen.
Select the file Exercise A (Full).step in "Exercise A\Input
Files" directory.
"Open"
"OK"
Mouse

If the desired analysis type is not already set, press the
menu button to the right of the analysis type field. Select
the "Linear" pull-out menu, and choose the "Static Stress
with Linear Material Models" option.
"OK"
"File: Merge"
"STEP files (*.stp, *.ste,
*.step)"
"Exercise A (Quarter).step"
Access the FILE pull-down menu and select the

"Merge" command.
Select the " STEP files (*.stp, *.ste, *.step)" option in the
"Files of type:" drop-down box.
Select the file Exercise A (Quarter).step in "Exercise
A\Input Files" directory.
Press the "Open" button
"Open"
Since the model's units system has already been set, you won't be prompted regarding the units to use when
importing the second STEP file. The parts will be initially displayed using an isometric view by default.
Meshing the Model

"Mesh: Model Mesh
Settings"

"Options"
Mouse
Press the down-arrow to access the pull-down menu in the

"Type" field under the "Mesh Size" heading and select the
0.15
Type "0.15" in the "Size" field.

3/15/2010
Exercise A
"OK"
Press the "OK" button to exit the Options dialog.
"Mesh model"
Press the "Mesh model" button.
"No"
meshing results.
Adding Loads and Constraints

Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse

Click on one of the two surfaces where the pressure load is
to be applied.
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click on the remaining load
application surface.
Mouse
"Add: Surface
Pressure/Tractions"
10000
In the menu, select the "Add" pull-out menu and select the
"Surface Pressure/Tractions" command.
"OK"

View"
Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse

command.
Draw a box enclosing all four holes in the full part, being
careful not to enclose any other surfaces. Only the surfaces
of the holes should be fully enclosed within the selection
rectangle.
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, draw a second box enclosing
the two half-holes in the quarter-symmetry part, again being
careful not to enclose any other surfaces.
Mouse

Conditions"
"Surface Boundary Conditions" command.
"Fixed"
"OK"
In order to properly model symmetry, we must constrain the out-of-plane translation and the two in plane
rotations, assuming the element type has rotational DOFs. In this case we are using brick elements, which
have only translational DOFs. There are two symmetry planesone parallel to the XZ plane (requiring Ty
constraint) and the other lying on the YZ plane (requiring Tx constraint). We define the symmetry direction
as being normal to the mirror plane. The individual DOFs can be set manually using the DOF checkboxes or
set automatically by choosing the appropriate symmetry button within the boundary conditions dialog. The
automatically assigned rotational constraints have no effect on brick models and will be ignored.
Mouse
Draw a box enclosing only the bottom edge of the quartersymmetry part, as currently displayed.
Mouse
3/15/2010
Exercise A
Conditions"
"Y Symmetry"
"OK"
Mouse
Draw a box enclosing only the right edge of the quartersymmetry part, as currently displayed.
Mouse

Conditions"
"X Symmetry"
"OK"

View"

View" command.
Defining the Material Data

Mouse
Click on the "Material" heading for Part 1 in the tree view.
<Ctrl> Mouse

Mouse
"Modify Material"
Select the "Modify Material" command in the menu.
"Steel (ASTM - A36)"
Highlight the "Steel (ASTM - A36)" option in the

"Element Material Selection" dialog.
"OK"
Running the Analysis
"Tools: FEA Editor"
"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"

"Check Model" command. The model will be solid
meshed, checked, and loaded into the Results environment.
Once you are finished inspecting the model, access the
TOOLS pull-down menu and select the "FEA Editor"
command. This will return the model to the FEA Editor
environment.
"Perform Analysis" command. The model will be
analyzed and will be loaded in the Results environment.
3/15/2010
Exercise A
Viewing the Results

The von Mises stress results will be displayed by default. We will compare the maximum stress magnitude
and location for the two parts.
Model Options"
Mouse

Move the slider in the "Scale Factor" section to control the
scale factor of the displaced model. Do the displacements
look correct?
Mouse

Press the
Mouse
Activate the "Maximum Result Probe" toolbar button.
Notice that the maximum stress occurs at the fillet adjacent to the load application surface on the quartersymmetry part. Compare the stress to the value shown in the table at the end of the exercise description.
In order to confirm that the results for the full model are essentially the same, we will hide the quarter-model.
The legend box values should not change significantly. The legend box displays the maximum and minimum
values in the current display.
Mouse
"Hide"
Since the legend box did not change significantly, we know that the range of values is nearly identical in
the two models. Notice the new location of the maximum stress. Once again, it occurs at the fillet adjacent
to the load application surface. Compare the stress to the value shown in the table at the end of the exercise
description. They should be in close agreement.
Alternately, the probe tool could also have been used to compare stresses at various nodes. The slight
difference in the maximum stress value is caused by the difference in the meshes. The actual variation
between the two models, as meshed, is less than 0.1%.
Now we will compare the displacement results.
Magnitude"

command. Note the maximum value for Part 1.
Mouse
"Hide"
Select the "Show" command.
Notice that the maximum displacement is now shown on Part 2 but the magnitude is nearly identical to that
of Part 1. The difference does not appear until the eighth decimal place. You may need to adjust the
legend precision to see the difference. To do so, go to the "Display Options: Plot Settings" command.
Then, click on the "Legend Properties" tab and adjust the "Precision" setting.
A completed archive of the combined full and quarter models, with results, "Exercise A (Complete).ach" is
available in the "Exercise A\Results Archives" folder in the class directory or on the Solutions CD.
3/15/2010
Exercise B
Yoke Evaluation of Results and Generation of a Report
Brick Elements
Applying a surface variable load

Creating a local coordinate system
Reviewing reaction forces
Creating a path plot
Objective:
Knowing what we have learned in the last two chapters, we will refine our analysis of the
yoke that was performed in Chapter 1. Review the reaction forces. Generate a report that
includes an image of the von Mises stress contour, an animation of the deflections, and a
path plot of the stresses along one of the straight edges at the top of the slot.
Geometry:
Use the file Exercise B.step in the "Exercise B\Input File" folder of the class directory or
in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer. Use the default mesh settings.
Loading:
Use a surface variable load to apply the 800 lbf to the left half of the hole. The load should
have a magnitude of 0 at the ends of the diameter and should have a parabolic profile.
Constraints:
Only constrain the radial and axial translation at the small hole. The tangential direction
is free.
Element:
Brick
Materials:
Steel (ASTM-A36)
Questions:
Are the specified constraints adequate for a statically stable model? If not, what can be
done to achieve this?
How do these results compare to the results of the Chapter 1 example?
If the loads are developed by pins or shafts passing through the holes, which result is
more realistic?
Do the support reactions sum to 800 lbf?
3/15/2010
Exercise B
Equation of Parabolic Load: -400y2 + 400

Results:
10

(psi)
Maximum deflection
(in)
2,074
0.00044
3/15/2010
Exercise B
Solution
Opening the Model
Start Autodesk Algor Simulation, if it is not already running. Also, before starting this exercise, copy
the Exercise B.step file from the "Exercise B\Input File" folder in the class directory if they are not
already on your computer.
"Open"
"STEP files (*.stp, *.ste,
*.step)"
"Exercise B.step"

this screen.
Select the " STEP files (*.stp, *.ste, *.step)" option in the
CAD Files section of the "Files of type:" drop-down box.
Select the file Exercise B.step in "Exercise B\Input File"
directory.
"Open"
"OK"
Mouse

"OK"
Meshing the Model

"No"

"Generate Mesh" command to mesh the model using
default settings.
meshing results.

Before applying the loads and constraints, we must set up a cylindrical coordinate system at the center of
the small hole. This will be used to constrain the radial and axial translations.
View"
"View: Zoom Area"

command.
Access the VIEW pull-down menu and select the "Zoom
Area" command.
3/15/2010
11
Exercise B
Mouse
Draw a rectangle enclosing the small hole.
<Esc>
Press <Esc> to exit zoom mode.
Mouse
Click on the node at the top of the small hole (12 o'clock
position).
Mouse
"Inquire"
Select the "Inquire" command. It is point (3.5, 0.4, 0.75).
Mouse
Click on the node at the bottom of the small hole (6 o'clock

position).
Mouse

Select the "Inquire" command. It is point (3.5, -0.4, 0.75).
Based on the coordinates of the top and bottom vertices, the
center of the hole is at (3.5, 0, 0.75).
Right-click on the "Coordinate Systems" heading in the
tree view.
"Inquire"
Mouse
Select the "New" command.
"New"
"Cylindrical"
3.5 <Tab> <Tab> 0.75
3.5 <Tab> <Tab> 1
4 <Tab> <Tab> 0.75

Center of Constraint
Type "Center of Constraint" in the "Description" field.
"OK"
"View: Enclose"
"View: Rotate"
Mouse
12
Select the "Cylindrical" option in the "Coordinate

System Type" drop-down box.
Type "3.5" in the first field in the "Point A" row, press
<Tab> twice, and type "0.75" to define the coordinates
(3.5, 0, 0.75) as Point A. This will define the origin.
Type "3.5" in the first field in the "Point B" row, press
<Tab>, type "0", press <Tab> and type "1" to specify the
coordinates (3.5, 0, 1) as Point B. This will define the local
Z axis to be parallel to the global Z axis.
Type "4" in the first field in the "Point C" row, press
<Tab> twice, and type "0.75" to specify the coordinates
(4, 0, 0.75) for Point C. This will define the radial axis.

"Enclose" command.
command.
Rotate the model so that the surfaces where the load will be
applied are visible.
<Esc>
Press <Esc> to exit rotate mode.

Mouse
Click on one of the surfaces to which the load will be applied.
<Ctrl> Mouse
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click on the other surface to

which the load will be applied.
Mouse
"Add: Surface Variable

Loads"

Variable Loads" command.
"Normal to Surface"
Select the "Normal to Surface" radio button
-400*s^2+400
Type "-400*s^2+400" in the "Expression ("Use 'r', 's',

and 't' as variables)" field.
3/15/2010
Exercise B
Parabolic Load
Type "Parabolic Load" in the "Active function" field.
"View"
Press the "View" button.
"Y"
Select the "Y" radio button. A graph of the parabolic profile

will appear.
"Close"
"OK"

View"
Mouse

command.
Draw a rectangle enclosing the constrained half of the small
hole.
Mouse
"Coordinate Systems: Id 1:
Center of Constraint"
Mouse
Conditions"
Mouse
Mouse
Select the "Coordinate Systems" pull-out menu and select

the "Id 1: Center of Constraint" command. Icons will
appear on all of the vertices depicting the cylindrical
coordinate system.
With the surfaces still selected, right-click again in the
display area.
Activate the "Tx" checkbox. This will constrain translation
in the radial direction.
Activate the "Tz" checkbox. This will constrain translation
in the axial direction.
"OK"
Question: Are the specified constraints adequate for a statically stable model? If not, what can be done to
achieve this?
Answer: No, the specified constraints are not adequate. Since only the radial and axial translations are
constrained, the yoke will be able to rotate freely about the center of the small hole. There are various
methods that can be used to stabilize the model. For example, elastic boundary elements with low stiffness
values can be applied to resist the translation. However it is important to run the model several times with
different stiffness values. A weak stiffness will allow the model to move more than it should and a strong
stiffness will prevent it from moving the distance it should. In this case, there is a better option. Since we
expect the displacement results to be symmetric, we know that there should be no displacement in the Y
direction along the centerline of the model, where Y=0. Therefore we can constrain the Y translation of a
node or edge along the centerline of the model.
"Selection: Select: Edges"
Mouse
Access the SELECTION pull-down menu and then the

"Select" pull-out menu. Choose the "Edges" command.
Draw a selection rectangle enclosing the far left node on the
yoke (at the 9 o'clock position). There is an edge that
separates the top and bottom halves of the outer cylindrical
surface that will now be selected.
Mouse
"Add: Edge Boundary

Condition"
Select the "Add" pull-out menu and select the "Edge

3/15/2010
13
Exercise B
Mouse
Activate the "Ty" checkbox.
"OK"

View"

View" command.

Mouse

view.
"Modify Material"
"Steel (ASTM A36)"
Highlight the "Steel (ASTM A36)" option in the "Element

Material Selection" dialog.
"OK"
"Tools: FEA Editor"
"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"

"Check Model" command. The model will be checked and
will be loaded into the Results environment.
environment.
Viewing the Results

Initially, the von Mises stress results will be shown by default. Compare the maximum stress to the value
shown in the results table in the exercise description. We will now verify that the total X-reaction force is
800 lbf.
Mouse
Mouse
View"
"Results Options: Show
Displaced Model"
14

button to show the load and constraint symbols. Notice the
force distribution at the inside of the large hole.
button again to hide the load and constraint symbols.
command.
deactivate the "Show Displaced Model" command. This
will make it easier to select the nodes on the interior of the
small hole.
3/15/2010
Exercise B
"Results: Reactions Vector:
Residual Forces: X"
"Selection: Select: Nodes"
Mouse
"Inquire: Results"
"Sum"

"Reactions Vector" pull-out menu. Select the "Residual
Forces" pull-out menu and select the "X" command.
"Select" pull-out menu. Select the "Nodes" command.
Draw a circle enclosing the nodes of the small hole. Only
the constrained nodes will have a residual force value, so
you needn't be concerned about selecting nodes around the
entire inside diameter surface.
Access the INQUIRE pull-down menu and select the
"Results" command.
Select the "Sum" option in the "Summary:" drop-down
box. The result is approximately -793 lbf. This is within
1% of the 800 lbf that was expected. A finer mesh would
reduce the error.
Mouse
button in the upper right corner to close the

Press the
Inquire Results dialog.
<Esc>
Press <Esc> to clear the selected nodes.
Saving an Image
"Results: Stress: von Mises"
View"
Results Options: Displaced
Model Options"

"Stress" pull-out menu. Select the "von Mises" command.
View" command.
Activate the "Show Displaced Model" checkbox.
Mouse
10
<Enter>
Type "10" in the "Scale Factor" field and press the

<Enter> key.
"Transparent"
Select the "Transparent" radio button.
Mouse

Press the
Access the FILE pull-down menu and select the "Export"
pull-out menu. Select the "Image" command.
"File: Export: Image"
Press <Enter> to save the entire display area to a file.
<Enter>
Mouse
von Mises Stress
"Save"
Select "Portable network graphics file (*.png)" from the

"Save as type:" pull-down list, if it is not already selected.
Rather than using the default file name, type "von Mises
Stress" into the "File name:" field.
Press the "Save" button.
3/15/2010
15
Exercise B
Creating an Animation
For the animation, we will switch the current results from von Mises stress to Displacement Magnitude.
Magnitude"
Results Options: Displaced
Model Options"
"Do Not Show"
Mouse
"Animation: Save AS AVI"
Displacement Animation

command.
Select the "Do Not Show" radio button to deactivate the
transparent overlay of the undisplaced shape.
Press the
"Start Animation" command. View the animation in the
display area.
"Stop Animation" command.
"Save As AVI" command.
Rather than using the default file name, type
"Displacement Animation" into the "File name:" field.
"Save"
"No"
Press the "No" button when asked if you want to view the
animation now.
Creating a Path Plot

Mesh"
View"
<X> <>
"View: Zoom Area"
Mouse
<Esc>
Access the RESULTS pull-down menu and select the "Stress"

pull-out menu. Choose the "von Mises" command.
Access the VIEW pull-down menu and select the "Display"
pull-out menu. Choose the "Shaded with Mesh" command
to make selection of the path plot nodes easier..
command.
Holding the <X> key, press the cursor down key, <>, twice.
This will rotate the model 30 degrees about the X-axis with
the top of the model moving towards you.
Access the VIEW pull-down menu and select the "Zoom
Area" command.
Click and drag the mouse to define a zoom area enclosing the
straight edge along the top of the yoke's slot.
Press the <Esc> key to exit the zoom area mode.
We will use the polyline method to select the nodes for our path plot. An irregular selection area is defined
by drawing a series of polylines forming a closed-loop border around the desired entities.
16
3/15/2010
Exercise B
"Selection: Shape: Polyline"
Mouse
<Enter>

"Shape" pull-out menu. Choose the "Polyline" command.
Click the mouse several times to define a selection area that
tightly encloses the sixteen nodes along the top edge of the
slot (see image below). Press the <Enter> key to complete
the last segment and close the polyline loop. Verify that all
of the desired nodes, and no others, are selected.
Polyline Selection Area: Click at 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Then, press <Enter>.

Mouse
"Create Path Plot..."
Choose the "Create Path Plot" command.
Mouse
Right-click on the list of nodes in the Path Plot Definition

dialog.
"Sort by X Coordinate"
Choose the "Sort by X Coordinate" command.
"Close"
Press the "Close" button to dismiss the Path Plot Definition

dialog.
The resulting plot will show the stress along the subject edge against the distance along the edge moving
from the large end of the yoke towards the small end (+X direction). The stresses should trend upward as
you move along the edge in this direction. Now, let's export a PNG image of the graph.
Mouse
"Export Dialog..."
Choose the "Export Dialog..." command.
"BMP"
Activate the "PNG" radio button.
"File"
Activate the "File" radio button.
"Browse"
Press the "Browse" button.
von Mises Path Plot
Navigate to the folder where you wish to place the image and
type "von Mises Path Plot" into the "File name:" field.
"Save"
1024 <Tab> 768 <Tab>

100
Enter "1024" into the "Width:" field, press <Tab>, and

enter "768", press <Tab>, and enter "100" to define a 1024
x 768 pixel image at 100 dpi resolution.
"Export"
Press the "Export" button.
3/15/2010
17
Exercise B
Generating a Report
"Tools: Report"
"Actions: Configure Report "

"Report" command.
Access the ACTIONS pull-down menu and select the
"Configure Report" command.
NOTE: When selecting portions of the report to modify, click on the item name and not on the checkbox.
Clicking on the checkbox will toggle the inclusion state of the item (i.e. whether it is to be
included or excluded from the HTML report).
Mouse
Select the "Project Name" heading.
Mouse:
Exercise B
Mouse:
Analysis of Yoke under
800 lbf Loading
Click and drag the mouse to select the text "Design

Analysis" and type "Exercise B" to replace it.
Click and drag the mouse to select the text "Project Name
Here" and replace this text by typing "Analysis of Yoke
under 800 lbf Loading".
Mouse
Select the "Title and Author" heading.
Your Name
Type your name into the "Author" field.
Your Department
Type your department name into the "Department" field.
Mouse
Mouse
Mouse
"Tree: Add Image File(s)..."
Mouse
"von Mises Stress.png"
"von Mises Path Plot.png"
"Open"
"von Mises Stress"
Deformation exaggerated
to 10% of model size
for visibility.
"von Mises Path Plot"
Stresses along edge of
slot moving in the +X
direction.
"Tree: Add AVI File(s)..."
18
Deselect the "Executive Summary" item by clicking on

the associated checkbox. This item will be excluded from
the report.
Click on the checkbox next to the "Results Presentations"
heading to deselect it.
Click on the checkbox next to the "Processor Log Files"
heading to deselect it.
Image File(s)..." command. This will allow you to include
user-specified images within the report.
Select "Portable network graphics file (*.png)" from the
"Save as type:" pull-down list, if it is not already selected.
Browse to and select both of the previously created image
files, "von Mises Stress.png" and "von Mises Path Plot.png".
Press the "Open" button. Two new headings will appear in
the report tree view. The headings will match the respective
filenames that had been selected.
Click on the "von Mises Stress" heading to select it. Do
not click on the checkbox or this item will be deactivated.
Type "Deformation exaggerated to 10% of model size
for visibility." in the "Caption" field.
Click on the "von Mises Path Plot" heading to select it.
Type "Stresses along edge of slot moving in the +X
direction." in the "Caption" field.
AVI File(s)..." command. This will allow you to include a
user-specified animation file within the report.
3/15/2010
Exercise B
"Displacement Animation.avi"
"Open"
Browse to and select the previously created AVI file,

"Displacement Animation.avi".
Press the "Open" button. A "Displacement Animation"
heading will appear in the report tree and it will be selected.
Deformation exaggerated
to 10% of model size
for visibility.
Type "Deformation exaggerated to 10% of model size

for visibility." in the "Caption" field.
"Generate Report"
Press the "Generate Report" button. The completed report

will appear. You can scroll down and review the full report,
verifying the presence of the stress plot and displacement
animation, which will be looping continuously.
A completed archive with results is located in the "Exercise B\Results Archive" folder in the class directory
or in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer.
3/15/2010
19
Exercise B
20
3/15/2010
Exercise C
Midplane Meshing and Plate Element Orientation
Plate Elements
Creating a midplane mesh

Modeling with plate elements
Properly defining plate element orientations
Applying pressures to plate elements
Objective:
Generate a plate model of the duct and nozzle assembly shown below, apply an internal
pressure throughout the assembly, and analyze it.
Geometry:
Use the file Exercise C.step from the "Exercise C\Input File" directory in the class
directory or in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer. Perform a midplane
mesh using an absolute mesh size of 0.2 inch for all parts.
Use the automatically calculated midplane mesh thickness for all parts.
3/15/2010
21
Exercise C
Loading:
20 psi internal pressure throughout assembly
Constraints:
Fully constrained at inlet and outlet edges (as shown on diagram)
Element:
Plate
Material:
Stainless Steel (AISI 302) Cold-rolled
Results:
(psi)
Maximum deflection
(in)
~37,210
0.0178
* * *
Hints:
22
The coordinate origin is in the exact center of the square header

The centerline of the rectangular inlet is at Z = 6.75"
The centerlines of the round outlets are at Y = +/- 4.5" and Z -5"
3/15/2010
Exercise C
Solution
Opening the Model
the Exercise C.step file from the "Exercise C\Input File" folder in the class directory if they are not
"Open"
"Exercise C.step"
Select the "Open" icon at the left side of the dialog. If the
program is already running, go to "File: Open" to access this
screen.
Navigate to the location of the "Exercise C.step" file on
your computer and highlight it.
"Open"
"OK"
Mouse

"OK"
Meshing the Model

"Mesh: Model Mesh
Settings"
"Midplane"

Select the "Midplane" radio button in the "Mesh type"
section of the "Model Mesh Settings" dialog.
"Options"
Mouse

0.2
"OK"
"Mesh model"
"No"
Mouse
meshing results.
model around for inspection of the mesh. This mesh
appears to be acceptable.
3/15/2010
23
Exercise C

View"

View" command.
"Select" pull-out menu. Select the "Edges" command.
Mouse
Click on one of the four edges at the rectangular inlet.
<Ctrl> Mouse
Holding the <Ctrl> key, select the remaining three inlet

edges and the four, half-circle outlet edges.
Mouse
"Add: Edge Boundary

Conditions"
"Edge Boundary Conditions" command.
"Fixed"
"OK"

<Ctrl> A

While holding <Ctrl>, press the "A" key. This will select
all surfaces of the model.
Mouse
"Add: Surface Pressure/

Tractions"
20
"OK"
In the "Magnitude" field, type in "20".
Defining the Element and Material Data

Based on the hints given at the end of the exercise description and a quick investigation of the surface
number assignments, it can be seen that the default element normal point (0, 0, 0) will work for all surfaces
of Part 1 except for surfaces 35 and 37. The table below summarizes the element normal point settings
required for proper load orientation.
24
Item Description
Coordinates of Normal Point
Orientation Method
Part 1, Surfaces 1 34 and 36
(0, 0, 0)
Surface-based
Part 1, Surfaces 35 and 37
(0, 0, 6.75)
Surface-based
Part 2
(0, 4.5, -5)
Part-based
Part 3
(0, -4.5, -5)
Part-based
3/15/2010
Exercise C
We will now enter the necessary plate element data and material properties.
Mouse
Mouse
"Surface-based"
6.75
Double-click on the "Element Definition" heading under

Access the pull-down menu to the right of the
"Properties" input field and select "Surface-based."
Type "6.75" in the "Normal Point (Z)" column for
Surface 34, 35, 36, and 37 (four places total).
"OK"
Mouse
4.5 <Tab> -5

Type "4.5" in the "Normal Point (Y)" cell, press <Tab>,
and type "-5" in the "Normal Point (Z)" cell.
"OK"
Mouse
-4.5 <Tab> -5

Type "-4.5" in the "Normal Point (Y)" cell, press <Tab>,
and type "-5" in the "Normal Point (Z)" cell.
"OK"
Mouse
Click on the "Material" heading under Part 1 in the tree view.
<Ctrl> Mouse
Holding the <Ctrl> key, also select the "Material"

headings under Part 2 and Part 3.
Mouse
"Modify Material"
"Stainless Steel (AISI 302)

Cold-rolled"
Select "Stainless Steel (AISI 302) Cold-rolled" within the

"Steel" folder of the Autodesk Algor Material Library.
"OK"

"Check Model" command. The model will be checked
and will be loaded in the Results environment.
To make it easier to see if the load directions are correct, we will make the vector orientations consistent.
Mouse
"Tools: Options"
If the load vectors are not already visible, click the "Toggle
Load and Constraint Display" toolbar button to show the
load and constraint symbols.
"Options" command.
Mouse
Go to the "Results" tab within the Options dialog.
"Global FEA Objects

Preferences"
Press the "Global FEA Objects Preferences" button.
"All arrows point at point of

attachment"
Under the "Arrow Pointing" heading, activate the "All

arrows point at point of attachment" option for the
"Current" model (left radio button).
3/15/2010
25
Exercise C
"OK"
Press the "OK" button to close the Global FEA Objects

Preferences dialog.
"OK"
Careful examination will reveal that the lines protruding through the exterior of the assembly are the tail
ends of the pressure vectors, due to their length. The arrow heads should all be pointing against the inside
surfaces, indicating that the element normal point is correctly defined for all plate elements.
"Tools: FEA Editor"
"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
Mouse

environment.
button to hide the load and constraint symbols.
Viewing the Results

Note the maximum von Mises stress and compare it to the value shown in the results table at the end of the
exercise description.
Show the mesh lines so that the deformed shape of the assembly will be more clearly visible.
Mesh"
Magnitude"
Access the VIEW pull-down menu, select the "Display" pullout menu, and choose the "Shaded with Mesh" command.
command. Compare the maximum displacement to the value
shown in the results table at the end of the exercise description.
A completed archive with results is located in the "Exercise C\Results Archive" folder in the class directory
26
3/15/2010
Exercise D
Yoke and Clevis Assembly
Brick Elements
Using refinement points

Adding a joint to a model
Using the Bolt Wizard to create a bolted connection
Objective:
If you review the results of the yoke analysis performed in Chapter 1, you will notice that
the stress results are not perfectly symmetrical, as would be expected. Perform the
analysis again using the refinement options. Also, add a pin joint to the large hole and
specify a bolted connection at the small hole. Apply the load to the center of the joint.
Geometry:
Use the file Exercise D.step in the "Exercise D\Input File" folder of the class directory or
in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer.
Meshing:
After meshing initially using a mesh size setting of 85 percent, apply refinement points
using the "Refinement Points: Automatic" command. Adjust the slider towards the right
until approximately 45 refinement points are created. Then, regenerate the surface mesh.
Create the pin joint and the bolt after the refined mesh has been finalized. Regenerate the
mesh one more time after specifying the bolt so that the head and nut will be properly
connected to the sides of the clevis.
Loading:
800 lbf total (400 lbf per node) in the X direction at the center of the pin joint in the
large hole.
3/15/2010
27
Exercise D
Constraints:
Fully constrain the four edges of the clevis base. This will simulate the behavior of a full
perimeter weld. Do not fix the entire base surface.
Constrain Ty at the center of the large hole's joint. This will prevent rotation of the yoke
about the center of the small hole and ensure symmetrical behavior of the top and bottom
halves of the yoke.
Element:
Brick (Yoke), Beam (Bolt), and Truss (Joint, 0.1 in2 cross-sectional area)
Material:
Steel (ASTM-A36) Yoke and Clevis

Steel (AISI 4130) Joint and Bolt
Bolt
Specifications: Bolt Diameter = 0.75"
Head and Nut Diameter = 1.125"
Number of Spokes = 12
Specify a "Tight Fit" for all bolt hole surfaces
Axial Force (Preload) = 500 lbf
Results:
28
Description
Maximum
von Mises Stress
(psi)
Maximum
Displacement
(in)
Yoke (Part 1)
~1,624
0.000588
Clevis (Part 2)
~2,306
0.000149
3/15/2010
Exercise D
Solution
Opening the Model
the Exercise D.step file from the "Exercise D\Input File" folder in the class directory if they are not
"Open"
"Exercise D.step"
Click on the "Open" icon at the left side of the dialog. If the
screen.
Navigate to the location of the "Exercise D.step" file on
"Open"
"OK"
Mouse

"OK"
Meshing the Model

We will mesh the model at the 85% of the default mesh size. Then we will generate automatic refinement
points.
"Mesh: Model Mesh
Settings"
Mouse
"Mesh model"
"No"
"Mesh: Refinement Points:
Automatic"

Move the slider towards the right to change the mesh size to
"85%."
Press the "Mesh model" button in the "Model Mesh
Settings" dialog.
meshing results.
"Refinement Points" pull-out menu. Select the
"Automatic" command.
Mouse
Move the slider to two tick marks away from the right end.
"Generate"
Press the "Generate" button. The dialog should indicate

the generation of approximately 45 refinement points.
"Close"
3/15/2010
29
Exercise D
"No"

meshing results.
Creating the Bolt and Joint

"View: Orientation: Bottom
View"
"Mesh: Create Bolt"
Click on the side surface of the clevis that is facing you.
Mouse
"Add"
View"
"Add"
"Add"
Press the "Add" button within the "Bolt head" section of

the "Generate Bolted Connection" dialog.
command.
Click on the side surface of the clevis that is now facing you.
Mouse
Mouse

"Orientation" pull-out menu. Select the "Bottom View"
command.
Access the MESH pull-down menu and select the "Create
Bolt" command.
Press the "Add" button within the "Nut" section of the

"Generate Bolted Connection" dialog.
Click near the center of the small hole and drag the mouse
to create a selection circle enclosing the I.D. surfaces of the
hole. There are a total of six half-cylinder surfaces.
Press the "Add" button within the "Interior hole
surface(s) for one hole" section of the "Generate Bolted
Connection" dialog.
Mouse
Activate the "Tight Fit" checkboxes for all six surfaces.
0.75
Enter "0.75" into the "Bolt diameter" field.
1.125
Enter "1.125" into the "Head diameter" field.
1.125
Enter "1.125" into the "Nut diameter" field.
500
Enter "500" into the "Magnitude" field to the right of the

"Axial Force" radio button.
"OK"
Press the "OK" button to create the bolt.
Notice the construction vertices that have been placed at the ends of the spokes representing the bolt head
and nut. We must now regenerate the mesh so that nodes will be created on the surface mesh of the clevis
to connect to these spokes. The purpose of the construction vertices is to force the creation of a node
wherever one of them lies on the surface of a CAD solid.
30
3/15/2010
Exercise D
"No"

meshing results.
Now we will add the joint to the large hole.
Mouse
"Mesh: Create Joint"
"OK"
Click near the center of the large hole and drag the mouse to
create a selection circle enclosing the I.D. surfaces of the
hole. There two half-cylinder surfaces.
Access the MESH pull-down menu and select the "Create
Joint" command.
Press the "OK" button to create a joint with the default
settings.
Defining Element and Material Data

Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse

Mouse
"Modify Material"
"Steel (ASTM-A36)"
Select "Steel (ASTM-A36)" within the "Steel" folder of

the Autodesk Algor Material Library.
"OK"
Mouse
"Steel (AISI 4130)"
Double-click the "Material" heading for Part 3 in the tree

view.
Select "Steel (AISI 4130)" within the "Steel" folder of the
Autodesk Algor Material Library.
"OK"
Mouse
Double-click the "Element Definition" heading for Part 4

in the tree view.
0.1
Type "0.1" in the "Cross-sectional area" field.
"OK"
Mouse
"Steel (AISI 4130)"
Double-click the "Material" heading for Part 4 in the tree

view.
Select "Steel (AISI 4130)" within the "Steel" folder of the
Autodesk Algor Material Library.
"OK"


3/15/2010
31
Exercise D
Mouse
Draw a box enclosing the top edge of the clevis, as

currently displayed.
Mouse
"Add: Edge Boundary

Conditions"

Press the "Fixed" button The title bar of the dialog should
indicate that four edges are selected.
"Fixed"
"OK"

Mouse
Draw a box enclosing the center of the joint in the large hole.
Mouse

Conditions"

Activate the "Ty" checkbox under the "Constrained DOFs"
heading.
"Ty"
"OK"
Mouse
"Add: Nodal Forces"
With the joint's center nodes still selected, right-click once

again in the display area.
Forces" command.
-400
Type "-400" in the "Magnitude" field.
"X"
Select the "X" radio button.
"OK"
Analysis
"Tools: FEA Editor"
"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"

"Check Model" command. The model will be checked and
will be loaded into the Results environment.
environment.
Viewing the Results
32

View"

"Orientation" command. Select the "Isometric View"
command.
Mouse
Select the Part 3 heading in the tree view.
<Ctrl> Mouse
Holding the <Ctrl> key, also select the Part 4 heading in the
tree view.
3/15/2010
Exercise D
"Hide"
Select the "Hide" command to hide the bolt and joint.
Mouse
Activate the "Maximum Result Probe" toolbar button.
Notice that the maximum von Mises stress occurs in the clevis (Part 2). Compare the value to the one
shown in the results table at the end of the exercise description.
Mouse
"Hide"
Select the "Hide" command to hide the clevis.
Now compare the maximum von Mises stress for the yoke to the value shown in the results table at the end
of the exercise description. We will now compare the displacement results.
Magnitude"
Access the RESULTS pull-down menu, select the

"Displacement" pull-out menu, and choose the
"Magnitude" command.
Compare the yoke's maximum displacement to the value shown in the results table at the end of the
Mouse
"Show"
Select the "Show" command to hide the clevis.
Mouse
"Hide"
Select the "Hide" command to hide the clevis.
Finally, compare the maximum displacement of the clevis to the value shown in the results table at the end
of the exercise description.
A completed archive with results is located in the "Exercise D\Results Archive" folder in the class directory
3/15/2010
33
Exercise D
34
3/15/2010
Exercise E
Yoke Assembly with Contact
Brick Elements
Applying surface contact between parts in an assembly.
Objective:
Analyze the yoke model again, but include the pins in the CAD solid model. The loads
and constraints will be applied to the pins and contact will be defined between the pins
and the yoke.
Geometry:
Use the file Exercise E.step in the "Exercise E\Input File" folder of the class directory or
in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer. Mesh the model at 90% of the
default mesh size.
Loading:
Apply a total of 800 lbf in traction to the end faces of the pin in the large hole.
Constraints:
Fully constrain the end faces of the pin in the small hole.
Constrain the Z translation of the shaft in the large hole.
Element:
Brick
Material:
Steel (ASTM-A36) for all parts
Questions:
Are the specified constraints adequate to ensure a statically stable model and to prevent
unwanted motion of the parts? If not, add the necessary constraints. As always,
constrain the model in a way that will provide the necessary stability but will not impede
the expected natural deformation of the parts.
How do the results compare to the previous results?
How do the runtimes compare?
3/15/2010
35
Exercise E
Results:
Part Description

(psi)
Yoke (Part 1)
3,430
Small Pin (Part 2)
3,592
Large Pin (Part 3)
425
Full Assembly
36
Maximum deflection
(in)
0.00047
3/15/2010
Exercise E
Solution
Opening the Model
the Exercise E.step file from the "Exercise E\Input File" folder in the class directory if they are not
"Open"
"Exercise E.stp"

this screen.
Navigate to the location of the "Exercise E.stp" file on
"Open"
"OK"
Mouse

"OK"
Meshing the Model

Since all places where one part intersects another are to be defined as surface contact, we could simply
make the default contact type = "Surface Contact." However, this will lump all contact results under a
single heading in the Results environment. The total contact force is automatically calculated and
presented as one of the analysis results. In order to differentiate between the total contact force at the
small pin and at the large pin, we will make each interface a separate contact pair definition. This will
produce two contact pair headings within the Results environment.
Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
2 in the tree view.
Mouse
"Contact: Surface Contact"
Select the "Contact" pull-out menu and select the

"Surface Contact" command.
Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click on the heading for

Mouse
3/15/2010
37
Exercise E
"Contact: Surface Contact"
"Mesh: Model Mesh
Settings"
Mouse
"Mesh model"
"No"
Select the "Contact" pull-out menu and select the

"Surface Contact" command.
Move the slider to 90% of the default mesh size in the
"Model Mesh Settings" dialog.
Settings" dialog.
meshing results.

View"

command.
Click on the surface at the end of the large pin.
Mouse
View"
<Ctrl> Mouse

command.
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click on the surface at this
end of the large pin.
Mouse
"Add: Surface Forces"

Forces" command.
-400
"X"
Select the "X" radio button.
"OK"
Mouse
Click on the surface at the end of the small pin.

View"
<Ctrl> Mouse

command.
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click on the surface at this
end of the small pin.
Mouse

Condition"

"Fixed"
"OK"
We must prevent Z-translation of the yoke and the large pin. Since these parts are symmetrical and we
expect the yoke to deform symmetrically, the best place to constrain Z-translation is at the center plane of
each part (i.e. the plane of symmetry). There would be no normal translation of nodes lying on the plane of
38
3/15/2010
Exercise E
Z-symmetry. Therefore, we can prevent Z-translation without inhibiting the natural deformation of the part
or exaggerating its stiffness. For your convenience, the inside surfaces around the yoke slot and the
cylindrical surface of the large pin have been split in half to provide edges in the middle of the parts.
"View: Display: Mesh"
View"
Mouse

"Display" pull-out menu. Select the "Mesh" option.
command.
command.
Click and drag the mouse to draw a selection rectangle
enclosing the middle edges of the yoke slot and large pin in
one operation. Keep the rectangle narrow so as not to
accidentally select any edges on the face of the yoke.
Mouse
"Add: Edge Boundary

Condition"

Boundary Condition" command. Note that the title bar
of the boundary condition dialog should indicate eight (8)
edges.
Mouse
Activate the "Tz" checkbox.
"OK"

View"

command.
We must prevent rotation of the large pin and rotation of the yoke about the centerline of the small pin.
This must be done using translational constraints, since brick elements have no rotational degrees of
freedom and applying rotational constraints would have no effect. Another method would be to attach a set
of beam elements and apply the rotational constraint to the beams. That is not necessary in this case.
The cylindrical surfaces of the large pin and associated hole are split at the three o'clock and nine o'clock
locations. If Y-translation constraints are applied to these edges (Y being the tangential direction), the
undesired rotations will be prevented but the natural stretching of the yoke and bending of the pin will not be
impeded. In this case, we are taking advantage of the fact that the top and bottom halves of the yoke assembly
are symmetrical and there will theoretically be no nodal translations normal to the plane of Y-symmetry.
Mouse
Click and drag the mouse to draw a selection rectangle

enclosing the nine o'clock and three o'clock edges of the
large pin and hole in one operation.
Mouse
"Add: Edge Boundary

Condition"

Boundary Condition" command. Note that the title bar
of the boundary condition dialog should indicate six (6)
edges.
Mouse
Activate the "Ty" checkbox.
"OK"
Click the "OK" button.
3/15/2010
39
Exercise E
Mesh"
View"

"Display" pull-out menu. Select the "Shaded with Mesh"
option.
View" command.

Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse

Mouse
"Modify Material"
"Steel (ASTM-A36)"
Highlight the "Steel (ASTM-A36)" option in the "Select

Material" section.
"OK"

"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"

Viewing the Results

Rotate and zoom in or out as desired to inspect the von Mises stress distribution. The maximum stress is
in the small pin. We will now selectively hide and show the parts to determine the maximum stress in the
others. As we do, compare your results to those listed in the table at the end of the exercise description.
Right-click on the Part 2 heading in the tree view and
choose the Hide command. The maximum stress result
will change based on the remaining visible pars. The yoke
stress is much higher than the large pin stress.
Right-click on the Part 1 heading in the tree view and
choose the Hide command. Now, the legend shows the
stress range in the large pin only.
Mouse
Hide
Mouse
Hide
Now, we will look at the displacement magnitude for the assembly and compare your results to the value
shown in the table at the end of the exercise description.
40
Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
Holding the <Ctrl> key, also select the Part 2 heading in the
tree view.
3/15/2010
Exercise E
Mouse
Show
Results: Displacement:
Magnitude
Right-click on one of the selected headings and choose the

Show command.
"Displacement" pull-out menu. Choose the "Magnitude"
command. Note the maximum displacement value for the
assembly.
Finally, we will also check the total contact forces between the yoke and the two pins.
Mouse
"Contact Force"
"OK"
Mouse
"Contact Force"
"OK"
Right-click on the heading for the contact pair between the

large pin and the yoke in the tree view.
Select the "Contact Force" command. The total contact
force is approximately -1,331 lbf.
Right-click on the heading for the contact pair between the
small pin and the yoke in the tree view.
Select the "Contact Force" command. The total contact
force is approximately -1,180 lbf.
A completed archive with results is located in the "Exercise E\Results Archive" folder in the class directory
3/15/2010
41
Exercise E
42
3/15/2010
Exercise F
Concrete Platform
Brick Elements
Setting up, running, and reviewing a modal analysis

Setting up, running, and reviewing a critical buckling analysis
Objective:
Determine the first six (6) natural frequencies and their mode shapes for the concrete
platform. Then, in a second design scenario, perform a critical buckling analysis. Solve
for the first five (5) critical buckling modes (default setting).
Geometry:
Use the file Exercise F.SAT in the "Exercise F\Input File" folder of the class directory or in
the copy of the solutions folders on your computer. Specify an absolute mesh size of 3 inches.
Constraints:
Fully fixed the bottom surface at each of the four legs.
Loading (for Critical Buckling Analysis):

Standard gravity (-Z direction)
100,000 lbf normal force acting on top surface
Element:
Brick
Material:
Concrete (High Strength)
3/15/2010
43
Exercise F
Modal Results:
Mode Number
Frequency (Hz)
10.8
12.0
17.5
20.8
36.7
42.8
Mode Number
Buckling Load
Multiplier
170
200
229
236
293
Buckling Results:
Note:
44
The buckling safety factor is very high, indicating that this structure is clearly not
susceptible to buckling due to geometric instability. Nonetheless, a linear static stress
analysis would show that the applied load already produces tensile stresses exceeding the
strength of non-reinforced concrete, which is typically less than 500 psi. So the structure
would collapse due to material failure. This is stated to emphasize the importance of
checking a design with regard to both static stress and buckling criteria.
3/15/2010
Exercise F
Solution
Opening the Model
the Exercise F.step file from the "Exercise F\Input File" folder in the class directory if they are not
"Open"
"ACIS (*.sat)"
"Exercise F.SAT"
screen.
Select the "ACIS (*.sat)" option in the CAD Files section
of the "Files of type:" drop-down box.
Navigate to the location of the "Exercise F.SAT" file on
"Open"
Mouse
"Linear: Natural Frequency
(Modal)"
Press the menu button to the right of the analysis type field.
Select the "Linear" pull-out menu, and choose the
"Natural Frequency (Modal)" option.
"OK"
Meshing the Model

"Mesh: Model Mesh
Settings"

"Options"
Mouse

Type "3" in the "Size" field.
"OK"
"Mesh model"
"No"
meshing results.
Adding Constraints
View"

command.
3/15/2010
45
Exercise F
Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse

Click on one of the small square surfaces at the four corners
of the model.
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, select the remaining three
small square surfaces.
Mouse

Conditions"

"Fixed"
"OK"
Defining the Material Data and Analysis Parameters

Mouse
"Concrete (High Strength)"
Double-click on the "Material" heading for Part 1 in the

tree view.
Highlight the "Concrete (High Strength)" option in the
"Select Material" section.
"OK"
6
Access the ANALYSIS pull-down menu and choose the

Type "6" into the "Number of frequencies/modes to
calculate" input field.
"OK"
Running the Modal Analysis
"Tools: FEA Editor"
"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
View"
46

"Check Model" command. The model will be solidmeshed, checked, and loaded into the Results environment.
environment.
analyzed and then displayed in the Results environment.
View" command.
3/15/2010
Exercise F
Viewing the Modal Results

Note the frequency of the first vibration mode and compare it to the value in the modal results table near
the end of the exercise description. We will advance through the remaining modes and compare each of
these values to the table as well.

Next"
Access the ANIMATION pull-down menu and choose the

"Start Animation" command to clearly see the structure's
oscillations for this mode shape.
"Stop Animation" command
select the "Load Case" pull-out menu. Choose the "Next"
command to advance to the next mode shape.
Repeat the preceding three steps until you've reviewed all six mode shapes and natural frequencies.
Creating a New Design Scenario for the Buckling Analysis
"Tools: FEA Editor"

Editor" command. This will return the model to the FEA
Editor environment.
Mouse
Right-click on the "Analysis Type" heading in the tree view.

Linear: Critical Buckling Load"
"Yes"
Select the "Set Current Analysis Type" pull-out menu and

then the "Linear" pull-out menu. Choose the "Critical
Buckling Load" option.
Press the "Yes" button to create a new design scenario for
this analysis.
Defining the Loads

The loads for the buckling analysis include a surface force, which will be applied directly to the model's top
surface, and a gravitational load, which will be defined within the analysis parameters screen. The
selection mode should remain as point-selection of surfaces, as it was for the prior design scenario.
View"

View" command.
Mouse
Click on the large rectangular surface at the top of the platform.
Mouse
"Add: Surface Force"

Force" command.
100000
"OK"

3/15/2010
47
Exercise F
1
Type "1" into the "Acceleration multiplier" input field.
Mouse
Click on the "Gravity/Acceleration" tab.
"Acceleration/Gravity Load"
Press the "Acceleration/Gravity Load" button to set the

acceleration magnitude to equal standard gravity
(386.4 in/sec2). Notice that the default direction (-Z) is
correct for this model.
"OK"
Running the Critical Buckling Analysis

Since the buckling model was copied from the completed modal analysis model, it is already solid meshed and has
already been checked previously. The only reason to check the model again would be to verify the direction of the
load on the top surface. For this phase of the exercise, we will skip checking the model.
"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"

Viewing the Buckling Results

Note the load multiplier for the first buckling mode and compare it to the value in the buckling results table
at the end of the exercise description. We will advance through the remaining modes and compare each of
these values to the table as well.

Next"

"Start Animation" command to clearly see the structure's
shape for this buckling mode.
"Stop Animation" command
select the "Load Case" pull-out menu. Choose the "Next"
command to advance to the next buckling mode.
Repeat the preceding three steps until you've reviewed all five buckling multipliers and shapes.
A completed archive with results is located in the "Exercise F\Results Archive" folder in the class directory
or in the copy of the solutions folders on your computer. The results archive includes a third design
scenario (static stress analysis) showing tensile stresses in excess of the strength of non-reinforced concrete.
48
3/15/2010
Exercise G
Infrared Detector Model
Brick Elements

Specifying a surface radiation load
Running a steady-state heat transfer analysis
Objective:
Determine the temperature of an infrared detector that is submerged in liquid nitrogen

and has a specified amount of heat generated by an electrical heater.
Geometry:
Use the file Exercise G.ach in the "Exercise G\Input File" folder copied to your computer
from the class directory or Solutions CD. Mesh the model using an absolute mesh size of
0.5 mm.
The cold finger has been built as two parts. One part represents the portion that is
submerged in the liquid nitrogen.
Loading:
The bottom 25 mm of the finger has a surface applied temperatures of -196C.

The top surface of the detector radiates to an ambient temperature of 27C with a
radiation function of 0.9.
The heat generated by the electrical heater is 0.025 J/(mm3*s).
Element:
Brick
3/15/2010
49
Exercise G
Materials:
Electrical heater and detector: Thermal conductivity = 1.00 J/(s*mm*C)

Cold finger: Thermal conductivity = 0.01 J/(s*mm*C)
Results:
Maximum Temperature
55.9 C
50
3/15/2010
Exercise G
Solution
Opening the Model
Start Autodesk Algor Simulation, if it is not already running. Use the file, Exercise G.ach, in the
"Exercise G\Input File" folder copied to your computer from the class directory or Solutions CD.
"Open"
(*.ach)"
"Exercise G.ach"

this screen.
drop-down box.
Select the file "Exercise G.ach" in the "Exercise G\Input
File" directory.
"Open"
"OK"

Meshing the Model

"Mesh: Model Mesh
Settings"

"Options"
Select the "Absolute mesh size" option in the "Type"

drop-down box.
0.5
"OK"
"Mesh model"
"No"

Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse

Mouse
"Modify Material"
"Edit Properties"
1.00
Type "1.00" in the "Thermal conductivity" field.
3/15/2010
51
Exercise G
"OK"
"OK"
Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse

Mouse
"Modify Material"
"Edit Properties"
0.01
"OK"
"OK"

Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
52

Click on one of the lower, half-cylindrical surfaces of the
cold finger (-Y end).
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click on the other lower,
half-cylindrical surface of the cold finger.
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click on the bottom surface
of the cold finger.
Mouse

Temperatures"
-196
Select the "Add" pull-out menu and then select the

"Surface Applied Temperatures" command.
"OK"
Mouse
view so that the top surface of the model can be seen (+Y end).
Mouse
Click on the surface at the top of the detector.
Mouse
"Add: Surface Radiation

Load"
0.9

"Surface Radiation Load" command.
27
"OK"
Mouse
"Add: Heat Generation"
Select the "Add" pull-out menu and select the "Heat

Generation" command.
Type "0.9" in the "Function" field.
3/15/2010
Exercise G
0.025
Type "0.025" in the "Internal Heat Generation" field.
"OK"
Mouse
"Modify Analysis
Parameters"
Mouse
Click on the "Advanced" tab.
Mouse
Activate the "Perform" checkbox. Nonlinear iterations are

required because radiation is a nonlinear function.
"OK"
"Tools: FEA Editor"
"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
Mouse

and loaded in the Results environment.
environment.
analyzed and then loaded in the Results environment.
visible.
Viewing the Results

By default, the temperature profile will be displayed in the Results environment. It can be seen that the
temperature at the top of the electric heater and throughout the detector is approximately 55.9C and that
this is the hottest part of the model.
A completed archive, with results, is located in the "Exercise G\Results Archive" folder copied to your
computer from the class directory or Solutions CD.
3/15/2010
53
Exercise G
54
3/15/2010
Exercise H
Transistor Case Model
Brick Elements

Specifying surface convection load
Setting up and running a transient heat transfer analysis
Objective:
Perform a transient heat transfer analysis to determine the cooling effect of air blown
over a transistor case.
Geometry:
Use the file, Exercise H.ach, in the "Exercise H\Input File" folder copied to your
computer from the class directory or Solutions CD. Use the default mesh size.
Loading:
The free ends of the wires are 150C. Apply convection to these surfaces at an ambient
temperature of 150C with a convection coefficient of 100 J/(s*C*mm2).
25C air is blown across the top surface of the case. At the beginning of the analysis, the
convection coefficient is 2.5E-7 J/(s*C*mm2). After 10 minutes, the convection
coefficient is 2.5E-3 J/(s*C*mm2).
Element:
Brick
Material:
Wires: Mass density = 8.933E-9 N*s2/mm/mm3

Case:
Mass density = 2.65E-10 N*s2/mm/mm3

3/15/2010
55
Exercise H
Analysis
Parameters:
Number of time steps = 20

Duration = 600 s
Load Curve:
Time (s)
Factor
600
10000
Results:
Minimum
Temperature at
10 Minutes
27.5 C
56
3/15/2010
Exercise H
Solution
Opening the Model
Start Autodesk Algor Simulation, if it is not already running. Use the file, Exercise H.ach, in the
"Exercise H\Input File" folder copied to your computer from the class directory or Solutions CD.
"Open"
(*.ach)"
"Exercise H.ach"

this screen.
drop-down box.
Select the file "Exercise H.ach" in the "Exercise H\Input
File" directory.
"Open"
"OK"

Meshing the Model

"Mesh: Model Mesh
Settings"
"Mesh model"

Press the "Mesh model" button on the "Model Mesh
Settings" dialog to generate a mesh using the default settings.
"No"

Mouse
Mouse
"Modify Material"

"Modify Material" command.
"Edit Properties"
8.933e-9
Type "8.933e-9" in the "Mass density" field.
0.005
385000
Type "385000" in the "Specific heat" field.
"OK"
Press the "OK" button to close the "Element Material

<Ctrl> Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
3/15/2010
57
Exercise H
Selection" dialog.
view.
"OK"
Mouse
"Modify Material"
"Edit Properties"
2.65e-10
Type "2.65e-10" in the "Mass Density" field.
0.0104
Type "0.0104" in the "Thermal Conductivity" field.
745000
Type "745000" in the "Specific heat" field.

Selection" dialog.
"OK"
"OK"

View"
Mouse
Draw a box enclosing the bottoms of both wires.
Mouse

Loads"

"Surface Convection Loads" command.
Type "100" in the "Temperature Independent
100
150
"OK"
"View: Rotate"
Mouse

command.
Rotate the model slightly so that you can see the top surface
of the transistor case.
Mouse
Click on the top surface of the transistor case.
Mouse

Load"

"Surface Convection Load" command.
Type "2.5e-7" in the "Temperature Independent
2.5e-7
"1"
58

command.
"Shape" pull-out menu. Choose the "Rectangle" command.
"Select" pull-out menu. Choose the "Surfaces" command.
Select the "1" option in the "Load Curve" field.
3/15/2010
Exercise H
"View / Edit Load Curve"
Press the "View / Edit Load Curve" button in the

"Convection Coefficient" section.
Type "1" in the first row of the "Multiplier" column.
"Add Row"
Press the "Add Row" button.
600
Type "600" in the second row of the "Time" column.
10000
Type "10000" in the second row of the "Multiplier" column.
"OK"
Press the "OK" button to close the "Multiplier Table Editor."
25
"OK"
Mouse
"Modify Analysis
Parameters"
600

Type "600" in the first row of the "Time" column.
20
Type "20" in the first row of the "Steps" column.
"OK"
"Tools: FEA Editor"
"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
Mouse

and loaded in the Results environment.
environment.
"Perform Analysis" command. The model appear in
the Results environment while the solution is running. The
display will update for each time step as it is completed.
visible.
Viewing the Results

Previous" or
Next"

select the "Load Case" pull-out menu. Use the
"Previous" or "Next" commands to toggle through the
load cases to see how the temperature varies with time.
A completed archive with results is located in the "Exercise H\Results Archive" folder in the class directory
3/15/2010
59
Exercise H
60
3/15/2010
Exercise I
Disk Brake Rotor Heat-up and Stress
Brick Elements
Applying a surface heat flux load
Using the temperature results from a transient heat transfer analysis as a thermal
load in a linear static stress analysis
Objective:
Perform a transient heat transfer analysis to determine the temperature profile of

the rotor during braking. Choose the time step with the maximum temperature
differential and use these temperatures to determine the thermal stress via a second
design scenario. Use mirror planes to observe a full-model representation.
Geometry:
Use the one-eight symmetry model file, Exercise I.step, in the "Exercise I\
Input File" folder copied to your computer from the class directory or Solutions
CD. Use 50% of the default mesh size.
Thermal Loading:
Define a constant applied temperature of 100 F at the hub bore surface.

Specify a heat flux of 4000 in.lbf/(s*in2). The heat flux will decrease linearly
from the full magnitude to zero during the duration of the simulation event.
Constraints
(Stress Analysis):
Apply the appropriate symmetry boundary conditions to each of the model's

three planes of symmetry.
3/15/2010
61
Exercise I
Element:
Brick
Material:
Thermal Analysis:

Thermal conductivity = 6 in*lbf/(s*in*F)
Specific heat = 500,000 in*lbf/(lbf*s2/in*F)
Stress Analysis:

Modulus of Elasticity = 18e6 psi
Poisson's Ratio 0.265
Thermal Coef. of Expansion = 7.2e-6 / F
Thermal Analysis
Parameters:
Duration = 20 s
Number of Steps = 10
Default Nodal Temperature = 100 F
Thermal
Load Curve:
Element Data
(Stress Analysis):
Time (s)
Factor
20
Stress Free Reference Temperature = 80 F
Results:
62
Maximum
Temperature at
12 Seconds
Maximum
von Mises Stress
~321 F
~22,923 psi
3/15/2010
Exercise I
Solution
Starting the Model
Start Autodesk Algor Simulation, if it is not already running. Use the file, Exercise I.step, in the
"Exercise I\Input File" folder copied to your computer from the class directory or Solutions CD.
"Open"
"Exercise I.step"
program is already running, go to "File: Open" to access
this screen.
Navigate to the location of the "Exercise I.step" file on
"Open"
Mouse
"Thermal: Transient Heat
Transfer"

Press the menu button to the right of the analysis type field.
Select the "Thermal" pull-out menu, and choose the
"Transient Heat Transfer" option.
"OK"

"OK"
Meshing the Model

"Mesh: Model Mesh
Settings"
Mouse
"Mesh model"
"No"

Move the slider towards the right to change the mesh size to
"50%."
Settings" dialog.
meshing results.
Applying the Thermal Loads


"Select" pull-out menu. Choose the "Surfaces" command.
Mouse
Click on the hub bore surface.
Mouse

Temperature"
100

Applied Temperature" command.
Type "100" into the "Magnitude" field.
3/15/2010
63
Exercise I
"OK"
Mouse
Click on the annular surface of the rotor where the disk

brake pad would be in contact.
Mouse
"Add: Surface Heat Flux"

Heat Flux" command.
4000
Type "4000" into the "Magnitude" field.
Specify "1" in the "Load Curve" field.
"OK"
Defining the Thermal Material Data and Analysis Parameters

Mouse
Double-click the "Material" heading under Part 1 in the

tree view.
"Edit Properties"
6.9e-4 <Tab>
6 <Tab>
500000
Type "6.9e-4" into the "Mass density" field, press <Tab>,

enter "6" into the "Thermal conductivity" field, press
<Tab>, and enter "500000" into the "Specific heat" field.
Press the "OK" button to dismiss the "Element Material
Selection" dialog.
Type "20" into the first row of the "Time" column in the
Event table.
"OK"
"OK"
20
10
Type "10" into the first row of the "Steps" column.
"Load Curves"
Press the "Load Curves" button.
"Insert Row"
0 <Enter> 1 <Enter>
20 <Enter> 0
"OK"
Mouse
64
Type "0" in the first row of the "Time" column, press

<Enter>, type "1" in the first row of the "Factor" column,
press <Enter>, type "20" in the second row of the "Time"
column, press <Enter>, and type "0" in the second row of
the "Factor" column.
Press the "OK" button to close the "Load Curve Input"
dialog.
Click on the "Options" tab of the "Analysis Parameters"
dialog.
100
Type "100" into the "Default nodal temperature" field.
"OK"
3/15/2010
Exercise I
Running the Thermal Analysis

"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
Mouse

Once the model is displayed in the Results environment,
press the "Toggle Load and Constraint Display" toolbar
button to hide the load and constraint symbols.
The display will continue to be updated during the analysis as each time step computation is completed.
Observe how the temperatures rise at first and then begin to decrease later in the braking cycle. Initially,
temperature results will be shown by default. We will identify the time step in which the maximum
temperature is reached. Then, we will use mirror planes to visualize a full-model representation of the disk
brake rotor.
Viewing the Results

Previous" or
Next"
Mouse
<Ctrl> Mouse
Mouse
"View: Enclose"
Mouse

select the "Load Case" pull-out menu. Use the
"Previous" or "Next" commands to toggle through the
load cases to find when the maximum temperature occurs.
This should be time step 6.
Select the "Plane 1 < XY >" heading under "Mirror Planes" in
the tree view
Holding the <Ctrl> key, also select the "Plane 2 < YZ >" and
"Plane 3 < XZ >" headings under "Mirror Planes."
"Activate" command.
"Enclose" command.
Click and drag using the middle mouse button to dynamically
rotate the model in the display window. Inspect the
temperature profile as desired.
Creating a New Design Scenario for the Stress Analysis
"Tools: FEA Editor"

Editor" command. This will return the model to the FEA
Editor environment.
Mouse

Linear: Static Stress with
Linear Material Models "
Select the "Set Current Analysis Type" pull-out menu and

then the "Linear" pull-out menu. Choose the "Static Stress
Press the "Yes" button to create a new design scenario for
this analysis.
"Yes"
Compare the maximum temperature magnitude and the time of its occurrence to the values shown in the
results table at the end of the exercise description. Note the time step number. It should be half of the time,
3/15/2010
65
Exercise I
in seconds, when the maximum temperature occurred because we were calculating one time step for each
2-second interval.
Defining the Constraints and Load

The constraints consist of symmetry boundary conditions at the three planes of symmetry, which are
consistent with the global Cartesian coordinate system planes. The only load for the stress analysis will be
the temperatures from Design Scenario 1, which will be specified within the analysis parameters dialog.
View"
Mouse
Mouse

Conditions"

"X Symmetry"
"OK"
Mouse
Click and drag the mouse to draw a rectangle enclosing

only the bottom edge of the model as currently displayed
(-Y end). Do not enclose any of the small slot surfaces.
Mouse

Conditions"

"Y Symmetry"
"OK"

View"
Mouse

command.
Click and drag the mouse to draw a rectangle enclosing only
the bottom edge of the model as currently displayed (-Z end).
Mouse

Conditions"

"Z Symmetry"
Press the "Z Symmetry" button.
"OK"

View"
1
66

command.
The surface select mode should still be in effect.
Click and drag the mouse to draw a rectangle enclosing
only the left edge of the model as currently displayed
(-X end). Do not enclose any of the small slot surfaces.

View" command.
Enter a value of "1" into the "Thermal" column for
Index 1of the "Load Case Multipliers" table.
3/15/2010
Exercise I
Mouse
Select the "Thermal/Electrical" tab.
"Transient analysis"
Using the provided pull-down menu, select the "Transient

analysis" option in the "Source of nodal Temperatures"
field.
"Browse"
Press the "Browse" button.
Mouse
Navigate to and select the file "ds.tto" located in the

"Exercise I.ds_data\1" folder. This is the transient
temperature output file from design scenario 1.
"Open"
"Specified"
Using the provided pull-down menu, select the "Specified"

option in the "Time step from heat transfer analysis" field.
Type "6" into the "Time step" input field.
"OK"
Defining the Material Properties

The mass density will already be defined, since this was specified as part of the material's thermal
properties. We must now add the elastic properties needed for stress analysis.
Mouse
Double-click the "Material" heading under Part 1 in the

tree view.
"Edit Properties"
18e6 <Tab>
0.265 <Tab>
7.2e-6
"OK"
"OK"
Type "18e6" into the "Modulus of Elasticity" field, press

<Tab>, enter "0.265" into the "Poisson's Ratio" field,
press <Tab>, and enter "7.2e-6" into the "Thermal
Coefficient of Expansion" field. We do not need to
specify the shear modulus. This will be calculated
automatically for isotropic materials.
Press the "OK" button to dismiss the "Element Material
Selection" dialog.
Running the Static Stress Analysis

"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"

Once the model appears in the Results environment, compare the maximum von Mises stress to the value
shown in the results table at the end of the exercise description. If desired, once again activate the mirror
planes to visualize a full-model representation of the rotor and/or rotate the model to inspect the overall
stress pattern.
A completed archive is located in the "Exercise I\Results Archive" folder in the class directory or in the
copy of the solutions folders on your computer.
3/15/2010
67
Exercise I
68
3/15/2010
Exercise SS-1
Tower Model Response Spectrum Analysis
Objective:
Perform a modal analysis of the model shown below and then a response spectrum
analysis (using a second design scenario). Solve for the first 7 natural frequencies.
Geometry:
Exercise SS-1\Input File" folder copied to your computer).
The plates are 2" thick.
The beams have a 2" x 2" square cross-section.
Loading:
A displacement vs. period spectrum with an oscillating frequency of 20 Hz and a

damping ratio of 5% of critical damping is applied in the X, Y and Z directions.
Constraints:
Element:
Plate and beam
Material:
3/15/2010
69
Self Study: Exercise SS-1
Results:
Response Spectrum Resultant Load Case Results
70
von Mises Stress

(psi)
Beam & Truss

Worst Stress
(psi)
Maximum
Deflection
(in)
~28,541
~61,138
~2.48
3/15/2010
Solution
Opening the Model
Start Autodesk Algor Simulation, if it is not already running. Use the file Exercise SS-1.ach in the "Self
Study Exercises\ Exercise SS-1\Input File" folder copied to your computer from the class directory or
Solutions CD.
"Open"
(*.ach)"
"Exercise SS-1.ach"

this screen.
drop-down box.
Select the file "Exercise SS-1.ach" in the "Self Study
Exercises\Exercise SS-1\Input File" directory.
"Open"
"OK"

The model will appear in the FEA Editor environment. The analysis type, element data, and material have
already been specified. You will need to add the boundary conditions, define the analysis parameters, and
run the modal analysis.
Applying Constraints
View"

command.
Mouse
Draw a box enclosing the bottom of the legs.
Mouse

Conditions"
Select the "Add" pull-out menu and then select the "Nodal
"Fixed"
"OK"
3/15/2010
71
Modifying the Analysis Parameters

Mouse
"Modify Analysis
Parameters"

calculate" field.
"OK"
Running the Modal Analysis and Viewing the Results

"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
View"
Next"
"Tools: FEA Editor"

View" command.
select the "Load Case" pull-out menu. Use the "Next"
command to toggle through the mode shapes.
Editor" command to run the response spectrum analysis.
Setting Up the Response Spectrum Analysis

Mouse
Right-click on the "1 <Design Scenario 1>" 'heading in the

tree view.
"Copy"
Select the "Copy" command.
Mouse
Linear: Response Spectrum"
"No"
Mouse
"Modify Analysis
Parameters"
"Spectrum Data"
Press the "Spectrum Data" button.
"Generate Response
Spectrum"
1
1
72
Right-click on the "Analysis Type" heading in the tree

view.
Select the "Set Current Analysis Type" pull-out menu
"Response Spectrum" command.
Press the "No" button when prompted about creating a new
design scenario, since you've already created a copy of the
first design scenario.
view.
Activate the "Generate Response Spectrum" checkbox.

Type "1" in the "X Dir" field.
Type "1" in the "Y Dir" field.
3/15/2010

1
Type "1" in the "Z Dir" field.
20
Type "20" in the "Oscillating Frequency (Hz)" field.
0.05
Type "0.05" in the "Damping Ratio (0.01 = 1%)" field.
Type "1" in the "Scale Factor" field.

Press the "OK" button to close the "Response Spectrum
Analysis Input" dialog.
Press the "OK" button to close the "Analysis Parameters
Response Spectrum" dialog.
"OK"
"OK"
Running the Response Spectrum Analysis and Viewing the Results

"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
"Results Options: Smooth
Results"
"Results: Stress: Beam and
Truss: Worst Stress"
Magnitude"

analyzed and displayed in the Results environment.
Access the RESULTS OPTIONS pull-down menu and activate
the "Resultant" command, if it is not already activated. The
resultant of the 7 mode shape responses will be shown.
Access the RESULTS pull-down menu and select the "Stress"
pull-out menu. Choose the "von Mises" command.
activate the "Smooth Results" option, if it is not already
activated.
Access the RESULTS pull-down menu, select the "Stress"
pull-out menu, and then the Beam and Truss pull-out menu.
Choose the "Worst Stress" command.
command.
A completed archive with results is located in the "Self Study Exercises\Exercise SS-1\Results Archive"
3/15/2010
73
74
3/15/2010
Exercise SS-2
Tower Model Random Vibration Analysis
Objective:
Perform a random vibration analysis of the model below (using a second design
scenario). The modal analysis has already been completed and its results are included
within the input file. The first seven (7) natural frequencies were calculated. Determine
the stresses and displacement due to random vibration (resultant of 7 modes).
Geometry:
Use the file, Exercise SS-2.ach, in the class directory (or the "Self Study Exercises\
Exercise SS-2\Input File" folder copied to your computer). The beams have a 2 inch
square cross-section and the plates are 2 inches thick (predefined).
Loading:
An acceleration2/Hz vs. frequency PSD with the following values will be applied in the
X and Y directions (cross-spectral density):
Frequency (Hz)
Amplitude
0
20
40
50
75
250
200
100
The system has a damping ratio of 5% of critical damping.
3/15/2010
75
Constraints:
The bottom of each of the four supports is fully constrained.
Elements:
Plate and beam.
Material:
Results:
Random Vibration Resultant Load Case Results
76
von Mises Stress

(psi)
Beam & Truss

Worst Stress
(psi)
Maximum
Deflection
(in)
~4,578
~10,416
~0.19
3/15/2010
Solution
Opening the Model
the Exercise SS-2.ach file from the "Self Study Exercises\Exercise SS-2\Input File" folder in the class
directory to your computer if it is not there already. The prerequisite modal analysis has already been
performed and its results are included in the input archive.
"Open"
(*.ach)"
"Exercise SS-2.ach"

this screen.
drop-down box.
Select the file Exercise SS-2.ach in "Self Study
"Open"
Setting Up the Random Vibration Analysis

Mouse

tree view.
"Copy"
Mouse

Linear: Random Vibration"
"No"

"Random Vibration" command.
Press the "No" button when asked if you want to create a
new design scenario.
Mouse
"Modify Analysis
Parameters"
"Analysis Data"
Press the "Analysis Data" button.
0.05
Type "0.05" in the "Damping Ratio" field.
"X and Y"
Select the "X and Y" radio button for the Cross-Spectral
Density in the "Excitation Type" section.
"Insert Row" {three times}
Press the "Insert Row" button three times.
75
Type "75" in the first row of the "Amplitude" column.
20

column.
250
Type "250" in the second row of the "Amplitude" column.

3/15/2010
77

40
Type "40" in the third row of the "Frequency (Hz)" column.
200
Type "200" in the third row of the "Amplitude" column.
50
Type "50" in the fourth row of the "Frequency (Hz)"

column.
100
Type "100" in the fourth row of the "Amplitude" column.

Press the "OK" button to close the "Random Vibration
Random Vibration" dialog.
"OK"
"OK"
Running the Analysis and Viewing the Results

"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"

For each of the three result types we will examine von Mises Stress, Beam and Truss Worst Stress, and
Displacement Magnitude compare your results to those listed in the table at the end of the exercise
description. Initially, the von Mises Stress results will be shown by default. We will look at the resultant
of the responses for the seven calculated vibration modes.

Magnitude"

activate the "Resultant" option, if it is not already activated.
The resultant of the 7 mode shape responses will be shown.
command.
78
3/15/2010
Exercise SS-3
Tower Model Frequency Response
Objective:
Perform a frequency response analysis of the model below (using a second design
scenario). Solve for the first 7 natural frequencies. The modal analysis has already been
completed and its results are included within the input file.
Geometry:
Exercise SS-3\Input File" folder copied to your computer.
Loading:
A 6 g acceleration in the X direction is applied to the base nodes at the following

frequencies:
10 Hz
25 Hz
75 Hz
100 Hz
The model has 5% of critical damping.
Constraints:
Element:
Plate and beam
Material:

3/15/2010
79
Results:
Frequency Response Load Case 1 Results (SRSS)
80
von Mises Stress

(psi)
Beam & Truss

Worst Stress
(psi)
Maximum
Deflection
(in)
~6,314
~40,650
~0.75
3/15/2010
Solution
Opening the Model
the Exercise SS-3.ach file to your computer from the "Self Study Exercises\Exercise SS-3\Input File" folder
in the class directory if it is not on your computer already.
"Open"
(*.ach)"
"Exercise SS-3.ach"

this screen.
drop-down box.
Select the file Exercise SS-3.ach in the "Self Study
"Open"
Setting Up the Frequency Response Analysis

Mouse

tree view.
"Copy"
Mouse

Linear: Frequency Response"
"No"

"Frequency Response" command.
Press the "No" button when asked if you want to create a
new design scenario.
Mouse
"Modify Analysis
Parameters"
"Analysis Setup"
Press the "Analysis Setup" button.
Mouse
Click on the "Exciting Frequencies" tab.
10<Tab>25<Tab>75<Tab>
100
Type "10" in the first row of the "Frequency (Hz)"

column, press <Tab>, type "25", press <Tab>, type "75",
press <Tab> and then type "100".
"Apply"
Press the "Apply" button.
Mouse
Click on the "Excited Nodes" tab.
"1 Freq Index 1"
Confirm that the "1 Freq Index 1" option is selected in

the "Index of Exciting Frequency Definition" field.
Type "1" in the "Scaling Factor for Amplitudes" field.
Mouse
Click on the "Damping Ratios" tab.

3/15/2010
81

"Insert Row"

Type "0.05" in the first row of the "Damping Ratio"
column.
column.
Type "0.05" in the second row of the "Damping Ratio"
column.
0.05
100
0.05
"Apply"
Mouse
Click on the "Amplitudes" tab.
"Insert Row"
15
Type "15" in the first row of the "Acceleration" column.
100

column.
15
Type "15" in the second row of the "Acceleration" column.
"Apply"

Press the "OK" button to close the "Frequency Response
Frequency Response" dialog..
"OK"
"OK"

"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
"Results Options: Response
Type SRSS"
Results: Displacement:
Magnitude"
Next"

select the "Response Type" pull-out menu. Select the
"SRSS" command.
command.
select the "Load Case" pull-out menu. Use the "Next"
command to see the results for the remaining excitation
frequencies.
82
3/15/2010
Exercise SS-4
Pressure Vessel Model Transient Stress (Direct Integration)
Brick Elements
Objective:
Perform a transient stress (direct integration) analysis on the pressure vessel shown
below.
Geometry:
Use the file Exercise SS-4.igs in the class directory (or in the "Self Study Exercises\
Exercise SS-4\Input File" folder copied to your computer). Mesh the model at 75% of
Loading:
The large cylinder has an initial pressure of 0 psi. The pressure is increased to 1000
psi at 5 seconds. The pressure is then increased to 3000 psi at 10 seconds.
The alpha and beta damping coefficients are 0.05.
Constraints:
The ends of the large cylinder are fully constrained.
Element:
Brick
Material:
Aluminum (6061-T6)
3/15/2010
83
Results:
84
Time
(seconds)
Maximum
von Mises Stress (psi)
0.1
5
127
25,591
10
76,849
3/15/2010
Solution
Opening the Model
the Exercise SS-4.igs file from the class directory (or the "Self Study Exercises\Exercise SS-4\Input File"
folder copied to your computer).
"Open"
"IGES (*.igs, *.iges)"
"Exercise SS-4.igs"

this screen.
Select the "IGES (*.igs, *.iges)" option in the CAD Files
section of the "Files of type:" drop-down box.
Navigate to the location of the "Exercise SS-4.igs" file on
"Open"
"Linear: Transient Stress

(Direct Integration)"
Press the right-arrow button to the right of the analysis type

input field in the "Choose Analysis Type" dialog.
Select the "Linear" pull-out menu and choose the
"Transient Stress (Direct Integration)" analysis type.
"OK"
Mouse
Meshing the Model

"Mesh: Model Mesh
Settings"
Mouse

Move the "Mesh size" slider towards "Fine" until it
indicates "75%."
"Mesh model"
"No"

Mouse

view.
"Modify Material"
"Aluminum 6061-T6; 6061T651"
Select the "Aluminum 6061-T6; 6061-T651" item in the

"Select Material" section.
"OK"
3/15/2010
85
Applying Loads and Constraints

View"
Mouse
Draw a box enclosing the right edge of the model (+X end).
<Ctrl> Mouse
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, draw a box enclosing the left
edge of the model (-X end).
Mouse

Conditions"

"Fixed"
"OK"

View"
86

command.
command.
Access the SELECTION pull-down menu and the "Shape"

pull-out menu. Select the "Point" command.
View" command.
Mouse
Click on one of the inner surfaces of the small cylinder.
<Ctrl> Mouse
Holding down the <Ctrl> key, click on the other inner

surface of the small cylinder and the two inner surfaces of
the large cylinder.
Mouse
"Add: Surface
Pressure/Tractions"
1000

"Curve"
Press the "Curve" button to begin defining Load Curve 1.
"Add Row" "Add Row"
Press the "Add Row" button twice.
5 <Tab> 1 <Tab>
10 <Tab> 3 <Enter>
Type "5" in the second row of the "Time" column, press

<Tab>, type "1", press <Tab>, type "10" (you will be in
the third row of the "Time" column), press <Tab>, type
"3", and press <Enter>.
"OK"
Press the "OK" button to exit the "Multiplier Table Editor."
"OK"
Press the "OK" button to accept the pressure load.
3/15/2010
Defining the Analysis Parameters

view.
Mouse
"Modify Analysis
Parameters"
100

Type "100" in the "Number of time steps" field.
0.1
Type "0.1" in the "Time-step size" field.
0.05
Type "0.05" in the "Alpha" field.
0.05
Type "0.05" in the "Beta" field.
"OK"

"Analysis: Perform
Analysis"
Middle"
Last"

select the "Load Case" pull-out menu. Use the "Middle"
command to jump to the 50th time step (5 seconds).
select the "Load Case" pull-out menu. Use the "Last"
command to jump to the 100th time step (10 seconds).
Compare the stress results at 0.1, 5, and 10 seconds to the values shown in the results table at the end of the
Click and drag using the middle mouse button to
dynamically rotate the model. Position it so that you can
clearly see the maximum stress area on the inside (where
the two cylinders intersect).
Using the "M" toolbar icon, activate the "Maximum
Result Probe."
Mouse
Mouse
Mouse
Select the node at the maximum stress probe.
Mouse
"Graph Value(s)"
Choose the "Graph Value(s)" command.
Since this is a transient analysis, multiple stress results exist and they may be graphed as a function of time.
Magnitude"
Mouse

command. The vertical scale of the graph will be updated.
Press the lower, smaller "X" button in the upper right corner
of the display to close the graph window. Alternately, select
the Presentation 1heading in the tree view to return to the
contour plot, leaving the graph accessible as Presentation 2.
3/15/2010
87
88
3/15/2010
Autodesk, Inc., 111 McInnis Parkway, San Rafael, California 94903 USA
Autodesk and Algor are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., and/or its subsidiaries and/or affiliates in the USA
and/or other countries. All other brand names, product names, or trademarks belong to their respective holders.
2010 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved. 658B1-A80000-PM01A

Autodesk Algor Simulation - 2011

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Autodesk Algor Simulation - 2011

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Autodesk Algor

Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Seminar Notes

2010 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved.

Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Seminar Notes

Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Seminar Notes

Installing and Running Autodesk Algor Simulation...........................................................1

Chapter 1: Using Autodesk Algor Simulation ................ 15

Chapter 2: Static Stress Analysis Using CAD Solid Models ... 33

Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Seminar Notes

Chapter 3: Results Evaluation and Presentation ............. 65

Chapter 4: Midplane Meshing and Plate Elements ............. 83

Chapter 5: Meshing ......................................... 97

Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Seminar Notes

Chapter 6: Introduction to Contact ........................ 109

Chapter 7: Introduction to Linear Dynamics ................ 125

Chapter 8: Steady-State Heat Transfer ..................... 137

Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Seminar Notes

Chapter 9: Transient Heat Transfer ........................ 165

Chapter 10: Thermal Stress ................................ 171

Self Study: Linear Dynamics Supplement .................... 177

Appendix A Finite Element Method Using Hand Calculations . 207

Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Seminar Notes

Software Installation, Services, and Support

Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Seminar Notes

Dual Core or Dual Processor Intel 64

Dual Core or Dual Processor Intel 64

2 GB RAM or higher (3 GB for MES

100 GB of free disk space or higher

30 GB of free disk space or higher

256 MB or higher OpenGL

512 MB or higher OpenGL

Supported Operating Systems:

Microsoft Windows 7 (32-bit and 64-bit editions)

Other Requirements (All Platforms):

Mouse or pointing device

Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Seminar Notes

Autodesk Algor Simulation Help

How to Access the Help Files

Features of the Help Files

Figure I.1: Autodesk Algor Simulation Users Guide

Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Seminar Notes

Autodesk Algor Simulation product page

Webcasts and Web Courses

Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Seminar Notes

How to Receive Technical Support

(412) 967-2700 [or in USA/Canada: (800) 482-5467]

Obtain phone, fax, and/or e-mail information from your reseller.

When contacting Technical Support:

Have your contract number ready before contacting Technical Support.

Know the current version number of your software.

Have specific questions ready.

Remember, Technical Support personnel cannot perform, comment on, or make

A "subscription" version: Customers with a current maintenance subscription are

A service pack: Incorporates minor improvements to a major or subscription release and

Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Seminar Notes

Mechanical stress (stress analysis)

Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Seminar Notes

Basic FEA Concepts

Figure I.2: Degrees of Freedom of a Node

Figure I.3: Communication through Common Nodes

Autodesk Algor Simulation 2011 Seminar Notes

Static Stress with Linear Material Models

Figure I.4: Connection via "Smart Bonding"